Intellisave AX700

IntelliSave AX700
Se r vi c e G ui de
IntelliSave AX700
Anesthesia Machine
Ane sthes ia Care
Part Number 10620-91 56 072015

1Table of Contents
1 Introduction 9
1.1 Who Should Use This Guide 9

1.2 How to Use This Guide 9
1.3 What Is Covered 9
1.3.1 Service Tags 10
1.4 Release Structure of This Guide 10
1.4.1 Service Workflow 11
1.5 Responsibility of the Manufacturer 11
1.6 Abbreviations 12
1.7 Document Style Conventions 13
1.8 Internal Color Coding for Gases 13
1.9 Passwords 13
1.10 Responsibility of the User 14
1.11 Warnings, Cautions and Notes 15
1.12 General Safety Precautions 15
1.12.1 Warnings 15
1.12.2 Cautions 17
1.12.3 Symbols 18
2 Theory of Operation 21
2.1 Product Description 21

2.1.1 Indications for Use 21
2.1.2 Orientation Overview 22
2.1.3 Functional Blocks 26
2.1.4 Options 28
2.1.5 Built-in Safety Features 29
2.1.6 Gas Flow Performance 30
2.2 Pneumatics Description 31
2.2.1 Pneumatic Symbols 31
2.2.2 Pneumatics Diagram for Rel. 2.0 33
2.2.3 Oxygen 34
2.2.4 Air 34
2.2.5 N2O 34
2.2.6 Drive Gas Selection 35
2.2.7 AGSS/WAGD 35
2.2.8 Patient Suction 35
2.2.9 Ventilator 35
2.2.10 Integrated Breathing System (IBS) 36
2.2.11 Volume Monitoring 37
IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015 1

2.2.12 Gas Monitoring 37
2.3 Electronics Description 37
2.3.1 Power Management Board 38
2.3.2 Power Supply 39
2.3.3 Electronic Gas Mixer (EGM) 40
2.3.4 Touch-Screen Controller 42
2.3.5 Multigas Module 42
2.3.6 SmartLog PC 49
2.3.7 Ventilator 50
2.4 Software Description 55
2.4.1 Software Block Diagram 55
2.4.2 Service Menu Structure/Descriptions 57
3 Installation 67
3.1 Electromagnetic Emissions 68

3.2 Site Preparation 71
3.2.1 Site Planning 71
3.2.2 Roles & Responsibilities 72
3.3 Site Requirements 73
3.4 Prerequisites 73
3.4.1 Tools Requirements 73
3.4.2 Safety Precautions 73
3.5 Installation Checklist 74
3.6 Unpacking and Checking the Shipment 74
3.6.1 Unpacking the Vertical Transport Box 74
3.6.2 Unpacking the Horizontal Transport Box 76
3.6.3 Initial Inspection 78
3.6.4 Claims For Damage and Repackaging 78
3.7 Assemble Mounts and Accessories 79
3.7.1 Monitor Arms 79
3.7.2 Pendant Interface 79
3.8 Connections 81
3.8.1 Connect Supplies 81
3.8.2 Connectivity to/from the SmartLog and RS232 ports 82
3.9 Checking the Machine 83
3.10 Configuration Tasks 83
3.10.1 Checking Customer-Specific Default Settings 84
3.10.2 Checking Country-Specific Default Settings 85
3.11 Handing Over the Machine 86
4 Maintenance 87
4.1 Preventive Maintenance Sequence 87

4.2 Recommended Frequency 88
4.3.1 Cleaning the IntelliSave AX700 90
4.4 Preventive Maintenance Procedures 91
2 IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015

4.4.1 Visual Inspection 91
4.4.2 Accessing the Machine 91
4.4.3 1-Year Maintenance 91
4.4.4 1-Year Maintenance Post Maintenance 110
4.4.5 2-year Maintenance 110
4.4.6 2-Year Maintenance Post Maintenance 112
4.4.7 4-year Maintenance 112
4.4.8 Post Maintenance 119
5 Performance Verification 121

5.1.1 Visual Inspection 122
5.2 Performance Verification Procedures 123
5.2.1 Internal Pressure Regulators Test 125
5.2.2 Yoke Tests 127
5.2.3 O2 Gas Supply Alarm Test 130
5.2.4 Air Gas Supply Alarm Test 132
5.2.5 N2O Gas Supply Alarm Test 133
5.2.6 High Pressure Leakage Tests 135
5.2.7 Dose System Leakage Test 140
5.2.8 Integrated Patient Suction Test 141
5.2.9 Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System (AGSS/WAGD) Test 142
5.2.10 Running the Self-tests 144
5.2.11 Auxiliary O2 Flowmeter Test 146
5.2.12 O2 Flush Test 147
5.2.13 Emergency Fresh Gas Test 148
5.2.14 O2 Fresh Gas Flow Test 148
5.2.15 Air Fresh Gas Flow Test 150
5.2.16 N2O Fresh Gas Flow Test 151
5.2.17 Auxiliary Fresh Gas Test 152
5.2.18 MPL Valve for IBS Test for Rel. 2.0 153
5.2.19 MPL Valve for Aux. Fresh Gas Outlet Test 154
5.2.20 MPL Valve for Ventilator Test 155
5.2.21 Drive Gas Selection and Drive Gas Alarm Test 158
5.2.22 Mains Alarm Test 162
5.2.23 IBS Switches Test 163
5.2.24 Volume Measurement Zeroing Function Test 164
5.2.25 Tidal Volume Test 165
5.2.26 Ped. Volume Measurement Test 166
5.2.27 Adult Volume Measurement Test 168
5.2.28 Pressure Measurement Test 170
5.2.29 PEEP Function Test 171
5.2.30 PCV Function Test 172
5.2.31 NPL Valve Test 172
5.2.32 System Pressure Alarm and Disconnection Alarm Test 175
5.2.33 High Pressure Alarm Test 176

5.2.34 O2 Fuel Cell Sensor Test 176
5.2.35 Multigas Module Test 176
5.2.36 Fans Test 178
5.2.37 Auxiliary Power Outlets Test 178
5.2.38 SmartLog Test 179
5.3 Safety Tests 180
5.3.1 Precautions 180
5.3.2 Safety Test Procedures 181
5.3.3 Electrical Safety Testing 185
5.3.4 System Test 188
5.4 After Testing and Repair 190
5.5 Reporting of Test Results 190
5.5.1 Test and Inspection Report 191
5.6 Vaporizer Tests 203
5.6.1 Leakage Test 203
5.6.2 Vaporizer Output Concentration Test 203
6 Calibration 209

6.1.1 Entering Calibration Menu 210
6.2 Calibration Procedures 210
6.3 Calibrating the O2 Flow 211
6.4 Calibrating the Air Flow 212
6.5 Calibrating the N2O Flow 214
6.6 Calibrating the O2 Inlet Pressure 215
6.7 Calibrating the Air Inlet Pressure 216
6.8 Calibrating the N2O Inlet Pressure 217
6.9 Calibrating the Ventilator Inspiratory Flow 219
6.10 Calibrating the Bag-in-Bottle and Patient Pressure 223
6.11 Calibrating the Flow Sensors 224
6.11.1 Calibrating the Adult Patient Flow Sensor 224
6.11.2 Calibrating the Ped. Patient Flow Sensor 226
6.12 Calibrating the PEEP Valve 227
6.13 Calibrating the Ventilator Temperature Compensation 229
6.14 Calibrating the Gas module 229
6.15 Calibrating the O2 Fuel-cell Sensor 230
6.16 Calibrating the Drive Gas Selection and Drive gas Low Alarm 231
6.16.1 Calibrating the Automatic Drive Gas Selection 232
6.16.2 Adjustment of Ventilator Drive Gas Low Alarm 233
6.17 Calibrating the Internal Pressure Regulators 235
6.18 Calibrating the Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System (AGSS/WAGD) 236
6.18.1 Calibrating the Active AGSS/WAGD (Option # C11) 237
6.18.2 Calibrating the Passive AGSS/WAGD (Option # C10) 238
7 Troubleshooting 239
7.1 How To Use This Section 239

7.2 Who Should Perform Repairs 239
7.3 Version Check 239
7.4 Troubleshooting Guide 240
7.4.1 Checks for Obvious Problems 240
7.4.2 Checks Before Opening the Machine 240
7.4.3 Troubleshooting Functional Blocks 241
7.4.4 Alarms Troubleshooting 249
7.4.5 SmartLog Troubleshooting 249
7.4.6 Troubleshooting the Individual Measurements or Applications 251
8 Repair 253
8.1 Who Should Perform Repairs 253

8.3 Repair Procedures 254
8.4 Accessing the Machine 255
8.4.1 Upper Rear Cover 255
8.4.2 Top Cover 255
8.4.3 Lower Rear Cover 256
8.4.4 Ventilator Drawer 257
8.4.5 Middle Rear Cover 257
8.4.6 Detach the anesthesia machine from a pendant 258
8.5 Assembling the Machine 258
8.6 Replacing the Electronic Gas Mixer (EGM) 259
8.7 Replacing the EGM Manifold 264
8.8 Replacing the Ventilator 267
8.9 Replacing the Power Management Board 273
8.10 Changing Fuses 277
8.10.1 Power Management Board Fuses 279
8.10.2 Ventilator Fuses 280
8.10.3 Auxiliary Power Outlet Fuses 281
8.10.4 Mains Power Inlet Fuses 281
8.11 Replacing Ventilator Valves 282
8.11.1 Replacing the ventilator inspiratory valve 282
8.11.2 Replacing the ventilator expiratory valve 290
8.12 Adjust the IBS Lock 298
8.13 Replacing the Optical Encoder 299
8.14 Software Installation 302
8.14.1 GUI (EGM) Software Installation 305
8.14.2 Ventilator (Whispa) Software Installation 308
8.14.3 SmartLog Software Installation 310
8.15 Software Compatibility Matrix 314
8.15.1 Software for non-RoHS Hardware 315
8.15.2 Software for RoHS Hardware 315
8.16 Test Requirements After Repairs 316

9 Service Parts and Tools 323
9.1 Service Kits for Preventive Maintenance 326

9.1.1 Service Kit, Annual, IntelliSave AX700- Rel. 1.0 326
9.1.3 Annual Service Kit, IBS IntelliSave AX 330
9.1.4 Service Kit, 2-Year, IntelliSave AX700 331
9.1.5 4- Year Service Kit 332
9.2 Repair Parts 334
9.2.1 Drawer Rail Repair Kit for Rel. 1.0 336
9.2.3 Wheel Base for IntelliSave 338
9.2.4 Counterweight Change Kit for IntelliSave 338
9.2.5 Support plate for 2x OD150 Cylinders 338
9.2.6 Rear Cover Assembly 340
9.2.7 Support Bar Assemblies for Cylinders 341
9.2.8 Left Side Profile Assembly 344
9.2.9 Flow markers and flow marker holders 346
9.2.10 Flowmeters 347
9.2.11 Vaporizer Gas Box 348
9.2.12 Table Plate Assembly 357
9.2.13 Rear Inlet Panel 359
9.2.14 Communications Board 363
9.2.15 Internal SmartLog PC Assembly 364
9.2.16 EGM Gas Box 365
9.2.17 EGM Valveblock Assembly 369
9.2.18 Top Shelf Assembly 373
9.2.19 Ventilator 375
9.2.20 Valve Block Assembly for Ventilator 379
9.2.21 IBS 385
9.2.22 IBS Assembly 387
9.2.23 IBS Base Assembly 391
9.2.24 Pneumatic Control Panel 394
9.2.25 Double Back Bar Assembly Kits 398
9.2.26 Gas Module Assembly 401
9.2.27 AGSS/ WAGD Manifolds 402
9.2.28 Inlet Connection Overview Table 405
9.2.29 Generic small parts kits 406
9.2.30 Vaporizers 407
9.3 Service Tools 408
9.3.1 Test Adapter Kit 414
9.3.2 Pneumatics Leakage Tester 415
A Technical Data 419
A.1 General 419

A.2 Gases 420

A.3 Electronic Gas Mixer (EGM) 421
A.4 Ventilator 422
A.5 Integrated Breathing System (IBS) 423
A.6 Multigas Module (Optional) 424
A.6.1 Gas Measurement Accuracy (Full Accuracy Specifications) 425
A.6.2 Cross-Gas Interference 425
A.7 Environment 427
A.8 Standards 427
A.9 Factory Default Settings 429
A.9.1 Electronic Gas Mixer Default Settings 429
A.9.2 Ventilator Default Settings 429
B Schematics 431
B.0.1 Pneumatics Description for Rel. 1.0 431

B.1 Pneumatics Diagram for Rel. 1.0 435
B.2 Pneumatics Diagram for Rel. 2.0 437
B.3 Electronics System Wiring Diagram- Top Level 439
B.3.1 System Wiring Diagram - Power Management Board 441
B.3.2 System Wiring Diagram - Ventilator 443
B.3.3 System Wiring Diagram - EGM 445

1
1Introduction
This Service Guide contains technical details for the IntelliSave AX700 anesthesia machine.
This guide provides a technical foundation to support effective troubleshooting and repair. It is not a
comprehensive, in-depth explanation of the product architecture or technical implementation. It offers
enough information on the functions and operations of the anesthesia machine so that engineers who
maintain and repair it are better able to understand how it works.
1.1 Who Should Use This Guide

This guide is for biomedical engineers or technicians responsible for installing, troubleshooting,
repairing, and maintaining the AX700 anesthesia machine.
1.2 How to Use This Guide

Printed: This guide is divided into a number of chapters. Navigate through the Table of Contents or
the Index to select the desired topic. Cross references with page numbers to other relevant sections are
also provided within the individual topics.
Electronic: This guide is divided into a number of main sections. Navigate through the table of
contents at the left of the screen to select the desired topic. Links to other relevant sections are also
provided within the individual topics. In addition, scrolling through the topics with the page up and
page down keys is also possible.
1.3 What Is Covered

This guide covers multiple releases of Philip’s IntelliSave AX700 anesthesia machines. All drawings,
procedures and parts are clearly marked for machines with various serial numbers.
IntelliSave AX700 anesthesia machines have the following physical characteristics:
Component Rel. 1.0 Rel. 2.0

Serial No. AM032013001-AM502012012 >=DK33500500
DK30100001-DK33500499
Inlet Pressure Label 4-6 (x100kPa) 58-87 psig 3-6 (x100kPa) 44-87 psig
Service Tags No Service Tags Available on the IntelliSave AX700
Rel. 2.0 machine, EGM, Ventilator
and Gas Module
Primary Drive Gas Air Air or O2

1 Introduction 1.4 Release Structure of This Guide
1.3.1 Service Tags

The service tag is a label visible on the back of the machine, as well as on the EGM, ventilator and gas
module. It contains the serial and service numbers, and is used by the manufacturer to record the
warranty status and the available support options. These numbers should be quoted when calling for
support.
The service tag contains the following information:

• REF: Part number of the machine, EGM, ventilator, or gas module
e.g. for IntelliSave AX700, the Ref is 10623-00
• SN: Serial number of the machine, EGM, ventilator, or gas module. For the IntelliSave AX700
machine, the serial number tells you which release the machine was part of
e.g. Rel. 1.0 machines have serial numbers AM032013001-AM502012012 or DK30100001-
DK33500499.
• Service #: Service Number used by service technicians when ordering replacements or service.
In combination with the serial number, the service number gives the manufacturer a clear record of
what was configured and what repairs were made, including what maintenance has been performed,
by whom and when, whether a part has been replaced etc.
NOTE For the EGM, ventilator, and gas module, the service tag is a 12 digit numerical code.
1.4 Release Structure of This Guide

• Chapter “Introduction“: Describes roles and responsibilities, gives an introduction on how to use
the guide together with conventions and abbreviations.
• Chapter “Theory of Operation“: Gives a detailed product overview and describes the pneumatics
and electronics systems. The Service menu structure is presented with descriptions of each setting.
• Chapter “Installation“: Provides information about site preparation and requirements together with
the steps to install the AX700.
• Chapter “Maintenance“: Contains the procedures related to performing preventive maintenance in
the field..
• Chapter “Performance Verification“: Lists the procedures to perform after preventive maintenance
or repair.
• Chapter “Calibration“: Describes how to calibrate the components. The procedures are used in
relation with preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, or repair.
• Chapter “Troubleshooting“: Explains how to troubleshoot the machine if problems arise. Tables list
possible machine difficulties and symptoms, along with probable causes, and recommended actions.

1.5 Responsibility of the Manufacturer 1 Introduction
• Chapter “Repair“: Provides procedures for how to remove and replace faulty components in the
machine.
• Chapter “Service Parts and Tools“: Provides an overview of service parts, service kits, and tool kits
including part numbers that can be ordered.
• Appendix A “Technical Data“: Lists the technical data of the machine including default factory
settings.
• Appendix B “Schematics“: Provides detailed diagrams for relevant parts of the system.
1.4.1 Service Workflow

The diagram illustrates the typical workflow for service as it relates to the chapter descriptions in this
service guide.
Installation Corrective Preventive

Maintenance Maintenance
Perform Register/Claim Confirm Issue Replace PM Kit

NOT OK
Installation Issue and
Checklist contact local
Service provider NOT OK
OK Troubleshooting
Performance
Verification
Calibration / OK
Repair
Test Report
Hand Over to
Customer
1.5 Responsibility of the Manufacturer

Philips/ Dameca only considers itself responsible for any effects on safety, EMC, reliability, and
performance of the equipment if:
• assembly, operations, add-ons, adjustments, modifications, repairs, and periodic maintenance are
carried out by persons authorized by the manufacturer, and
• the medical gas supply in the relevant rooms comply with medical gas requirements, and
• the machine is used in compliance with the instructions for use.
To ensure safety and EMC, use only those Philips/ Dameca parts and accessories specified for use with
the anesthesia machine. If non-Philips/ Dameca parts are used, the manufacturer is not liable for any
damage that these parts may cause to the equipment.

1 Introduction 1.6 Abbreviations
This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights reserved.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under the copyright laws.
Philips Anesthesia Care A/S
Manufacturer: Dameca A/S, Islevdalvej 211

DK - 2610 Roedovre, Denmark
Phone +45 4450 9990, Fax +45 4450 9999
info.ac@philips.com
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
The manufacturer makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including, but not
limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
Philips/ Dameca shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential
damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
1.6 Abbreviations
Abbreviations used in this guide are:
Abbreviation Description
the machine IntelliSave AX700 Anesthesia Machine
AA Anesthesia Agent
ABS CO2 Absorber
AGSS Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System
Air Compressed medical air
APL Adjustable Pressure Limit
BiB Bag-in-Bottle
DUT Device Under Test
EGM Electronic Gas Mixer
GUI Graphic User Interface
HLM Heart-Lung Mode
IBS Integrated Breathing System
MPL Maximum Pressure Limit
OS Operating System
NPL Negative Pressure Limit
PCV Pressure Controlled Ventilation
PEEP Positive End-Expiratory Pressure
PM Power Management
PSV Pressure Supported Ventilation
PRVT Pressure Regulated Volume Target
RoHS Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive, short for Directive on the restriction of
the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

1.7 Document Style Conventions 1 Introduction
Abbreviation Description
RR Respiration Rate
SIMV Synchronized Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation
STPD Standard Temperature (20°C or 68°F) and Pressure (1013 hPa (cmH2O), Dry
TV Tidal Volume
V(AC) Voltage Alternating Current
VAC Vacuum
VCV Volume Controlled Ventilation
VSV Volume Supported Ventilation
WAGD Waste Anesthesia Gas Disposal
Whispa Name of the ventilator platform used in the Siesta i Whispa, Dameca MRI508, Siesta i
TS, and IntelliSave AX700
1.7 Document Style Conventions

The following style conventions are used in this manual:
• Bold typeface is used for the names of menus, fields, field values, and other types of names shown
on the machine (for instance, Set Carrier gas to Air in Setup menu.).
NOTE Bold typeface is also used in other connections.
• Double quotes (“..”) are used for messages displayed on the screen (such as alarm texts, messages
during the self tests, etc.).
1.8 Internal Color Coding for Gases

All internal gas tubes is color coded using the european standard color coding for medical gases:
Gas Color
Air Black
N2O Blue
O2 White
Mixed gas Red
VAC Yellow
1.9 Passwords
In order to access different modes within the machine a password may be required. The passwords are
listed below.
Enter passwords:
1 Go to Setup menu -> Service.

1 Introduction 1.10 Responsibility of the User
2 Enter password according the table below.

To leave Service or Super User mode:
1 Go to Setup menu -> Service.
2 Enter a wrong password. Alternatively restart the machine.
Access Level Description Password

End User Operational personnel n/a
Access to all operational features.
Super User Philips/ Dameca-trained local personnel 26-23-8
Same as “End User”, but additionally access to the Installation
Menus.
Note: All changes made by a “Super User” will be stored as new
default values.
Service Philips/ Dameca-trained service engineers or local biomedical 91-34-80
engineers
Same as “Super User”, but additional access to ALL menus and
features including Installation, Calibration and Miscellaneous. 76-71-40
Note: In “Service” mode, patient flow and volume is measured in
STPD.
Note: Users logging on with this password cannot permanently
change settings outside of the Service menu. To do this the Super
User password must be user.
Note: For Rel. 1.0 machines: ALL changes made in “Service”
mode will be stored as new default values.
General Changes the language on the GUI to English. 76-71-44
Sets the language back the default installation. 76-71-40
Note: Changing language requires that the anesthesia machine is
re-started.
1.10 Responsibility of the User

To ensure the safety of the machine it must be checked and serviced by Philips/ Dameca-trained
personnel to at least the minimum standards in this manual.
A defective or suspected defective product must under no circumstance be used.
Worn, broken, distorted, contaminated or missing components must be replaced immediately. Should
such repair become necessary, it is recommended that a request for service call is made to the nearest
Philips/ Dameca service centre or agent.
Always give as much of the following information as possible:
• Name of the caller and organization
• Type of equipment
• Serial number
• Service number
• Date of purchase

1.11 Warnings, Cautions and Notes 1 Introduction
• Description of error or fault
1.11 Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Warnings, cautions, and notes are defined and displayed in the following way in this guide:
WARNING A warning indicates a potential risk for the patient or operator that they may be in danger of injury.
CAUTION A caution indicates a risk of damage to either the machine or other equipment.
NOTE A note indicates circumstances to be considered while using the machine.
1.12 General Safety Precautions

Safety Overview on the Machine
Physical locations with high voltage risk.
Aux outputs
PM board
Ventilator PSU
PSU PCB EGM battery
1.12.1Warnings
• The machine must only be connected to properly grounded hospital-grade electrical outlets. The
machine must not be connected to an extension cord that is shared with other equipment.
• Prior to servicing, cleaning, or disinfection, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet. Allow
the machine to dry completely before reconnecting the power cord to the electrical outlet.
• Spilled fluids can cause electrical shock.
• This machine must not be used in an environment that exceeds the EMC levels stated in the EN
60601-1-2 standard.
• External breathing systems used with this machine must comply with EN ISO 8835-2 or a similar
standard.
• Bacteria filters used with this machine must comply with ISO 23328-1 and ISO 23328-2 or a
similar standard.

1 Introduction 1.12 General Safety Precautions
• Anesthesia vaporizers connected to this machine must comply with ISO 8835-4, ISO 60601-2-13
or a similar standard.
• Heat and moisture exchangers used with this machine must comply with EN ISO 9360-1 and EN
ISO 9360-2 or similar standards.
• Humidifiers used with this machine must comply with EN ISO 8185 or a similar standard.
• External suction or vacuum controls used with this machine must comply with EN ISO 10079-3 or
similar standards.
• Medical gases or anesthesia agents used with this machine must comply with the US
Pharmacopoeia, European Pharmacopoeia, or local recognized requirements.
• The machine is compatible with medical gases of O2, Air, and N2O, and anesthesia agents of
Halothane, Enflurane, Isoflurane, Sevoflurane, and Desflurane.
• The wall supply used with this machine must comply with EN ISO 9170-2, ISO 7396-2, ISO
9170-1 and ISO 7396-1 or a similar standard.
• The machine should only be used with the power cord supplied by Philips/ Dameca.
• An AGS/WAGD system must always be activated when the machine is in use.
• No add-on’s, removals, or changes should be made to this machine unless authorized by Philips/
Dameca.
Explosion hazard
• Do not use oil or grease lubricant with this machine. This also applies to silicon-based lubricants
and noncombustible oils and grease. Only PTFE-based, oxygen-compatible lubricants can be used
(e.g. Philips/ Dameca special lubricant, P/N 453564416141).
• Do not use flammable anesthetic gases, such as ether or cyclopropane, with this machine. Use only
anesthetic agents that comply with the recommendations from the manufacturer of the anesthesia
vaporizer.
Patient safety
• Antistatic or electrically conducting breathing hoses and masks can cause burns if used with high-
frequency diathermy equipment and are therefore not recommended for use with this machine.
• After use, set the emergency fresh gas flow to a minimum before leaving the machine, as emergency
gas is a manual setting and does not default back to 5 L/min.
• The O2 concentration in the breathing system can differ significantly from the O2 concentration in
the fresh gas.
• Use of different anesthetic agents in the machine may result in the presence of residual agents (ppm)
within the machine (vaporizer back bar, etc.). These residuals can be minimized by setting a high
fresh gas flow for an extended period of time.
• The auxiliary O2 flowmeter (optional) bypasses the MPL valve. Thus, pressure from the flowmeter
may exceed the pressure from the fresh gas outlet.

1.12 General Safety Precautions 1 Introduction
1.12.2Cautions
• Before connecting the machine to the power supply, verify that the voltage and frequency comply
with the legal label in the rear of the machine.
• Do not attempt to connect any power cords to the auxiliary outlets other than those designed for
that socket.
• The maximum load on the table's side rails is 20kg (44.09lb). Heavy equipment attached to one of
the sides could cause the machine to overturn.
• The maximum torque on the table side rails is 20Nm. (14.75 lbf ft).
• The maximum load on the table top (including side rails) is 20kg (44.09lb)
• The maximum load on the top shelf is 30kg (66.13lb)
• Observe when closing the drawers that nothing gets caught or damaged, including the operator's
fingers.
• Vaporizers should be serviced at an authorized service center in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions.
• Use only original Philips/ Dameca O-rings; other O-rings may cause problems if they do not have
the same dimensions or materials.
• The reserve cylinder valves must be closed when the machine is using the wall supply. The regulated
pressure from the reserve cylinders may be higher than the wall supply pressure; thus, the cylinders
could be depleted.
• To reduce pollution, disconnect the machine from the power supply and wall supply when it is not
in use.
• The arm on the left side of the machine is supplied with the machine only in case a patient monitor
is used and ordered with the machine. As the arm is balanced with a 10-15kg (22-33lb) monitor, the
user must firmly hold the handle of the accessory arm when releasing the brake.
• If more than one external device is connected to the auxiliary electrical outlets (optional), a high
leakage current from one device (e.g., a defective ground conductor) will affect the leakage current
from the other equipment.
• The auxiliary electrical outlets have thermal fuses which may cause the power to be switched off
without warning if excessive current is drawn by external devices.
• The internal batteries only power internal systems, not the auxiliary electrical outlets.
• External equipment intended for connection to signal input, signal output, or other connectors shall
comply with the relevant product standard e.g. IEC 60950-1 for IT equipment and the IEC 60601-
series for medical electrical equipment. In addition, all such combinations – systems – shall comply
with the safety requirements stated in the collateral standard IEC 60601-1-1 or the general standard
IEC 60601-1, edition 2. Any equipment not complying with current leakage requirements in IEC
60601-1 shall be kept outside the patient environment i.e. at least 1.5 m from the patient support.
• Any person who connects external equipment to signal input, signal output, or other connectors has
formed a system and is therefore responsible for the system to comply with the regulatory
requirements. If in doubt, contact qualified medical engineer or your local Philips/ Dameca
representative.

• Patient hoses used with this machine must comply with the Patient hoses used with this machine
must comply with the EN ISO 5367:2014 corrected version 2014-11-12 standard, and the
respiration bags must comply with the EN 1820 standard. standard, and the respiration bags must
comply with the EN 1820 standard.
• US federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
1.12.3Symbols
Type B (EN 60601-1) protection against electrical shock
See documentation
Adjustment of auxiliary O2 flowmeter for patient suction:

Turn counterclockwise to increase flow.
Turn clockwise to decrease flow
ON/OFF switch for lamp
Protective ground
Equipotentiality
ON/OFF
Patient flow pictogram
Neonatal
Manufacturer

1.12 General Safety Precautions 1 Introduction
Suction
WEEE symbol indicating that electronics must not be discarded as normal waste
Warning
Attention. Consult accompanying documents
This Way Up
Batteries
Connection for manual respiration bag
Electrostatic-sensitive device (ESD)
Electromagnetic radiation
Flow direction on the Integrated Breathing System (IBS)
Class

Gas Cylinder
Audio Paused

2
2Theory of Operation
This section provides an overview of the functions and components of the machine.
• “2.1 Product Description” on page 21
• “2.2 Pneumatics Description” on page 31
• “2.3 Electronics Description” on page 37
• “2.4 Software Description” on page 55
2.1 Product Description

The anesthesia machine, model IntelliSave AX700, is suitable for most types of inhalation anesthesia.
O2 and N2O or O2 and Air can be administered, and anesthesia vaporizer(s) can be connected to a
back bar. Gases can be supplied from a centralized supply or cylinders. There is no difference in
machine performance when gases are supplied from cylinders.
2.1.1 Indications for Use

The IntelliSave AX700 Anesthesia Machine is intended to provide general inhalational anesthesia and
ventilation support to neonatal, pediatric and adult patients. The device is intended to provide volume
or pressure controlled ventilation.
The IntelliSave AX700 anesthesia machine must only be used by qualified anesthesists familiar with
the operation of the device.
Prior to use, the machine must be connected to a power supply and gas supply.
CAUTION US federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
NOTE The machine is not MRI compatible.

2 Theory of Operation 2.1 Product Description
2.1.2 Orientation Overview
Front of the Machine
1. Castors with brake 15. ON/OFF switch

2. Drawers 16. 15 TFT color touch screen
3. AGSS/WAGD ON/OFF and flow marker 17. Control Dial
4. Auxiliary O2 flow meter outlet 18. ON/OFF switch for lamp
5. Auxiliary fresh gas outlet and switch 19. Emergency O2 flow switch and adjustment
6. CO2 absorber 20. Manifold/Back bar for two interlock
vaporizers
7. Absorber lock 21. Integrated auxiliary O2 flowmeter
8. BAG connection 22. Tabletop with integrated side rails and
9. APL valve (for manual ventilation only) writing plate
10. Bellows 23. Integrated patient suction ON/OFF

11. O2 flush 24. Electrical outlet for desflurane vaporizer
12. Water trap for optional multigas module 25. Gauges for wall outlet pressures
13. Airway pressure gauge 26. Gauges for gas cylinder pressures
14. Top shelf 27. Support arm for ventilation bag

2.1 Product Description 2 Theory of Operation
Rear of the Machine
1. Castors without brake 12. Upper fan

2. Lower fan 13. Gas inlets
3. Yokes for reserve gas cylinders* 14. Insp./Exp. cones for breathing system
4. Grounding point 15. Lock for breathing system
5. Power supply inlet switch (rear panel) 16. Patient suction connection
6. Power cord connection 17. Auxiliary gas outlets
7. Connection for patient flow sensor 18. Handle for transportation of the machine
8. Connection for optional O2 fuel-cell 19. AGSS/WAGD outlet
sensor 20. Patient suction ejector outlet
9. Auxiliary AGSS inlet connection 21. Cylinder support bar
10. RS 232 port & SmartLog ports* 22. VAC Inlet
11. Auxiliary electrical outlets
*optional

Layout of Color Touch-Screen (with Gas Module)

5 6 7 8 9
Fresh gas flow Last Self-test: Thursday 2. May 11:13 Stop watch
4 (L/min) 2013.05.02 09:57 Main
3.00 00:00:00 10
Screen
O2 set % Gas meas. (%)
3
33 Exp Insp
Rotameter % Setup
(L/min) 4 Exp CO2 O2 32 33 11
Menu
1.8 N 2O 64 63
2 Insp CO2
0.1 SEV 0 . 4 0 .6 Trend

12
2
Menu
0 MAC 0.4
(age: 40)
Resp. meas.
hPa Adult sensor At Y-piece Peak Alarm
17 30
8.0
13
40 MVexp(l) 5.8 4.0 Menu
Plateau
20
17 Exp
Flow (L/min) PEEP TV(mL) 480 Cancel

O2 N2 O 3 14
1 0 Alarms
OFF
27
1.00 2.00 Compl. 34 mL/hPa RR(1/min) 12 4
15
TV set RR set I:E PEEP P Insp Vent. Pause 26
(mL) (1/min) Ratio (hPa) (hPa) mode
PSV/VSV settings
500 12 1:2 OFF 17 VCV STBY MAN VENT
(xx)
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
1. Set fresh gas flow 15. Measured respiration data

2. Measured fresh gas flow 16. Machine status VENT
3. Set O2 percentage in fresh gas flow 17. Machine status MAN
4. Set total fresh gas flow 18. Machine status STBY
5. Alarms and information 19. Ventilation mode
6. Date and time 20. PSV/VSV settings
7. Measured CO2 concentrations 21. Set inspiratory pressure
8. Measured gas concentrations 22. Set PEEP
9. Stop watch 23. Set I:E ratio
10. Activate Main Screen 24. Set respiration rate
11. Activate Setup Menu 25. Set tidal volume (calculated MV shown beneath)
12. Activate Trend Menu 26. Activate pause function
13. Activate Alarm Menu 27. Respiratory waveforms, pressure measurement,
14. Activate Cancel Alarms and high alarm setting
*optional

Layout of Color Touch-Screen (without Gas Module)
5 6 7 8 9
Fresh gas flow Last Self-test: Thursday 2. May 11:13 Stop watch
4 (L/min) 2013.05.02 09:57 Main
3.00 00:00:00 10
Screen
O2 set % O2 meas. (%)
3
33
33
Rotameter Adult sensor At Y-piece Setup
(L/min) 11
hPa
Peak Menu
17 30
40
Trend
2 12
Plateau Menu
17
Resp. meas.
20
Alarm
8.0
13
PEEP
MVexp(l) 5.8 4.0 Menu
3 Exp
Flow (L/min) TV(mL) 480 Cancel

O2 N2O 14
1 0 Alarms
OFF
1.00 2.00 Compl. 34 mL/hPa RR(1/min) 12 4
15
TV set RR set I:E PEEP P Insp Vent. Pause 26
(mL) (1/min) Ratio (hPa) (hPa) mode
PSV/VSV settings
500 12 1:2 OFF 17 VCV STBY MAN VENT
(xx)
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
1. Set fresh gas flow 14. Activate Cancel Alarms

2. Measured fresh gas flow 15. Measured respiration data*
3. Set O2 percentage in fresh gas flow 16. Machine status VENT
4. Set total fresh gas flow 17. Machine status MAN
5. Alarms and information 18. Machine status STBY
6. Date and time 19. Ventilation mode
7. Respiratory waveform, pressure 20. PSV/VSV settings*
measurement, and high-alarm 21. Set inspiratory pressure
setting
8. Measured inspired O2* 22. Set PEEP
9. Stop watch 23. Set I:E ratio
10. Activate Main Screen 24. Set respiration rate
11. Activate Setup Menu 25. Set tidal volume (calculated MV shown beneath)
12. Activate Trend Menu 26. Activate pause function
13. Activate Alarm Menu
*optional

2.1.3 Functional Blocks
The two main elements of the machine are the Pneumatic System and the Electronic System.
• The Pneumatic System directly interfaces to the patient by delivering ventilation and anesthesia
gases.
• The Electronic System has two primary functions: controlling mechanism and user interface. It is
the controlling mechanism in the machine, driving valves and reading sensors that measure
temperature, pressure, gas concentrations, etc. It also contains the user interface to the clinician.
This includes a 15 LCD display with a touch-screen and control dial.
Power Management Board

The mains supply voltage is let through the Power Management Board to the transformer, and back
to the Power Management Board, to create galvanic isolation between the various subsystems in the
machine, and the mains supply.
The Power Management Board creates and delivers supply voltages to all the various subsystems in the
machine, such as the EGM, ventilator, multigas module, auxiliary power outlets, LED downlights
etc.
The Power management board is connected to a 24 VDC backup battery, which backs up the EGM
and the multigas module (i.e. the EGM battery).

Gas Inlet
The Machine can be supplied with O2, Air and N2O from wall pipeline, or spare cylinder. The gas
supplies are monitored on pressure gauges on the front of the machine.
The machine can optionally be equipped with vacuum, which in that case will drive the optional
patient suction unit.
The machine has an active AGSS/WAGD ejector, with an ON/OFF switch. The machine can
optionally have passive AGSS/WAGD, which requires an active AGS system from the customer (i.e. a
hospital installation).
Gas Mixer Pneumatic Manifold

The supply gases are supplied directly to the Gas Mixer Pneumatic Manifold and the EGM.
Here it is reduced by reduction valves to a controlled working pressure. There are flow-control valves
which mix the gases to the mixed fresh gas. The fresh gas is led through a vaporizer back bar, where it is
mixed with an anesthetic agent, and from there to either an aux. fresh gas outlet, or the integrated
breathing system (see “2.2.10 Integrated Breathing System (IBS)” on page 36).
The gas mixer pneumatic block also contains a drive gas selector valve, which is responsible for
selecting between the primary and secondary drive gas at a specific pressure.
Oxygen is delivered to: Aux O2 flowmeter, O2 Flush valve, and an emergency fresh gas flow.
Drive Gas is delivered to: Patient suction unit (optional), AGSS/WAGD ejector, the AUX fresh gas
ON/OFF switch, and the ventilator.
Electronic Gas Mixer (EGM)

The electronic gas mixer (EGM) is a complete computer system which consists of the gas mixer, a DSP
communication interface, a graphic user interface (GUI), and a touch-screen controller.
The gas mixer has pressure and flow transducers, which measure the actual pressure and flows, and
controls the flow-control valves on the gas mixer pneumatic manifold.
The EGM also has a speaker for audible alarms, and an external fan to prevent oxygen build-up, in case
of a leakage.
Touch-screen and Control Dial

The graphic user interface (GUI) is controlled by the user, via a capacitive touch-screen and a control
dial. The control dial enables the user to scroll through the menus and confirm the choices by pushing
the control dial.
SmartLog (Optional)
Every 2 sec all set and measurement data is sent to the RS232 port to the SmartLog PC. These data can
be dumped to a USB flash memory device via the GUI. The data can be used to recreate an anesthesia
session, or to verify an alarm message at a given time stamp etc.
NOTE The SmartLog is ONLY active when the machine runs on mains supply.

Ventilator
The ventilator is the controller for the IBS (integrated breathing system). It has its own power supply
and backup battery (i.e. the ventilator battery) with battery charger.
An electronic system (E-box) communicates with the GUI and controls a pneumatic manifold with
inspiration, expiration, and PEEP valves. The E-box has internal pressure transducers for monitoring
of airway pressure, calculation of tidal volume etc.
The patient suction unit is also located here.
Integrated Breathing System (IBS)

The integrated breathing system (usually called the IBS) is a circle system with bag-in-bottle
integrated into one unit. It is responsible for the ventilation of the patient, and can be run in manual or
automatic mode.
Multigas Module (Optional)

The optional multigas module monitors all gases in the patient airway, including O2, Air, N2O, CO2,
and anesthesia agents (AA).
NOTE Air is not measured directly as it is a composition of other gases.
O2 Fuel Sensor (Optional)

If the machine is not equipped with a multigas module, it can be used with an external O2 fuel sensor.
With this sensor the ventilator can measure the inspiratory oxygen concentration delivered to the
patient.
2.1.4 Options
The list below describes the optional equipment that the customer must specify when ordering a new
machine:
• Air or O2 as Primary Gas Drive
• Active AGSS/WAGD
• Patient suction (source: vacuum or drive gas)
• Back bar for up to two Selectatec or Dräger vaporizers
• SmartLog PC
• Multigas module (external O2 fuel sensor installed as standard)
• One Air and / or one N2O yoke for pin-index cylinders (O2 yoke installed as standard)
• Removable wheelbase for pendant use
• Stand for large cylinders (ø 135mm - ø 150mm or 5.31” - 5.90”)
• Software options: PRVT, NEO, HLM
• Arm for patient monitoring, giving counterweights for the wheelbase
• Connector type, electrical output connectors at rear side of machines

2.1.5 Built-in Safety Features
Gas supply
• O2, Air and N2O alarms for low supply pressure.
• Built-in check valves to prevent reverse gas flow (out of the machine).
• Optional patient suction and optional active AGSS/WAGD are powered by drive gas (Air or O2).
• The optional patient suction can also be powered by VAC.
• If the primary drive gas fails, a drive gas valve will automatically switch to the secondary drive gas
(Air or O2).
Electronic gas mixer

• The N2O flow cuts off if the O2 supply fails.
• Electronically controlled O2/N2O mixture that ensures a minimum of 25% O2 in the fresh gas flow.
• An MPL (maximum pressure limiting) valve opens if the auxiliary gas outlet exceeds 90 hPa
(cmH2O).
• An MPL valve for the fresh gas at the (negative pressure limit (NPL) valve (only Rel. 2 and later).
Vaporizer back bar

• Back bar for two interlock vaporizers. Only vaporizers with interlock may be used, to ensure that
only one vaporizer can be opened at time.
Ventilator
• In the event of an airway pressure high alarm, the ventilator automatically switches to expiration
phase to prevent exposing the patient to excessive airway pressure.
• In addition, the ventilator has a built-in pressure relief valve (MPL) that opens at 90 hPa (cmH2O).

2.1.6 Gas Flow Performance

The electronic gas mixer in the machine is designed to allow the operator to set fresh gas flow in the
range:
• 0.2–20 L/min O2/N2O
(O2 0–10 L/min, N2O 0–10 L/min)
or
• 0.2–20 L/min O2/Air
(O2 0–10 L/min, Air 0–10 L/min)
This fresh gas flow goes through the vaporizer back bar, where an anesthetic agent can be added using
an anesthesia vaporizer. By activating the O2 flush valve, a flow of approximately 45 L/min O2 will be
added to the fresh gas flow downstream of the vaporizer back bar.
The machine has an integrated gas scavenging system that removes excess gases from an open reservoir.
This system must be connected to an external AGS system with a flow of 30–40 L/min. If no external
AGS system is available, the machine can be equipped with an integrated AGS system (optional).
The ventilator is designed to provide an inspiratory flow in the range:
• Continuous flow: 2–80 L/min
• Max. Peak flow: 120 L/min
No matter which mode is used, the set tidal volume, respiratory rate, I:E rate and inspiratory pause are
controlled to ensure that the inspiratory flow remains in the range 2–80 L/min.
Inspiratory flow = Tidal volume x Resp. Rate x ((I+E)/I) x (100/(100-Insp. pause))
The integrated breathing system (IBS) has an expiratory and inspiratory resistance of:
Resistance 60 L/min 30 L/min 5 L/min

Expiratory 6.0 2.5 0.4
(x100 Pa) (x100 Pa) (x100 Pa)
Inspiratory 2.5 1.0 0.2
(x100 Pa) (x100 Pa) (x100 Pa)
Compliance = 4 mL/hPa (mL/cmH2O) with adult hoses (22mm (0.866”) diameter and approx.
122cm (48”) length).
(This equals 120 mL at 30 hPa (cmH2O)
The i-SORB CO2 absorber in the breathing system is optimized with respect to the flow pattern inside
the absorber to ensure use of all the soda lime.

2.2 Pneumatics Description 2 Theory of Operation
2.2 Pneumatics Description

The pneumatics diagram and the pneumatics description are specific to Rel. 2.0 machines (see “What
Is Covered” on page 9 for serial numbers for Rel. 1.0 and Rel. 2.0 respectively). Pneumatics diagrams
in larger format for both releases are available in the appendix; the appendix also includes a description
of Rel. 1.0 machines.
2.2.1 Pneumatic Symbols

The following symbols are used in the pneumatics diagram:
Bag in bottle Check valve
Connection point Crossing line
Ejector Filter
Flow marker Flow meter
Flow restrictor, adjustable Line connection
Manually activated adjustable valve Manually activated valve, 2-2 NC,

spring return
Pilot driven valve, 3-2 NC, spring Pressure gauge

return
Pressure regulator Pressure relief valve, adjustable
Pressure relief valve Pressure sensor

P
Pressure switch Reservoir

2 Theory of Operation 2.2 Pneumatics Description
Respiratory bag Single acting pneumatic cylinder
Solenoid proportional valve, spring Solenoid valve, 2-2 NC, spring return
return
Solenoid valve, 2-2 NO, spring Solenoid valve, 3-2, spring return
return
Toggle or turn switch Toggle switch activated valve, 2-2

NC, w. electric contact
Vacuum relief valve

Reservoir, Reservoir,
40 Outlet AGSS/WAGD Atmosphere
Corner pole tube
42 85
70 VAC from wall Passive Outlet

AGSS/WAGD 55
(Option)
Patient Airway
Patient Airway
Active AGSS/ 41 56 Pressure (Paw)
Pat. Suction, drive gas driven (Option) Pat. Suction, vacuum driven (Option) Pressure Gauge
WAGD (Option) AUX AGSS Bag 59 At E-Box
Ejector (Paw)
31 Ejector 39 P8
38 P 88
44 80
S5
86 GAS ANALYSER
Flowmarker AUX Sample 90 hPa Integrated Breathing
(Option)
Gas Return Pressure relief System (IBS) 15
73 68
81 72
43 52 Expiratory
54 Exhalation
Valve 3 hPa Flow sensor
Regulator APL valve 60
63 (Option)
2.2 Pneumatics Description
32 57 65
PEEP 0-75 hPa
valve
45 EXP
74 INSP/EXP
69 Flowsensor (Option
53 58 76
S2
46 77 Patient
46
P1 P2
P
Pat. Suction Pat. Suction Expiration
64
At E-box
At E-box
valve
INSP
S1 Bag/vent
Buffer Tank Pressure Switch valve
switch Insp. flow Pilot Valve
47 controller S3
66
49 51 O2 sensor (option)
6
Electronic O2 As primary drive gas S4
Gasmixer (Option)
IBS
48
Base
37 Ventilator 29 3 Bar reg. 79
36 ”E” Fresh gas 87
”E” Absorber 62
4 Bar Selector
Drive gas reg. Switch
7 P9
S3 S4
P
IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015

Pat. Sensor
37 30 At E-Box
36
7 18 90 hPa
82 MPL valve
Pressure Drive gas AUX O2
0-12 l/min Fresh gas
switch select valve
Selector 13
16 83 valve
AUX O2(option)
61
17
At EGM ON/OFF Negative Pressure
”F” ”C” ”C” O2 Flush
19 Emergency fresh gas 21 35 Relief valve
P 8 3 Bar
7 Flow 5-15 L/min -6hPa
2 O2 reg.
90 hPa
2.2.2 Pneumatics Diagram for Rel. 2.0
MPL valve
11 20
O2 Yoke ”B” 14
2 Bar O2 Flow
(Option)
84 O2 reg. controller P4
”H” At EGM AUX FG Cone at
10 P Outlet Table plate
6 7
1
O2 pipeline P9
Vaporizer back-bar 12
At EGM ”G” ”B”
P8
7 P 22 Air selector
33
”D” valve
25 P8
2 Bar ”D”
84 24
AIR reg.
Air Yoke 6 7 7
(Option) P7
3
AIR pipeline P
23 At EGM
AIR/N2O P5
At EGM ”I” Flow controller
7 P 9
5 ”A”
2 Bar
84 N2O reg. Vaporizer
27
N20 Yoke 4 6 7
(Option)
N2O pipeline 26 N2O
”K” ”J” ”A” Selector valve
2 Theory of Operation
33
2.2.3 Oxygen
Oxygen is supplied from either the central inlet (1) or from the spare cylinder (2).
Via filters (6) and check valves (7) it is connected to the pressure sensor port (8) at the EGM giving an
audible and visual oxygen alarm if the pressure is below 2.0 (x100kPa)(29 psig).
The pressure is reduced to 2.0 (x100kPa)(29 psig) in the pressure regulator (10).
The O2 flow controller (11) is controlled by the EGM to give a user set flow, based on pressure sensor
(P4) connected to the pressure ports P8 and P9.
The flow is let to the back bar (12), and the fresh gas selector valve (13), which is controlled with the
fresh gas selector switch (87). The user can select either the AUX fresh gas outlet (14) or the integrated
breathing system (15). Additionally, oxygen is let to the auxiliary oxygen outlet (16) through the flow
restrictor (83).
The pipeline and cylinder pressures are monitored by the pressure gauges (84).
The pressure regulator (17) reduces the incoming pressure to 3.0 (x100kPa)(43.5 psig) for the Aux. O2
flow meter (18) giving 0 - 12 l/min O2. The reduced pressure is let to the Emergency fresh gas switch
(19), and the flow meter (20) can be set to give a flow of 5-15 l/min O2.
The O2 flush valve (21) is giving an O2 flow of 35-50 l/min. to the fresh gas selector valve (13), by-
passing the vaporizers connected to the back-bar (12). Finally, O2 is led to the drive gas selector valve
(37).
2.2.4 Air
Air is supplied from the central inlet (3) or from the gas cylinder (33). Via filters (6) and check valves
(7) it is let to the pressure sensor port (22). This pressure is giving a signal to the EGM, and activates an
audible and visual Air alarm if the pressure is below 2.0 (x100kPa)(29 psig).
The pressure is reduced to 2.0 (x100kPa)(29 psig) in the pressure regulator (23). If the user selects Air
as carrier gas the valve (24) is open and Air will flow to the Air/N2O flow control valve (25) controlled
by the EGM to give a user set flow, based on the pressure sensor (P5) connected to the pressure ports
P7 and P8.
breathing system (15).
2.2.5 N2O
N2O is supplied from either the central inlet (4) or from the spare cylinder (5). Via filters (6) and
check valves (7) it is connected to the pressure port (9) on the EGM giving an audible and visual N2O
alarm if the pressure is below 2.0 (x100kPa)(29 psig).
The pressure is reduced to 2.0 (x100kPa)(29 psig) in the pressure regulator (26). If the user selects
N2O as carrier gas the valve (27) is open and N2O will flow to the flow control valve (25) controlled
by the EGM to give a user set flow, based on the pressure port (P5) connected to the pressure ports P7
and P8.
breathing system (15).

2.2 Pneumatics Description 2 Theory of Operation
The pressure of the auxiliary fresh gas outlet (14), is limited to 90 (x100Pa) by the MPL valve (35).
2.2.6 Drive Gas Selection

Drive gas is used for the ventilator, gas driven patient suction and active AGSS/WAGD. If the pressure
of the primary drive gas (Air or O2) drops below 2.0 (x100kPa)(29 psig), the pressure switch (36) is
activated, giving a signal to the drive gas selector valve (37), changing to the secondary drive gas (O2 or
Air).
2.2.7 AGSS/WAGD
Drive gas is reduced to 4.0 (x100kPa)(58 psig) by a pressure regulator (30), and is supplied to the ON/
OFF switch (32). When switched on, the ejector (38) creates a vacuum that is continuously scavenging
exhaust gases from the reservoir that contains excess gases from the ventilator. This gas also contains
waste gas from the integrated breathing system (15). The AGSS/WAGD flow runs through the flow
marker (39) and continues to the AGSS outlet (40) on the back of the machine.
For hospitals with active scavenging systems, the machine can be delivered without the
ON/OFF switch (32) and the ejector (38).
If an external patient system is used, it can be connected to the Aux. AGSS outlet (41).
An open reservoir (85) and (42) prevents vacuum to be built-up in the AGS system.
2.2.8 Patient Suction
Gas Powered
Drive gas is reduced to 4.0 (x100kPa)(58 psig) by a pressure regulator (30), and is supplied to the jet
suction unit (31) through the Adjust/OFF/MAX switch (43). The vacuum is controlled by the
regulator (44), and monitored by the vacuum gauge (45). A suction jar can be connected to the suction
connector (46).
VAC Powered
VAC is supplied from the central inlet (70). It is led to vacuum switch valves (80) and (81), which is
controlled by the Adjust/OFF/MAX switch (72). The vacuum is controlled by the regulator (73) and
monitored by the vacuum gauge (74). A suction jar can be connected to the suction connector (46).
2.2.9 Ventilator
NOTE The information below relates to IntelliSave AX700 Rel. 2.0 (see “1.3 What Is Covered” on page 9 for
serial numbers for Rel. 1.0 and rel. 2.0 respectively).
For information on Rel. 1.0 machines, see “B.0.1 Pneumatics Description for Rel. 1.0” on page 431.
For information on Rel. 2.0 machines, see “B.2 Pneumatics Diagram for Rel. 2.0” on page 437.
The ventilator (29) is pneumatically powered from the driving gas select valve (37) through the inlet
filter (6). A pressure switch (47) monitors the driving gas pressure, giving an alarm if the pressure is
below 1.5 (x100kPa)(21.8 psig).

Drive gas is let to the pressure regulator (48) reducing the pressure to 3.0 (x100kPa)(43.5 psig) for the
Insp. flow control valve (49). This valve is controlled by the ventilator electronics, selecting a correct
inspiratory flow according to the ventilator settings. A differential pressure transducer (P1) connected
to the pressure ports (S1) and (S2) measures the flow and during inspiration the signal to the insp. flow
valve is continuously adjusted, in order for the ventilator to give correct inspiratory flow to the bag in
bottle.
A pressure transducer (P2) connected to the pressure port (P2) measures the system pressure (Bag-in-
Bottle chamber pressure). This pressure is limited to 90 (x100Pa) by the MPL valve (52)
During ventilation, the expiratory valve (53) is closed at all times, except if there is a high pressure
alarm. It is open in manual or standby mode. During inspiration the PEEP valve (54) is closed, and the
driving gas is let to the chamber (55) of the Bag-in-bottle system. The exhalation valve (57) is closed
during inspiration, and open during expiration when the bellows (56) is in top and the pressure in the
bellows is approx. 3 hPa higher than the pressure from the ventilator. Excess gases are evacuated
through the AGS system. During expiration the PEEP valve (54) is open, and the pressure in the
chamber (55) is released to the AGSS/WAGD system.
If a PEEP pressure (4 - 20 hPa) is selected, the insp. flow controller is set to a driving gas flow during
expiration. The PEEP valve (54) is fully open, at the beginning of an expiration. When the pressure in
the patient breathing system reaches the set PEEP level, the PEEP valve (54) will begin controlling the
PEEP pressure.
The ventilator pressure sensor P8 measures the PEEP pressure. This measured pressure controls the
PWM signal to the PEEP valve (54) keeping the PEEP pressure constant to the selected value.
The Patient Airway Pressure Gauge (PAW) (88) indicates the same pressure as the (P8) sensor
measures.
The drive gas is reduced to 3.0 (x100kPa)(43.5 psig) in the pressure regulator (48), and led to the pilot
valve (51). The pilot valve is controlled by the ventilator electronics. During STBY and MANUAL
status the valve is closed, and the Bag/vent valve (58) in the integrated breathing system (15) is set to
manual ventilation.
When the status is set to VENT, the pilot valve (51) is opened and the Bag/vent valve (58) in the
integrated breathing system (15) is set to automatic ventilation.
2.2.10Integrated Breathing System (IBS)
Manual Ventilation
During manual ventilation the Bag/vent valve (58), controlled by the ventilator, is set to manual
ventilation.
The patient breathing system is filled with fresh gas from the fresh gas selector switch (13), through the
inspiratory limb, the expiratory limb, and to the bag (59).
When the bag (59) is squeezed during inspiration, the gas will flow through the Bag/vent valve (58),
the absorber (62), the inspiratory valve (64), and the inspiratory limb to the patient. When the bag
(59) is released, the expiration gases flow through the expiratory limb, expiration valve (65), the Bag/
vent valve (58) to the bag (59).
The inspiratory pressure is limited in the APL valve (60), set by the user. Excess gases are evacuated
through the AGS system.
If the absorber is changed during use, the two absorber valves (76) and (77) will bypass the absorber
connection, so that gases are not lost.

2.3 Electronics Description 2 Theory of Operation
The negative pressure relief valve (61) opens if the patient breathes spontaneously and the patient
breathing circuit is emptied for fresh gas (relief pressure is - 6hPa). A pressure relief valve (MPL valve)
(82) will open if fresh gas pressure exceeds 90(x100Pa).
Automatic Ventilation
During automatic ventilation the Bag/vent valve (58), controlled by the ventilator, is set to automatic
ventilation.
inspiratory limb, the expiratory limb, and to the bellows (56).
When the bellows (56) is forced down during inspiration, the gas will flow through the Bag/vent valve
(58), the absorber (62), the inspiratory valve (64), and the inspiratory limb to the patient.
When the pressure in the chamber (55) is released, the expiration gases flow through the expiratory
limb, expiration valve (65), the Bag/vent valve (58) to the bellows (56).
The inspiratory pressure is limited by the ventilator high pressure alarm, set by the user.
Excess gases are evacuated through the exhalation valve (57) to the AGS system, through the ventilator.
2.2.11Volume Monitoring
Inspiratory/expiratory volumes can be measured by a flow sensor (option), which can be placed at the
Y-piece (69) or the expiratory port (63).
The flow sensor gives a differential pressure signal to the P9 pressure sensor of the ventilator. The
ventilator then calculates the actual patient flow over time which gives a volume reading.
During start-up and every 10 min. the two zero-valves (78 and 79) are activated by the ventilator for
approx. 3 sec. in order to do zero calibration of the P9 pressure sensor.
2.2.12Gas Monitoring
Gas concentrations can be measured by an integrated multigas module (68) (option).
This multigas module takes a sample flow from the Y-piece to analyze it. The sample flow is then
returned to the expiratory side of the patient breathing system.
If a multigas module is not installed, the inspired O2 concentration can be measured by an external O2
fuel cell sensor (66), (option).
2.3 Electronics Description

The IntelliSave AX700 is a mains powered machine and is compatible with mains voltages either of the
range 100V-115V or of 230V. A block diagram of the power system is provided below.
The power system has three main functions:
• To distribute the mains power from the inlet socket to various sub-systems and auxiliary power
outlets.
• To provide galvanic isolation for the internal sub-systems and auxiliary power outlets from the mains
supply.
• To generate the DC voltages required by the internal sub-systems.

2 Theory of Operation 2.3 Electronics Description
NOTE The machine is compatible with the electrical safety requirements of IEC 60601-1.
Mains power enters the system via the power inlet. The power inlet contains fuses and a switch on both
the Live and Neutral wires.
The overall current rating of the inlet is 10 Amps.
A ground wire is soldered onto the ground tab of the inlet and connected to the equipotential point on
the case of the machine. All metal parts of the machine are also wired to this equipotential point.
The live and neutral wires connect from the power inlet to the power management board.
2.3.1 Power Management Board

The mains power coming into the Power Management (PM) board is first passed through some fuses.
These fuses are of the same value as the power inlet fuses.
The mains supply is then passed through some in-rush current protection devices and a common mode
choke for noise filtering. After the noise filter the mains supply goes to the primary coils of the
transformer.
Mains Power Socket with

Built-in Fuses, Common
Mode Choke and Switch
Mains Fuses
In-Rush Input
Current Noise
Case ProtecƟon Filter
Earth Transformer Primary
Point and Secondary Coil Transf
Individual Common SelecƟon Switches ormer
Power Outlets &
Outlet Fuses Outlet Fuse 115V/230V
Fuses
EXT1
EXT2
EXT3
Vaporizer
Log PC 5V
Log PC Relay
Supply
Switch
Vent Power
Vent 24V Supply
Vent Backup
Vent BaƩ. Charger
34V AC
Vent BaƩery Relay

RecƟĮer 29V DC-DC
Gas Analyser
22V DC-DC EGM Pressure

24V Lead- Switch Valve
Acid BaƩery
Charger 12V DC-DC EGM
LED Downlights
Standby Switch
Power Management Board On/Oī

The toroidal type transformer has two primary coils and three secondary coils. Switches on the PM
board select whether the two primaries and first two secondaries of the transformer are connected in
series (for 230V) or in parallel (for 115V). A thermal fuse, built into the transformer, is connected in
series with the primary coils. The third secondary coil provides a 34V AC output from the transformer.
This supply is rectified and then used for the internal DC supplies on the machine. See the
specification of the main transformer for more details.
The mains voltage output from the main transformer is used to drive three auxiliary power outlets at
the back side of the machine, the vaporizer power outlet in the front of the machine, the ventilator and
the SmartLog PC. Each of the four power outlets is protected by a fuse. In addition a single common
fuse protects all four outlets.
The voltage from the transformer secondary coils passes through a relay before it goes to the ventilator
or the 5V power supply for the SmartLog PC. Once the internal DC supplies have been generated
from the third secondary of the main transformer, this relay switch is closed and the ventilator and
SmartLog PC are powered on.
2.3.2 Power Supply
SmartLog PC Power Supply

A 10W 5V power supply is used to power the SmartLog PC. This power supply is powered from the
secondary of the transformer, via a relay. This means that the SmartLog PC is powered off when the
machine is turned off, even if the mains voltage is still applied.
NOTE The SmartLog PC is ONLY active when the machine runs on mains supply.
DC Power Supplies from the PM Board

The 34V AC supply from the main transformer is rectified to a DC voltage. A 24V battery backup
supply (the EGM battery) is also provided to the PM board. The PM board generates the following
DC supplies:
• 12V Supply for the EGM and LED downlights
This supply is used for the EGM and for the two LED downlights over the table. This supply can be
powered from either the transformer or the EGM battery. This supply is switched off when the ON/
OFF switch is turned off.
The 12V supply is protected by a 15V TVS overvoltage diode (D21).
• LED downlights
When the LED lamps are working normally they require a current of approximately 220 mA from
the 12V supply for both lamps. A fuse is placed on the PM board in series with the lamp supply so
that if one of the lamps develops a fault and begins to consume too much current, then the power
supply to the EGM will be protected.
• 29V Supply for the multigas module
This supply is used to power the Artema multigas module. This supply can be powered from either
the transformer or the EGM battery. However, when the backup battery is used, the supply output
voltage drops to 24V. This supply is switched off when the ON/OFF switch is turned off.
The 29V supply, generated from the transformer supply, is monitored by the EGM.

• 22V Supply for the Pressure Valves

This supply is used to power the Pressure switch and the Drive Gas selector in the gas mixer. This
supply can be powered from either the transformer or the EGM battery. This supply is switched off
when the ON/OFF switch is turned off.
Battery Charger and Battery Monitoring

The 24V backup EGM battery is made from 2 12V lead acid batteries connected in series. A switched-
mode power supply, with a 27.2V output is used to charge the backup EGM battery from the
transformer supply. The EGM batteries are charging as soon as power is connected and switched on;
the switch on the rear side of the machine is then on ON position.
The charge current to the battery is controlled so that it is always less than 1 Amp.
The charger is disabled if the battery voltage is less than 16V, as the EGM battery is then deemed
unusable.
ON/OFF Switch
The ON/OFF switch comprises a 2-pole switch and an LED. The LED is powered from the 29V
supply and is illuminated whenever the machine is turned on. When the ON/OFF switch is pressed by
the user, the DC power supplies become enabled, and the various sub-systems start up.
When the ON/OFF switch is pressed again to turn off the machine, a 20 second delay starts. This
delay allows the EGM to carry out an orderly shut-down, and allows the user to turn the machine back
on in case the ON/OFF switch was pressed erroneously.
Ventilator Power Circuits

The ventilator sub-system has an almost completely independent power system, with its own power
supply and battery charger. See the description in “2.3.7 Ventilator” on page 50
2.3.3 Electronic Gas Mixer (EGM)
EGM Controller
The EGM controller microprocessor has flash memory available for storing software code, for running
the application. The primary function of this system is to control the valves on the Gas Mixer
manifold.
There are 2 proportional valves driven by PWM signals and controlled in PID control loops, and 2
ON/OFF valves. The PWM frequency is fixed on 6103Hz and has a duty cycle that can be controlled
to 11bits resolution. All valves are driven using high-side driver MOSFETs.
• Air Selector Valve and N2O Selector Valve
The machine must choose to mix either Air or N2O, with O2 in the Gas Mixer Manifold. These
ON/OFF valves are, therefore, connected in an either/or configuration with one valve being
normally open and the other being normally closed.
• Air/N2O Flow Control Valve
The amount of Air or N2O flow into the vaporizer is controlled using this valve. The flow is
measured using transducers which are read by the EGM controller. In this way a closed-loop control
system is established to maintain the desired gas flow.

• O2 Flow Control Valve

The amount of Air or O2 flow into the vaporizer is controlled using this valve. The flow is measured
using transducers which are read by the EGM controller. In this way a closed-loop control system is
established to maintain the desired O2 flow. At the output of the EGM manifold the O2 and the
Air/N2O gas flows are mixed and fed into the vaporizer.
Interface DSP
The Interface DSP is mainly responsible for gathering information and passing it to the GUI
controller. The Interface DSP gathers information from the following sources:
• The Ventilator
The DSP has an RS232 serial bus link to the ventilator.
• The multigas module
This information also comes via an RS232 serial link.
• The Touch-Screen Controller
This information comes via an I2C interface to the touch screen controller.
• The Control Dial
Rotation and presses of the control dial are detected by the DSP.
• Switch Inputs
The following switch inputs are monitored by the DSP:
– IBS switch
This is a contact switch to detect the presence of the IBS.
– ABS Switch
This is a contact switch to detect the presence of the absorber.
– Emergency O2 Switch
This is a toggle switch used by the operator to initiate the emergency O2 supply.
– External Fresh Gas Switch
This is a switch used by the operator to initiate fresh gas flow.
– ON/OFF Switch
This is the main ON/OFF switch used by the operator to start up or shut down the machine.
The signal that comes to the EGM is actually a logic signal from the Power Management (PM)
Board. If the operator has pressed the ON/OFF switch to shut down the machine, this signal
informs the EGM that the PM board will turn off the power supplies in 20 seconds.
– Battery Backup Indicator
This signal comes from the PM board and indicates that the voltage that is generated from the
mains supply has dropped to a level where the backup EGM battery has taken over.
LCD Display and Backlight

A 15 TFT LCD display is used in the machine. The display has two CCFL backlight units. The LCD
display is driven from a 3.3V power supply. The backlight requires a 2.5 kV supply. An off-the-shelf
inverter board is used to generate this backlight supply. The backlight is turned on or off by the DSP.

2.3.4 Touch-Screen Controller

The machine uses a projected capacitance touch-screen. This technology generates a matrix of tiny
charged capacitors on a glass screen. When a point on this screen is touched with a finger, the natural
charge in the human body will disrupt the capacitors in the touched region. This disruption can be
detected by some dedicated control electronics and the touch location can be calculated.
Capacitive touch-screens are particularly vulnerable to conducted noise. The controller uses an Atmel
system to perform advanced digital filtering on the information gathered from the capacitive matrix in
order to optimize system robustness.
2.3.5 Multigas Module
Gas measurement and identification

To measure the concentrations and identify the gases, a side-stream sample is continuously taken from
the patient breathing circuit through the flow produced by the double-membrane pump. The flow is
directed through a water trap and into the measurement chamber in the multigas module where the
absorption of up to eight different wavelengths (including one reference wavelength) of infrared light is
measured.
Figure 2-1: Multigas analyzer gas sample path

The measurement of the breathing gas mixture is based on the fact that the different components of a
gas mixture absorb infrared light at specific wavelengths. A microprocessor continuously calculates the
CO2, N2O and, if applicable, anesthetic agent concentrations from the infrared light absorption
measurements.
Oxygen does not absorb infrared light to the same extent as other breathing gases and is therefore
measured using another method.
However, the presence of oxygen can cause some interference, known as spectral broadening, that must
be compensated for in order to get the best possible measuring results. Hence, the oxygen
concentration should also be determined.

The oxygen measurement technology relies on the paramagnetic properties of the oxygen molecules.
See “Oxygen Sensor” on page 45.
Infrared measurement technology

The absorption spectra for CO2, N2O and the five anesthetic agents Halothane, Enflurane, Isoflurane,
Sevoflurane, and Desflurane are shown in the figures below.
N 2O
Absorbance
CO2
3.5 4 4.5 5
Wavelength (μm)
Figure 2-2: Absorption spectra for CO2 and N2O
2 2
Desflurane
Isoflurane
Enflurane
Absorbance
Sevoflurane
Halothane
7 8 9 10 11 12
Wavelength (μm)
Figure 2-3: Absorption spectra for anesthetic agents

The multigas module uses the absorption peaks at 4.2 and 3.9 μm for the measurement of CO2 and
N2O respectively, and up to five different wavelengths in the 8-12 μm range for anesthetic agent
measurements. To measure the absorption of light at these wavelengths, a broadband infrared radiation
source is used.
The light transmitted from the infrared source is filtered using a set of narrow optical band pass filters.
The individual filters are mounted in a rapidly rotating filter wheel that intersects the light path. The
filtered light then passes through the measurement chamber before reaching the infrared detector.

Figure 2-4: Optical Path
No radiation will be absorbed if the measurement chamber is empty. The output signal from the
detector will thus have its maximum amplitude at a concentration of zero, with lower amplitudes at
higher concentrations.
To establish the zero reference amplitude, the zero valve is occasionally switched to direct ambient air
through the measurement chamber. If the measurement chamber is filled with a mixture of several
gases and more than one of the gases absorbs radiation at the selected wavelength (as is the case with the
anesthetic agents), the total radiation absorbed will be the sum of the absorbency of the individual
gases.
To identify seven different gases in a mixture, measurements must be done at seven wavelengths.
Measurements must also be done at a reference wavelength, which is why the multigas module contains
a filter wheel with eight optical filters.
To measure gases without automatic identification, measurements are done at the same number of
wavelengths as the number of present gases, and at a reference wavelength.
Figure 2-5: Gas measurement bench including a brush-less DC motor, IR

light source, filter wheel, measurement chamber, detector, and
electronics.

Pump module
The pump in the multigas module consists of two double-action voice coils and a dual chamber
membrane type pump housing. The high frequency of oscillation minimizes vibration and permits
flow control with very small variations. The pump module has built-in electronics including a flow
sensor and memory for storing flow calibration constants. The flow rate is controlled by the
microprocessor in the Base module.
Figure 2-6: Multigas Module double-action membrane pump.
Oxygen Sensor
The Servomex Paramagnetic Oxygen Sensor uses the paramagnetic susceptibility of oxygen; a physical
property that distinguishes oxygen from most other common gases. Inside the sensor are two nitrogen-
filled glass spheres mounted on a strong rare metal taut-band suspension. This assembly is suspended
in a symmetrical non-uniform magnetic field. In the presence of paramagnetic oxygen, the glass spheres
are pushed further away from the strongest part of the magnetic field.
The strength of the torque acting on the suspension is proportional to the oxygen concentration. See
“The paramagnetic oxygen sensors measurement principle” on page 46.
The measuring system is 'null-balanced'. The 'zero' position of the suspension assembly, as measured
in nitrogen, is sensed by a split photo sensor that receives light reflected from a mirror attached to the
suspension assembly. The output from the photo sensor is fed back to a coil wound around the
suspension assembly.
This feedback achieves two objectives. First, when oxygen is introduced to the cell, the torque acting
on the suspension assembly is balanced by a restoring torque from the feedback current in the coil. The
feedback current is directly proportional to the volume magnetic susceptibility of the sample gas and
hence, after calibration, to the partial pressure of oxygen in the sample. A voltage output is derived that
is proportional to the current, which in turn means that the voltage is proportional to the oxygen
concentration.
Second, the electromagnetic feedback "stiffens" the suspension, damping it significantly and increasing
its natural frequency, making the suspension resilient to shock.
Paramagnetic technology is non-depleting, which means that there are no consumable parts. This
ensures consistent performance over time. The selectivity of the paramagnetic measurement for oxygen
means that there is no interference from other respiratory gases. The small volume chamber allows a
rapid gas exchange, giving the capability for fast response oxygen measurement. Features of the device

include a stable and inherently linear measurement of oxygen that permits the use of two-point
calibration.There is no requirement for a reference gas during operation.
Figure 10 The paramagnetic oxygen sensors measurement principle

Figure 2-7: The paramagnetic oxygen sensors measurement principle

Water Traps
DRYLINE™ Water Trap consists of two parts: a filter housing incorporating a 0.45 μm hydrophobic
anti-bacterial filter, and a container for the separated waste.
re 11 DRYLINE™ Water Trap filter housing and con

Figure 2-8: DRYLINE™ Water Trap filter housing and container
DRYLINE™ Water Trap has been specially developed for use with the multigas module. It is designed
as a semi-disposable unit where the container can be emptied, rinsed, and reused a number of times, or
the whole water trap can be replaced.
There are two versions using the same receptacle, one for use with adults and children at app. 200 ml/
min sampling flow, the other for neonates at app. 70 ml/min sampling flow. The water trap is docked
to the DRYLINE™ Receptacle that is mounted on the side panel of the IntelliSave AX700.
Gas flows
The inlet to the water trap comes directly from the patient circuit. There are two outlets:
1 Sample Flow outlet: Provides the gas sample to the measurement chamber. Approximately 90
percent of the gas flow.
2 Secondary Flow outlet: Provides the driving power for the water separation function of the water
trap. Approximately 10 percent of the gas flow.
The water trap is designed to minimize the system rise time, facilitating accurate breath-to-breath
analysis, even at low sampling flows and high breath rates.
NOTE DRYLINE™ Water Trap is supplied non-sterile.

DRYLINE™ Water Trap is supplied non-sterile.
Figure 12 Flows in the water trap.

Figure 2-9: Flows in the water trap
Purge function
If the total flow from the two outlets of the water trap falls below 40 ml/min for at least one second, a
built-in automatic purge function switches the gas flow so that a much larger proportion of the flow is
directed to the Secondary Flow for 12 seconds.
This is usually sufficient to clear the water trap if it is blocked with mucus or water droplets.
If purging does not succeed in clearing the obstruction (the flow rate remains below the limit value),
the purge sequence is repeated up to four times.
If the flow still remains below the limit value, an alarm is activated and further purge cycles are
inhibited.
DRYLINE™ Receptacle
The receptacle, which is designed to securely hold the water trap in place, also incorporates sensors for
water trap detection and identification, and the tubing for connection to the multigas module.

Water trap type

switch
Water trap
presence switch
Figure 2-10: DRYLINE™ Receptacle
Water trap detection and identification

The sensor consists of two electrical switches fitted to the receptacle: the water trap type switch and the
water trap presence switch. The water trap type switch is activated if an adult type water trap is
inserted, while the water trap presence switch is activated when either type of water trap (with
container) is inserted. If both switches are activated, an adult type water trap has been inserted; if only
the water trap presence switch is activated, a neonate type water trap has been inserted.
The water trap identification allows the multigas module to automatically select optimal adult/
pediatric or neonate sampling flows. If the multigas module does not detect the presence of a water
trap, the pump stops and there is no gas flow through the system. This prohibits any foreign particles
from being drawn into the multigas analyzer.
2.3.6 SmartLog PC
The SmartLog is a PC based module located in the upper part of the device.
Data is passed to the SmartLog module via an RS232 serial link from the EGM. The SmartLog PC has
both a serial connection and a USB connection.
The SmartLog module has its own AC-DC power supply that provides a 5V supply; see “Software
Block Diagram” on page 55 for a functional description of the SmartLog.

2.3.7 Ventilator
The function of the ventilator is to control the integrated Breathing System (IBS), by controlling
various valves on the ventilator manifold. A simplified block diagram of the ventilator electronics is
presented below.

Ventilator DC Supply and Battery

The diagram below shows the ventilator power supply.
The power supply to the ventilator comes from the secondary side of the transformer. In the power
cable to the ventilator the wires are looped through 5 ferrites: 2 at the Power Management board and 3
in the ventilator. These ferrites help to improve EMC performance.
The power input from the Power Management board drives an off-the-shelf AC-DC 24V supply. This
power supply is IEC 60601-1 approved and can supply 24V at 2.7 Amps.
A backup battery-pack (i.e. the ventilator battery) is provided in the ventilator. This battery-pack is
made up of 20 1.2V AA-size NiMH rechargeable batteries, connected in series, to provide a 24V
output. An off-the-shelf mains-powered battery charger keeps the battery pack charged when the
machine is switched on and the mains power is available.
A relay, K2, is used to connect the ventilator battery output to the ventilator electronics, only when the
29V power supply for the EGM has become active. This is in order to maintain battery charge when
the machine is turned off.
The two 24V supplies from the ventilator battery and from the power-supply are diode-ORed on the
ventilator CPU board, so that if the mains voltage disappears unexpectedly, the ventilator battery will
continue to power the sub-system. The positive and negative battery terminal voltages are monitored
by the electronics to ensure that it is connected properly and that it has sufficient charge to power the
ventilator.
CPU Watchdog
The ventilator CPU has an internal watchdog, which is triggered periodically by the application
software. If the software is unable to trigger this watchdog and it is allowed to time out, the ventilator
manifold valves are put in a state which enables manual ventilation (i.e. the ventilator will go into
Manual Ventilation mode). The ventilator alarm will sound if this occurs. Normal operation can only
be restored by restarting the machine.

Relay Outputs
There are four general-purpose relays and one solid-state relay on the CPU board that can be used to
switch valves or solenoids on or off. Relays, due to their mechanical construction, are not suitable for
high-speed switching. Therefore, these outputs cannot be used to drive proportional valves using
PWM.
• Relay 1 - Pilot Valve
The Pilot valve is used to switch between Manual Ventilation mode and Automatic Ventilation
mode. In Manual mode the Pilot valve is closed, which cuts off pressure from the Bag/Vent valve.
When the Pilot valve is opened, by closing Relay 1, this applies a pressure of 3 (x100 kPa) (43.5 psig)
to the bag/vent valve, thus enabling Automatic Ventilation. At system start-up and in the case of a
watchdog time out the Pilot valve is closed.
• Relay 2 - Expiration Valve
In Automatic Ventilation mode the Expiration valve is opened if a high-pressure alarm is triggered.
In Manual Ventilation mode this valve is open. At system start-up and in the case of a watchdog
timeout, the Expiration valve is opened by the CPU CPLD.
• Relay 4 - Offset Valve
This relay is used to control the Zero-calibration valves, which are activated at start-up, if the sensor
type is changed (Adult or Pediatric) by the operator, and every 10 minutes, in order to perform zero
calibration of the expiratory flow pressure sensor.
• Relay 5 - Battery Relay
This relay connects the Battery Relay (K2) to the switch input on the IO board connector J9 (called
X9 on the E-box). The signal has a pull-up resistor to 24V and the IO board. The relay effectively
acts as an enabling circuit for the IO board switch input. The status of the K2 Relay is read via
register group 0, bit 5 in the IO CPLD.
PWM Outputs
There are two MOSFET-driven outputs on the CPU board, connected to the CPU board connector J9
(called X2 on E-Box), which are driven from a PWM controller in the CPU CPLD. The PWM
controllers for both valves are identical (colored connectors).
The other side of the valve is connected to ground (black connector).
• PWM1 - Inspiration Flow Control Valve
The Inspiration flow control valve is a PWM-controlled proportional valve, which is used to control
the inspiratory pressure or flow during Automatic Ventilation mode. During expiration the
Inspiration flow control valve is only opened if the pressure falls below the set PEEP level.
• PWM2 - PEEP Valve
The PEEP valve is placed in parallel with the Expiration valve and is PWM-controlled to maintain
the required minimum pressure during expiration.
During pressure controlled ventilation the PEEP valve is used as a means to release pressure in case
of an overshoot during inspiration.
Other Analog and Digital IO

• Digital Inputs
There are 11 digital inputs on the CPU board on connector J7 (X3 on the E-Box). Only 2 of the
digital inputs are used (pins 1 and 3). Pin 1 indicates the status of the Pressure switch in the
ventilator manifold. Pin 3 indicates the status of the Battery Relay, which is driven by Relay 5.

• Analog Inputs
An O2 sensor can be connected to a port on the back of the machine and from there to J8 on the IO
board (X8 on the E-Box).
The ventilator battery voltage is sensed, via IO board connector J9 (X9 on the E-Box), and
attenuated. It is read by an ADC converter.
• Pressure Transducers and Temperature Sensor
There are four differential pressure transducers on the IO Board, B1 to B4 (S1 to S4 on the E-Box).
These transducers are used to measure pressures relative to ambient and volume flows at various
points in the breathing system.
– Pressure Transducer B1
This measurement provides the flow volume of the inspiration flow by measuring the differential
pressure at 2 fixed points in the Ventilator manifold after the Inspiration Flow Controller valve.
The full-scale pressure range of this transducer is 10.3 kPa (1.5).
This measurement is the system pressure in the IBS, relative to atmospheric pressure. This
measurement is calibrated at 0 hPa (cmH2O) and at 80 hPa (cmH2O). These calibration values
are, then, used to translate ADC readings into pressure readings. The full-scale pressure range of
this transducer is 10.3 kPa (1.5).
This measurement is of the Inspiratory/Expiratory flow volume. This flow sensor can be placed in
the patient Y-piece or in the expiratory tube. The differential pressures read by this sensor are
much lower than those read by the other transducers. For this reason a more precise transducer is
used. The full-scale pressure range of this transducer is 1.0 kPa (0.15).
This measurement is calibrated every 10 minutes or if the Y-piece type is changed (Adult or
Pediatric). During calibration, the tubes on both sides of the flow sensor are opened to
atmospheric pressure.
This is a measurement of the airway pressure at the patient Y-piece relative to atmospheric
pressure. The tube that connects to this transducer also connects to sample return of the multigas
module. The full-scale pressure range of this transducer is 10.3 kPa (1.5).
– Temperature Sensor
There is a temperature sensor, U28, placed on the IO board which is used in the calibration of the
pressure transducers.
Alarm
A small speaker mounted on the ventilator chassis is driven by an audio amplifier on the IO board via
connector J9 (X9 on the E-box).
The alarm will sound automatically in case of a watchdog timeout.
Fan
The fan is turned on by the CPU at start-up by the 24V power supply.
The fan contains a Locked-Rotor output. This signal goes low if the Fan rotor stops turning. If this
happens, an alarm will be generated.

Communications
The only communications channel that is used on the ventilator is an RS232 connection to the EGM
via IO board connector J23 (L12 on the E-Box). The ventilator DC ground is isolated from the EGM
ground, so galvanic isolation is used in the serial bus.
Power Supplies
Power comes into the CPU board on connector J12 (X1 on E-box). There are two power supply
connections, one to the external 24V AC/DC supply and the other to the ventilator backup battery.
Each supply is protected by a 6.3 Amp resettable fuse. If the voltage from the power supply is correct
then the ventilator battery is disconnected from the power input using a MOSFET. If the power
supply voltage is not correct then the boards are powered from the ventilator battery.
Two lower DC voltages, +5V and +3.3V are generated using switch-mode generators to power the
electronics on the CPU board and IO board. All the valves use the chosen 24V supply (PSU or battery)
for their power.

2.4 Software Description 2 Theory of Operation
2.4 Software Description

2.4.1 Software Block Diagram
The following block diagram shows the relationship between the major hardware/software subsystems
resident in the machine. These subsystems are described below.
Gas Mixer Processor

The Gas Mixer Processor controls the gas mixing valves based on the settings received from the GUI
processor. It interfaces to the GUI via a dual-port RAM.
GUI Processor (EGM)

The GUI Processor handles the graphical user interface (that is, user input via touch screen and control
dial as well as the displaying of measured data) and thereby controls the whole process including self-
test, calibration, and normal execution. It notifies the user if an alarm condition occurs, regardless of
whether the alarm originates in any of the connected processors or within the GUI processor.
NOTE This processor also handles the ventilation mode VSV.
Interface DSP
The interface DSP interfaces between several other processors. It acts as an intelligent switchboard for
the different signals and messages, where a CRC (checksum recovery correction) may be added or
checked. This processor also handles the control dial and forwards this information to the GUI
processor.

2 Theory of Operation 2.4 Software Description
SmartLog
The SmartLog automatically logs all settings, measured values, alarms and diagnostic data every two
seconds during an anesthesia procedure. All logs are time-stamped, and synced with the set time from
the GUI.
The SmartLog PC has both a serial connection and a USB connection.
The serial port sends numeric and waveform data for e.g. a patient monitor. The USB port can be used
for configuration of the SmartLog, to upgrade the SmartLog software, to download PDF case reports,
and diagnostic data to a USB memory stick.
See “7.4.5 SmartLog Troubleshooting” on page 249 for specific information of the available log data.
See "IntelliSave AX700 Information Sheet for IntelliBridge" for information about data sent to a
patient monitor via the Philips IntelliBridge interface, and how to configure the data.
NOTE Diagnostic data and waveform data are only available on SmartLog version 2.0 build 52 or higher.
Capacitive Touch Interface Board

The Capacitive Touch Interface Board is a printed circuit board holding a dedicated CPU for
interfacing the capacitive touch overlay and a small processor for communication with the GUI. It
interfaces with the GUI via the Interface DSP. The PCB has one common firmware holding all the
parameters for the capacitive filters, calculations and protocol.
Ventilator Processor
The ventilator processor controls the automatic ventilation and measures different pressures and flows.
It interfaces with the GUI via the Interface DSP.
NOTE The VSV ventilation mode is controlled by the GUI Processor.
Gas Monitor Module

The Gas Monitor is an off-the-shelf product from Artema. It measures the gas concentration of
different gases. It interfaces to the GUI via an RS232 connection to the Interface DSP.

2.4.2 Service Menu Structure/Descriptions

This section describes the Service menu structure and the available menu items. You access the Service
menu via the Service... menu item in the Setup menu.
Menu Structure Overview
Service
1. Password Versions
2. Password EGM
3. Password Whispa
Versions... EGM application
Calibration... Calibration DSP SW
Installation... O2 flow... submenu Gas Module SW
Miscellaneous... Air flow... submenu EGM boot
Previous menu N2O flow... submenu FPGA checksum
Main screen O2 inlet press... Touch SW ver.
submenu
Air inlet press... Strlib version
submenu
N2O inlet press... Strlib layout
submenu
Ventilator insp. flow Strlib records
BIB & Pat pressure Previous menu
Vol. sensor Adult Main screen
Vol. sensor Ped
Peep valve
Vent. temp. comp.
Gas module... submenu
Previous menu
Main screen
Installation
Carrier gas option
Pressure unit
Rotameter US
SIMV
Neonatal
HLM mode
Vent. set vol.
Miscellaneous TV insp. option

submenu Mean/Plateau
Load factory defaults
SW update Printing
Gas color Fresh Gas submenu
Previous menu submenu Gas measurement submenu
submenu Previous menu
Main screen
Main screen

O2 Flow
Gain
Offset
Air Flow AD at 0.3 l/min
Gain AD at 0.6 l/min
Offset AD at 1.0 l/min
AD at 0.3 l/min AD at 2.0 l/min
AD at 2.0 l/min Calibration
AD at 5.0 l/min Previous menu
Calibration AD at 10.0 l/min
O2 flow... Calibration
Air flow... Previous menu
N2O flow...
O2 inlet press...
Air inlet press... N2O Flow
N2O inlet press... Gain
Ventilator insp. flow Offset
BIB & Pat pressure AD at 0.3 l/min
O2 Pressure AD at 0.6 l/min
Vol. sensor Adult
Gain AD at 1.0 l/min
Vol. sensor Ped
Offset AD at 2.0 l/min
Peep valve
Calibration AD at 5.0 l/min
Vent. temp. comp.
Previous menu AD at 10.0 l/min
Gas module...
Main screen Calibration
Previous menu
Main screen Previous menu
Air Pressure
Gain
Offset
N2O Pressure
Calibration
Gain
Previous menu
Offset
Main screen
Gas module Calibration
Hours of use: Previous menu
Pump hours: Main screen
Leak check
Previous menu
Main screen

Installation
Carrier gas option Fresh Gas
Pressure unit Fresh Gas safety
Rotameter US Min. fresh gas flow
SIMV Default flow
Neonatal Default O2%
HLM mode Default Carr. gas
Vent. set vol. Previous menu
Main screen
TV insp. option
Mean/Plateau
Printing
Fresh Gas
Gas measurement Gas measurement
Previous menu Gas module
Main screen Gas module sim.
Previous menu
Main screen
Miscellaneous Gas color

Load factory defaults O2 color
SW update Air color
Gas color N2O color
Previous menu Air fill type
Main screen CO2 color
Previous menu
Main screen

Service Menu
Service menu Description

1. Password Used to enter the first part of the super user or service password.
2. Password Used to enter the second part of the super user or service password.
3. Password Used to enter the third part of the super user or service password.
Versions... Opens the Versions menu
(see “Versions Menu” on page 60)
Calibration... Opens the Calibration menu
(see “Calibration Menu” on page 61)
Installation... Opens the Installation menu
(see “Installation Menu” on page 64)
Miscellaneous... Opens the Miscellaneous menu
(see “Miscellaneous Menu” on page 66)
Previous menu Returns you to the Setup menu.
Main screen Closes the menu and returns you to the main screen.
NOTE The Calibration, Installation and Miscellaneous menus are grayed out and inactive until you have
entered either the service password (gives access to all) or the super user password (give access to the
Installation menu). You can find the passwords in “1.9 Passwords” on page 13.
Versions Menu
Versions menu Description

EGM GUI application software and build number
Whispa Ventilator software version and build number
EGM application Gas mixer software version
DSP SW DSP software version
Gas Module SW AION software version
EGM boot Boot loader software version number
FPGA checksum Gas Mixer FPGA version number
Touch SW ver. Touch Screen firmware version number
Strlib version Language version number
Strlib layout Language file layout version number
Strlib records Language number of strings
Previous menu Returns you to the Service menu.

Calibration Menu
Calibration menu Description

O2 flow... Opens the O2 Flow menu, which is used for calibration of the O2
fresh gas flow sensor
(see “Calibration Submenus” on page 62).
Air flow... Opens the Air Flow menu, which is used for calibration of the Air
N2O flow... Opens the N2O Flow menu, which is used for calibration of the N2O
O2 inlet press... Opens the O2 Pressure menu, which is used for calibration of the O2
inlet pressure sensor.
Air inlet press... Opens the Air Pressure menu, which is used for calibration of the Air
inlet pressure sensor.
N2O inlet press... Opens the N2O Pressure menu, which is used for calibration of the
N2O inlet pressure sensor.
Ventilator insp. flow Starts calibration of PWM signal controlling the inspiration valve in
the ventilator
Note: If the default setting for volume sensor isn’t “None”, the adult
volume sensor will be calibrated at the same time.
BIB & Pat pressure Starts calibration of the sensor that measures the pressure between
chamber and bellows in the Bag-in-bottle system, and calibration of
the sensor that measures the airway pressure in the patient breathing
system.
Vol. sensor adult Starts calibration of the external adult patient flow sensor.
Vol. sensor Ped Starts calibration of the external pediatric patient flow sensor.
Peep valve Starts calibration of the characteristics of the PEEP valve.
Vent. temp. comp. Used for definition of the ventilator temperature compensation; that
is, the temperature characteristics of the pressure sensors used in the
ventilator.
Note: This calibration requires specific control of room temperature
for the electronic box of the ventilator.
Gas module... Opens the Gas module menu, which is used for performing a leakage
check of the gas module.

Calibration Submenus
O2 Flow menu Description

Gain
Offset
AD at 0.3 l/min
AD at 0.6 l/min Shows various values from the last calibration (gain, offset, and
AD at 1.0 l/min analog/digital converter).
AD at 2.0 l/min Caution: Do not change any of the values.
AD at 5.0 l/min
AD at 10.0 l/min
Calibration Starts calibration of the O2 fresh gas flow sensor.
Previous menu Returns you to the Calibration menu.
Air Flow menu Description
Gain
Offset
AD at 0.3 l/min
AD at 5.0 l/min
AD at 10.0 l/min
Calibration Starts calibration of the Air fresh gas flow sensor.
N2O Flow menu Description
Gain
Offset
AD at 0.3 l/min
AD at 5.0 l/min
AD at 10.0 l/min
Calibration Starts calibration of the N2O fresh gas flow sensor.

O2 Pressure menu Description

Gain Shows the gain and offset values from the last calibration.
Offset Caution: Do not change any of the values.
Calibration Starts calibration of the O2 inlet pressure sensor.
Air Pressure menu Description
Calibration Starts calibration of the Air inlet pressure sensor.
N2O Pressure menu Description
Calibration Starts calibration of the N2O inlet pressure sensor.
Gas module menu Description
Hours of use: Shows how many hours the machine has been in use.
Pump hours: Shows how many hours the pump has been running.
Leak check Starts leakage check of the gas module.

Installation Menu
Installation menu Description

Carrier gas option Specifies the carrier gas setup.
- Air/N2O enable
- Air disable
- N2O disable
Pressure unit Specifies which pressure unit is used with the machine.
- hPa
- mBar
- cmH2O
Rotameter US Specifies whether the rotameter section on the main screen is set to
standard version or US version. In the standard version the O2
column is on the left side and the carrier gas column on the right. In
the US version the columns are reversed.
- enable (selects US version)
- disable (selects standard version)
SIMV Specifies whether the machine should be used with SIMV
(synchronized intermittent mandatory ventilation).
- enable
- disable
Neonatal Can only be changed via a software update.
HLM mode Can only be changed via a software update.
Vent. set vol. Can only be changed via a software update.
TV insp. option Specifies whether the machine displays measured inspired tidal
volume (TV insp) during VCV and SIMV ventilation modes.
- enable
- disable
Mean/Plateau Specifies whether the machine displays measured mean or measured
plateau airway pressure next to the airway pressure graph.
- Mean
- Plateau
Printing - enable
- disable
Fresh Gas Opens the Fresh Gas menu
(see “Installation Submenus” on page 65).
Gas measurement Opens the Gas measurement menu
(see “Installation Submenus” on page 65).

Installation Submenus
Fresh Gas menu Description

Fresh Gas safety Specifies whether the machine automatically reduces the fresh gas
flow to 0.3 L/min O2 in case of an “airway pressure high” or “system
pressure high” alarm.
- ON
- OFF
Min. fresh gas flow Specifies whether the machine is enabled for providing a
minimum fresh gas flow.
- ON (for US)
- OFF (for non-US)
Default flow Specifies the total fresh gas flow (in L/min) which starts automatically
when status is changed from STBY to MANUAL or VENT by the
user.
Default O2% Specifies the O2 % for the fresh gas flow which starts automatically
when status is changed from STBY to MANUAL or VENT by the
user.
Can be set to a value between 21 and 100.
Default Carr. gas Specifies the secondary carrier gas used in the fresh gas flow which
starts automatically when status is changed from STBY to MANUAL
or VENT by the user.
- Air
- N 2O
Previous menu Returns you to the Installation menu.
Gas measurement menu Description
Gas module Specifies whether the machine has any gas measurement, and if so,
whether it is done via a multigas module.
- Artema (an Artema multigas module is installed)
- O2 Fuel Cell On (gas measurement is done via an external O2 fuel
cell sensor)
- OFF (no gas measurement)
Gas module sim. Specifies whether the simulation mode of the multigas module is
activated.
- ON
- OFF
Note: This option is only present if Gas module is set to Artema.
Previous menu Returns you to the Installation menu.

Miscellaneous Menu
Miscellaneous menu Description

Load factory defaults Restores the factory default settings described in “A.9 Factory Default
Settings” on page 429.
When you select this option, the message “Turn off machine” is
shown on the display. When the machine has been turned off, the
factory default settings are restored.
SW update Used to update the software of the electronic gas mixer.
Note: A separate instruction document is supplied by Philips,
together with the necessary files and programs.
Gas color Opens the Gas color menu
(see “Miscellaneous Submenus” on page 66).
Miscellaneous Submenus
Gas color menu Description

O2 color Specifies the color used for the O2 fresh gas flow column and the O2
gas measurement digit shown on the screen.
The following colors are available: black, blue, green, cyan, red,
magenta, orange, lightgrey, darkgrey, lightblue, lightgreen, lightcyan,
lightred, lightmagenta, yellow, white.
Air color Specifies the color used for the Air fresh gas flow column shown on
the screen.
The same colors are available as described for O2 above.
N2O color Specifies the color used for the N2O fresh gas flow column and the
N2O gas measurement digit shown on the screen.
Air fill type Specifies the fill type used in the Air fresh gas flow column shown on
the screen.
- Solid (the column is filled with the selected color)
- Xhatch (the selected color is only used for an X-shape in the column,
the rest of the column is black)
CO2 color Specifies the color used for the CO2 graph and the CO2 gas
measurement digit shown on the screen.
Previous menu Returns you to the Miscellaneous menu.

3
3Installation
Installation must only be carried out by qualified service personnel, either by the hospital’s biomedical
department, or by Philips Support.
The machine is suitable for use in all medically used rooms which fulfill the requirements stated in “3.1
Electromagnetic Emissions” on page 68.
For mechanical and electrical installation, you need technically qualified personnel with a knowledge of
English. Additionally, for machine configuration, you need clinically qualified personnel with a
knowledge of the use environment.
CAUTION Before handling any circuit boards, wear the ESD wrist strap and connect it to the equipotential point
on the rear side of the machine. The machine must be grounded; handle circuit boards on the edges
only and avoid touching board surfaces. Contaminants like skin oil attracts dust to accumulate which
could retain moisture and affect the circuit performance..
As the first step in preparing the machine for use, follow the installation instructions given in this
chapter.
• Preparation before the installation:
– “3.2 Site Preparation” on page 71
– “3.3 Site Requirements” on page 73
• Installation starts from “3.5 Installation Checklist” on page 74.

3 Installation 3.1 Electromagnetic Emissions
3.1 Electromagnetic Emissions

The machine is suitable for use in the electromagnetic environment specified in the tables below. The
user must ensure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions Test Compliance Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference

Radio Frequency (RF) emissions Group 1 The machine uses RF energy only for its internal function.
Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely
to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions CISPR 11 Class A The machine is suitable for use in all establishments other
than those directly connected to the public low-voltage
power supply network that supplies buildings used for
domestic purposes.
RF emissions CISPR 11 Class B The machine is suitable for use in all establishments
Harmonic emissions IEC 61000-3-2 complies including those directly connected to the public low-voltage
power supply network that supplies buildings used for
Voltage fluctuations IEC 61000-3-3 complies domestic purposes.

3.1 Electromagnetic Emissions 3 Installation
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or user of
the machine should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity Test IEC 60601 Test Level Compliance Level Electromagnetic Environment - guidance
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any part
of the machine, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated
from the equation applicable to the frequency of
the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz
outside ISM bandsa
10 Vrms 10 Vrms
150 kHz to 80 MHz
3 5
outside ISM bandsa d = ---------  P
V1
Radiated RF 10 V/m 10 V/m

IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
12
d = ------  P
V2
12
d = ------  P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
E1
23
d = ------  P 800 MHz to 2,5 GHz
E1
where P is the maximum output power rating of

the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation distance in meters (m).
b
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as

determined by an electromagnetic site survey, c
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range.d
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following symbol:

3 Installation 3.1 Electromagnetic Emissions
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or user of
the machine should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity Test IEC 60601 Test Level Compliance Level Electromagnetic Environment - guidance
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
The ISM (industrial, scientific, and medical) bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 to 6.795 MHz; 13.553
MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
b
The compliance levels in the ISM frequency bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz and in the frequency range 80
MHz to 2.5 GHz are intended to decrease the likelihood that mobile/portable communications equipment could
cause interference if it is inadvertently brought into patient areas. For this reason, an additional factor of 10/3 has been
incorporated into the formulae used in calculating the recommended separation distance for transmitters in these
frequency ranges.
c Fields strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile
radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy.
To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be
considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the machine is used exceeds the applicable RF
compliance level above, the machine should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is
observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the machine.
d Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the
AX700 anesthesia machine
The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are
controlled. The customer or the user of the machine can help prevent electromagnetic interference by
maintaining a minimum distance between the portable and mobile RF communications equipment
(transmitters) and the machine as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the
communications equipment.
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter (m)

150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800MHz 800 MHz to 2.5
150 kHz to 80 MHz in ISM bands GHz
outside ISM bands
12
12 d = ------  P 23
d = ------  P E1 d = ------  P
3 5 V2 E1
d = ---------  P
V1
Rated maximum
output power of
transmitter (W)
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.37 0.38 0.38 0.73

3.2 Site Preparation 3 Installation
Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the
AX700 anesthesia machine
The machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are
controlled. The customer or the user of the machine can help prevent electromagnetic interference by
maintaining a minimum distance between the portable and mobile RF communications equipment
(transmitters) and the machine as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the
communications equipment.
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter (m)

150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800MHz 800 MHz to 2.5
150 kHz to 80 MHz in ISM bands GHz
outside ISM bands
12
12 d = ------  P 23
d = ------  P E1 d = ------  P
3 5 V2 E1
d = ---------  P
V1
Rated maximum
output power of
transmitter (W)
1 1.17 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.69 3.79 3.79 7.27
100 11.67 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in meters
(m) can be determined using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum
output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: The ISM (industrial, scientific, and medical) bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 to 6.795
MHz; 13.553 MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
NOTE 3: An additional factor of 10/3 has been incorporated into the formulae used in calculating the recommended
separation distance for transmitters in these frequency ranges in the ISM frequency bands: between 150 kHz and 80
MHz and between 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz. This is intended to decrease the likelihood that mobile/portable
communications equipment could cause interference if it is inadvertently brought into patient areas.
NOTE 4: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
3.2 Site Preparation

This section describes the procedures you should follow to plan and prepare a site for an AX700
anesthesia machine installation. It describes:
• Site planning.
• Roles and responsibilities for local and Philips personnel.
3.2.1 Site Planning

The careful planning of the site for the anesthesia machine is essential for its safe and efficient
operation. A consulting schedule should be established between the customer and Philips Sales and Support
Representatives, to ensure that all preparations are completed when the system is delivered.
The site planning phases prior to equipment installation are:

3 Installation 3.2 Site Preparation
Location: Planning the location of the machine(s).

Environment: Confirming and correcting, as necessary, the environment of the proposed installation
site(s).
System Capabilities: Explaining the possibilities for system upgrades.
Mounting: Referencing the mounting hardware information website for the listing of suitable
mounting hardware recommended for use with the various system components, and all details on the
available mounts and accessories.
3.2.2 Roles & Responsibilities

This section describes the procedures necessary to prepare a site for a system installation. The
procedures are grouped into two parts: procedures that local staff or contractors are responsible for, and
procedures that Philips personnel are responsible for.
Site Preparation Responsibilities

Local Staff
• Ensure that all safety, environmental, power, gas and gas evacuation (AGS) requirements are met.
NOTE If the device is configured with passive AGSS/WAGD, site requirements for AGSS/WAGD should still
be met as stated in “3.3 Site Requirements” on page 73. However, if the vacuum from the wall is too
high, a flow restrictor (PN 989803194321) can be ordered as an accessory to the system.
• Provide power outlets.

• Provide wall, AGS and Vacuum outlets.
Alternatively, the following procedures can be performed by Philips Personnel
• Provide the customer with the safety, environmental and power requirements.
• Assemble mounts and accessories e.g. monitor arms and side rails.
Procedures for Local Staff
The following tasks must be completed before the procedures for Philips personnel may be started.
• Providing Power Outlets
One power outlet for the machine is required by the system. The machine has 3 external power
outlets built in for peripheral devices consuming less than 1.25 Amps. Provide a power outlet in the
vicinity (1 m or 3 ft) of each component that requires power.
WARNING Only the power cable provided with the machine may be used. For reasons of safety, power (mains)
extension cables or adapters shall not be used.
CAUTION If more than one external device is connected to the auxiliary electrical outlets (optional), a high
leakage current from one device (e.g., a defective ground conductor) will affect the leakage current
from the other equipment.

3.3 Site Requirements 3 Installation
• Provide wall, AGS and Vacuum outlets.

One wall outlet for each installed gas, AGS and Vacuum in the vicinity (< 3 m or 9 ft, 4 m or 13 ft
for AGS)
Procedures for Philips Personnel

Before you begin the procedures in the installation sections, ensure that the customer has completed all
necessary preparations outlined in the previous section, “Procedures for Local Staff.”
• Install the machine and perform the installation procedures as described in this chapter.
• Hand over the machine to the end-users as described in“3.11 Handing Over the Machine” on
page 86.
3.3 Site Requirements

See the appendix “Technical Data” in this manual for information about:
• space requirements
• environmental requirements
• electrical requirements
• pneumatics requirements
3.4 Prerequisites
3.4.1 Tools Requirements
For the list of required tools, see “9 Service Parts and Tools” on page 323.
3.4.2 Safety Precautions

Before starting any installation, service or configuration of the machine, first consult section “1.12
General Safety Precautions” on page 15.

3 Installation 3.5 Installation Checklist
3.5 Installation Checklist

Use this checklist to document your installation.
Step Task Check Cell

when Task
Done
1 Perform initial inspection of delivery, unpack and check the shipment
(see “Unpacking and Checking the Shipment” on page 74).
2 Assemble mounts and accessories, including monitor arm, pendant interface,
and side rails (see “Assemble Mounts and Accessories” on page 79).
3 Connect the machine to AC mains using the supplied power cord
(see “3.8.1 Connect Supplies” on page 81).
4 Connect all supplies using the supplied hoses (see “3.8.1 Connect Supplies”
on page 81).
5 Perform test blocks
(see “3.9 Checking the Machine” on page 83).
6 Perform configuration tasks as required by local law and the customer
(see “3.10 Configuration Tasks” on page 83).
7 Hand over the Machine to the Customer
(see “3.11 Handing Over the Machine” on page 86.
3.6 Unpacking and Checking the Shipment

The anesthesia machine will arrive in either a horizontal or vertical protective wooden crate as pictured
in the unpacking procedures below. Any supporting options and accessories ordered are supplied
packed in protective shipping cartons together with the machine. The contents of the shipping crate
depend on the options you have purchased. In addition to the anesthesia machine it can contain the
following:
• User manuals
• Basic consumables
• Accessories
• GCX monitor arms and accessories
• Supply hoses
• Extra Integrated Breathing system (IBS) for IntelliSave
• Vaporizers
• External power panel
3.6.1 Unpacking the Vertical Transport Box

Before unpacking the transport box, ensure the machine is in the correct position and that all labelling
on the box is the right way up.
1 Using a slotted screwdriver, remove the 3 plastic locks from the left side and the 3 plastic locks
from right side. 7

3.6 Unpacking and Checking the Shipment 3 Installation
Do not remove the upper locks.
2 Remove the top plate by removing the 8 plastic locks from the top plate of transport box.
3 Remove the 2 upper locks which still are mounted on the left and right side.
Beware the side panels are now loose.
4 Open the transport box.

3 Installation 3.6 Unpacking and Checking the Shipment
5 Remove accessories and packing material from the box.
6 Carefully move the machine out of the transport box.
3.6.2 Unpacking the Horizontal Transport Box

Before unpacking the transport box, ensure the machine is in the correct position and that all labelling
on the box is the right way up.
CAUTION If a forklift is not available, this procedure requires 2 persons.

3.6 Unpacking and Checking the Shipment 3 Installation
1 Remove the 18 plastic locks from the top plate.
2 Remove the top plate.
3 Ensure that the machine is in the correct position in the box, with wheels towards the floor, and tilt
the box to an upright position.
Take care not to tilt the box too much.
4 Remove the accessories from the box.

5 Remove the wooden plates from the transport box.
6 Remove the 2 foam blocks under the wheel base.

3 Installation 3.6 Unpacking and Checking the Shipment
7 Carefully pull the machine out of the transport box.
3.6.3 Initial Inspection
Mechanical Inspection
Open the package carefully and remove the machine and accessories. Examine each part of the
shipment for visible damage, such as broken connectors or controls, or scratches on the equipment
surfaces. If the shipping crate/ carton(s) is undamaged, check the cushioning material and note any
signs of severe stress as an indication of rough handling in transit. This may be necessary to support
claims for hidden damage that may only become apparent during subsequent testing.Check that the
contents are complete and that the correct options and accessories have been delivered according to the
packaging list.
Electrical Inspection
The instrument has undergone extensive testing prior to shipment. Safety testing at installation is not
required (except in situations where devices are interconnected forming a system. An extensive self
check may be performed. This recommendation does not supersede local requirements. All tests are
described in the Performance Verification section of this manual.
3.6.4 Claims For Damage and Repackaging
Claims for Damage

When the equipment is received, if physical damage is evident or if the machine does not meet the
specified operational requirements of the patient safety checks or the extended self test, notify the
carrier and the nearest Philips Sales/Support Office at once. Philips will arrange for immediate repair or
replacement of the machine without waiting for the claim settlement by the carrier.
Repackaging for Shipment or Storage

If the machine is to be shipped to a Philips Sales/Support Office, securely attach a label showing the
name and address of the owner, the model and serial numbers, and the repair required (or symptoms of
the fault). If available and reusable, the original Philips packaging should be used to provide adequate
protection during transit. If the original Philips packaging is not available or reusable, please contact
the Philips Sales/Support Office who will provide information about adequate packaging materials and
methods.

3.7 Assemble Mounts and Accessories 3 Installation
3.7 Assemble Mounts and Accessories

Assemble mounts and accessories using the following instructions.
3.7.1 Monitor Arms

Monitor arms are options #K20, #K21, #K22, #K23, #K24, #K25, #K26, and #K27.
For mounting instructions refer to the Instructions For Use following the specific monitor arm.
3.7.2 Pendant Interface

Only for machines with option #A01 Pendant Prepared Version.
The following instruction describes how to attach and detach a pendant version of IntelliSave AX700.
NOTE The Anesthesia Machine Pendant Interface (AMPI) is compatible with pendants mounted with a Cato
/ Cicero pendant interface.
For detailed instructions on installing and mounting the Anesthesia Machine Pendant Interface
(AMPI), refer to the Installation Note that was delivered with the pendant interface.
Attach the anesthesia machine to a pendant
WARNING The AMPI can carry a maximum load of 200kg. Do not overload it. Refer to the technical data section
of the anesthesia machine and other peripheral equipment being loaded to the AMPI.
1 Remove the two M12 screws from the bottoms side of the anesthesia machine wheel base. (one on
each side of the machine)

3 Installation 3.7 Assemble Mounts and Accessories
2 Position the machine in front of the pendant lifting interface.

The two pins must be aligned with the holes in the AMPI.
3 Lift the machine by pressing the UP control button on the pendant until the wheel base is
fully detached (use the remote if available).
NOTE The M12 screws from the wheel base can be stored in the threads on the wheel base for later use.

3.8 Connections 3 Installation
3.8 Connections
3.8.1 Connect Supplies
Connect the machine to AC mains using the supplied power cord, and set the mains switch to ON.
WARNING • Always use the supplied power cord with the earthed mains plug to connect the machine to an
earthed AC mains socket. Never adapt the mains plug from the power supply to fit an unearthed AC
mains socket.
• Do not use AC mains extension cords or multiple portable socket-outlets. If a multiple portable
socket-outlet without an approved isolation transformer is used, the interruption of its protective
earthing may result in enclosure leakage currents equal to the sum of the individual earth leakage
currents, so exceeding allowable limits.
• Do not connect any devices that are not supported as part of a system.
• Any non-medical device placed and operated in the patient’s vicinity must be powered via an
approved isolation transformer that ensures mechanical fixing of the power cords and covering of any
unused power outlets.
CAUTION The mains switch must always be switched on, when the machine is connected to the AC mains.
Otherwise the EGM backup battery will not be charged.
The ventilator battery is only charged when the machine is turned on.
Connect all supplies to the wall outlets including VAC and AGSS/WAGD using the supplied hoses.
CAUTION If the machine is equipped with DISS type gas connections, it is important to use AGSS/WAGD hose
(P/N 989803191601) to ensure adequate AGSS/WAGD flow.

3 Installation 3.8 Connections
3.8.2 Connectivity to/from the SmartLog and RS232 ports

The following picture shows the communication board connections:.
3
1
1 Numeric data is sent from the GUI every 2 seconds, containing settings, measurement, alarm data
etc. to e.g. a patient monitor or a patient data management system
2 The serial SmartLog port is used to send waveform and numeric data to a patient monitor via a
IntelliBridge connection.
3 The SmartLog USB port is used for updating the SmartLog software and configuration, and
extracting alarm -and diagnostic data for troubleshooting to a USB stick.

3.9 Checking the Machine 3 Installation
3.9 Checking the Machine

The following table defines which tests and inspections need to be performed, and when they are
required.
Test Block Test or Inspection to be Performed

Visual Inspect the machine, accessories, hoses and cables for any damage.
Are they free of damage?
Refer to the procedure in “5.1.1 Visual Inspection” on page 122
AGSS/WAGD When the machine is connected to all supplies at the desired location at the
hospital perform see “Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System (AGSS/WAGD) Test”
on page 142, and adjust if needed.
Self-test After power up, perform the self-tests described in “5.2.10 Running the Self-
tests” on page 144
Spot Check of Vaporizers If the machine is delivered with vaporizers, perform a spot check of these. See
(Optional) “Vaporizer Tests” on page 203
Safety Tests Perform electrical safety tests for standalone devices, and each time you
combine equipment to form a system, or exchange system components.
Details of the electrical safety tests and procedures are described in “5.3 Safety
Tests” on page 180. These electrical safety tests are derived from international
standards but may not always be sufficient to meet local requirements.
3.10 Configuration Tasks

You must configure these settings during installation in the service menu.
• “3.10.1 Checking Customer-Specific Default Settings” on page 84
– “Checking Software Options” on page 84
– “Setting the Carrier Gas” on page 84
– “Changing the Gas Color” on page 84
– “Changing Gas Measurement” on page 85
– “ Changing O2 low gas alarm limits” on page 85
• “3.10.2 Checking Country-Specific Default Settings” on page 85
– “Setting the Date and Time” on page 85
– “Setting Rotameter Version” on page 85
– “Compensating for Altitude” on page 86

3 Installation 3.10 Configuration Tasks
3.10.1Checking Customer-Specific Default Settings

Some settings must be set to meet the customer requirements/installations:
For more specific default user settings, refer to the Instructions For Use.
Checking Software Options

Check against the purchase order that the correct software options are enabled (PRVT, Neonatal and
HLM Mode)
1 With the machine in STBY, select Vent Mode and check if you can select PRVT by turning the
control dial if ordered. Do not confirm.
NOTE PRVT can only be chosen if flow sensor is activated.
2 Go to Setup menu -> Service -> Installation and check that Neonatal and HLM Mode are
enabled / disabled as ordered.
Setting the Carrier Gas

In the installation menu you enable or disable the carrier gas options and configure if the user should
be able to select between both carrier gases.
1 In Setup menu -> Service, select Installation > Carrier gas option.
2 Select either Air/N2O enable, Air disable or N2O disable.
NOTE After a software installation you must first select any other setting than the actual set, and then go back
to the desired setting. Otherwise the Air/N2O selector valve might get stuck.
Changing the Gas Color

Although the gas colors have been set in the factory to meet country specific regulations, the customer
may have other requirements.
To change the gas colors:
1 In Setup menu -> Service, select Miscellaneous -> Gas color.
Here you can change the color for Air, O2, N2O, CO2 and the type of color filling for Air. See
“Miscellaneous Submenus” on page 66.

3.10 Configuration Tasks 3 Installation
Changing Gas Measurement

To perform gas measurements, you can select either a multigas module, an external O2 fuel cell or no
gas measuring. In the last case the gas measurement is usually done in the patient monitoring system.
To change the gas measurement:
1 In Setup menu -> Service, select Installation -> Gas measurement.
2 Select between Artema, O2 Fuel Cell On or OFF.
3 Restart the machine if you change the gas measurement.
Changing O2 low gas alarm limits

By factory default the Insp. O2 low and Exp. O2 low gas alarm limits is lower than the physical
minimum (21%) in order not to get erroneous alarms, outside the clinical environment:
Insp. O2 low = 18% and Exp. O2 low = 10%
Before handing the machine over to the customer, go to Alarm menu -> Gas meas. alarms and change
the settings for both Insp. and Exp. O2 low to 21%.
3.10.2Checking Country-Specific Default Settings

Some settings are made in the factory to match the typical requirements in a specific country.
Rotameter US version or std., gas colors, min. fresh gas option, line frequency and voltage is set to
appropriate values.
If you suspect that these settings may not match your institution’s requirements, check the settings and
change them if necessary as described in “3.10 Configuration Tasks” on page 83.
WARNING Before using the machine, check that the configuration meets the user requirements, especially patient
category and alarm limits.
Setting the Date and Time

To set or change the date and time:
1 In Setup menu, select Time and Date.
2 Change values for: day, month, year, hour, minute, seconds.
3 Press Main Screen to exit the menu.
Setting Rotameter Version

The rotameter section on the main screen can be set to European or US version. In the European
version the O2 column is always on the left side, and the carrier gas to the right. In the US version the
rotameter columns is reversed.
1 Go to Setup menu -> Service -> Installation -> Rotameter US.
2 Select Enable or Disable.

3 Installation 3.11 Handing Over the Machine
Compensating for Altitude

All flow and volume measurements are related to STPD (Standard Temperature Pressure Dry)
conditions.Therefore these calibrations must be done at the customer site, if altitude is above 1000 m.
(3280.83 ft.)
• O2 Flow
• Air Flow
• Ventilator Inspiratory Flow
• Vol. sensor: Adult
• Vol. sensor: Ped
• N2O Flow
Calibrations are done according to the procedures in “6 Calibration” on page 209.
3.11 Handing Over the Machine

NOTE If the machine is delivered with vaporizers, perform a spot check of these before handing over the machine.
See “Vaporizer Tests” on page 203
If you are handing over the machine to the end-users directly after configuration, make sure to exit the
Service or Super User mode by restarting the machine.
Ensure that the users have access to the following documentation delivered with the machine:
• Instructions for Use - for detailed questions during use
WARNING All users must complete a training program and read the Instructions for Use before working with the
machine.
These training materials (in combination with this service guide) can also be used to train service
personnel on how to use and service the machine.

4
4Maintenance
This section provides step by step maintenance procedures for the machine.
To ensure maximum safety and reliability of all functions of the machine, planned preventive
maintenance must be performed once a year by a Philips certified engineer.
Preventive Maintenance includes performance verification and calibration described in the next
chapters. These steps are required to make sure the measurement results are accurate and thereby that
patient safety is optimized.
4.1 Preventive Maintenance Sequence

Here is a summary of the recommended sequence of preventive maintenance:
Start
Determine type of preventive maintenance See “4.2 Recommended Frequency” on page 88
Prepare before the visit

See “4.3 Prerequisites” on page 89
Perform preventive maintenance See “4.4 Preventive Maintenance Procedures” on

page 91
Performance Tests See “5.2 Performance Verification Procedures” on

page 123
Reporting of Results See “5.5 Reporting of Test Results” on page 190
Evaluation of Results
Check and prepare for normal use

4 Maintenance 4.2 Recommended Frequency
NOTE If any single step fails, testing must be discontinued immediately and the device under test must be
repaired or labeled as defective.
4.2 Recommended Frequency

Perform the procedures as indicated in the suggested testing timetable. These timetable
recommendations do not supersede local requirements.
Table 4-11: Suggested Testing Timetable
Tests Frequency
Preventive Maintenance O-rings, filters, tubes, gaskets for: Once every year, or more often if
specified by local regulations.
- Inlets
“4.4.3 1-Year Maintenance” on
- Pin index yokes
page 91
- Back bar
- Auxiliary fresh gas outlet
- AGSS/WAGD
- Fans
- Patient suction system
- Multigas module filter and tube Once every second year.
“4.4.5 2-year Maintenance” on
page 110
- EGM battery Once every fourth year.
- Ventilator backup battery “4.4.7 4-year Maintenance” on
- Ventilator reduction valve page 112
Other Regular Tests Visual Inspection Before each use.

Self-tests
Performance Tests See “5 Performance Verification” on After any preventive maintenance
page 121 or repair.
Safety Tests, electrical Protective Earth Once every year and after repairs
Equipment Leakage Current where any electrical parts have been
removed or replaced or the
machine has been damaged by
impact.

4.3 Prerequisites 4 Maintenance
4.3 Prerequisites
• For information about the required tool kit, test kit and service kit and other parts, see “9 Service
Parts and Tools” on page 323.
• Review the latest service reports for the machine.
• Check the status of the machine, by running the initial self test before starting any preventive
maintenance. In case of any faulty conditions, these should be corrected before starting the
preventive maintenance.
WARNING High Voltage - Voltages dangerous to life are present in the machine when it is connected to the mains
power supply. Do not perform any disassembly procedures with power applied to the machine. Failure
to adhere to this warning could cause serious injury or death.
WARNING The electrical characteristics of anti-static mats should be checked before use, as described in the
manufacturer’s instructions for continued protection to both you and the equipment.
WARNING Use of standard oil or grease in the machine could cause an explosion. Use special grease P/N
453564416141 only.
WARNING Discard used parts on the hospital’s request, before installing the new service parts from the service kit,
to prevent mix-up.
WARNING Be sure only to use high pressure gaskets on the correct yoke; Red gaskets are ONLY for O2 and Air
yokes. Black gaskets are ONLY for N2O yokes
on the rear side of the machine. The machine must be grounded to earth. Handle circuit boards on the
edges only; avoid touching board surfaces. Contaminants like skin oil attracts dust to accumulate
which could retain moisture and affect the circuit performance..

4 Maintenance 4.3 Prerequisites
CAUTION Before starting any maintenance or repair, release all gas pressures; first N2O, then O2 and Air
CAUTION Do not open the electronic box of the ventilator. Opening the box voids the warranty of the ventilator.
CAUTION Vaporizer functionality should be verified (Spot-check) at least once a year by authorized personnel.
CAUTION Always use the specified tools to avoid damage to the screws, nuts and other parts.
CAUTION Protect the table plate with a piece of carpet or similar.
CAUTION After maintenance or repair, perform a full performance verification.
4.3.1 Cleaning the IntelliSave AX700

The machine must be cleaned before performing maintenance.
Wipe the machine's outer surfaces with a cloth moistened with a mild detergent or Isopropyl alcohol.
Afterward, dry the machine with a clean, dry cloth.
CAUTION Avoid abrasive or caustic cleaners, as they can damage the machine. Avoid organic liquids, such as
Acetone, Turpentine, and Thinners.

4.4 Preventive Maintenance Procedures 4 Maintenance
4.4 Preventive Maintenance Procedures

• “4.4.1 Visual Inspection” on page 91
• “4.4.3 1-Year Maintenance” on page 91
• “4.4.5 2-year Maintenance” on page 110
• “4.4.7 4-year Maintenance” on page 112
4.4.1 Visual Inspection

Check all exterior housings for cracks and damage. Check the condition of all external cables and
hoses, especially for splits or cracks and signs of twisting. If damage is evident, the damaged part should
be replaced immediately. Check that all mountings are correctly installed and secure. Refer to the
instructions that accompany the relevant mounting solution.
4.4.2 Accessing the Machine

See “8.4 Accessing the Machine” on page 255 for procedures on how to remove cover plates.
4.4.3 1-Year Maintenance

Every year the following units are part of preventive maintenance:
• “ Maintaining the Inlets” on page 92
• “ Maintaining the Pin Index Yokes” on page 93
• “ Maintaining the Back Bar” on page 94
• “ Maintaining the Auxiliary Fresh Gas Outlet” on page 95
• “ Maintaining the Evacuation - Flow marker for Rel. 1.0” on page 95
• “ Maintaining the Evacuation - Flow marker- Rel. 2.0” on page 96
• “ Maintaining the AGSS/WAGD Ejector Unit” on page 99
• “ Maintaining the Fan Filters” on page 101
• “ Maintaining the Patient Suction System” on page 102
• “ Maintaining the Integrated Breathing System (IBS)” on page 102
The parts for the annual maintenance are contained in the following to service kits:
• “9.1.1 Service Kit, Annual, IntelliSave AX700- Rel. 1.0” on page 326
• “9.1.2 Service Kit, Annual, IntelliSave AX700- Rel. 2.0” on page 328
Parts for the IBS is part of the Annual Service Kit listed above. But if you have extra IBS systems, you
need to use one Annual Service Kit, IBS IntelliSave AX for each IBS system and follow the instructions
in “ Maintaining the Integrated Breathing System (IBS)” on page 102
• “9.1.3 Annual Service Kit, IBS IntelliSave AX” on page 330

4 Maintenance 4.4 Preventive Maintenance Procedures
Maintaining the Inlets

1 Loosen the nut on the back of the inlet.
2 Remove the two screws from the inlet on the rear side, and dismount the inlet manifold.
3 Disassemble the inlet manifold. Do not disconnect any tubes.
4 Replace O-ring and filter.

5 Reassemble and mount the inlet manifold in the reverse order.
6 Continue with the remaining two gas supply inlets.
NOTE This procedure may also be carried out without dismounting the inlet manifolds, by replacing the O-
rings and filters from the backside of the inlet manifolds.
Maintaining the Pin Index Yokes
WARNING Be sure only to use high pressure gaskets on the correct yoke; Red gaskets are ONLY for O2 and Air
yokes. Black gaskets are ONLY for N2O yokes
1 Replace the three gaskets on the backside of the machine.
CAUTION Handle high pressure gaskets on the edges only and avoid touching the red/black rubber part.
Contaminants like skin oil attract dust to accumulate which could retain moisture and affect
performance of the part.

2 Remove gaskets.
3 Mount new ones.
Maintaining the Back Bar

1 Remove the 4 O-rings from the back bar.
2 Mount new O-rings.

Maintaining the Auxiliary Fresh Gas Outlet

1 Remove the O-ring from the auxiliary fresh gas outlet.
2 Mount the new O-ring.
Maintaining the Evacuation - Flow marker for Rel. 1.0

Use the following procedure to maintain the flow marker for AX700 Rel. 1.0 machines.
For Rel. 2.0 machines, see “Maintaining the Evacuation - Flow marker- Rel. 2.0” on page 96.
1 Remove the bottom screw cap and push the flow marker down and out.
2 Clean bottom screw cap for dust.

3 Place the new flow marker.
4 Mount the bottom screw cap.
Maintaining the Evacuation - Flow marker- Rel. 2.0

Use the following procedure to maintain the flow marker for AX700 Rel. 2.0 machines.
For Rel 1.0 machines, see “Maintaining the Evacuation - Flow marker for Rel. 1.0” on page 95.
1 Use a 6mm hexagon screwdriver to remove the bottom screw cap and push the flow marker down
and out.
2 Clean bottom screw cap for dust.

3 Insert the new flow marker into the flow marker housing.
4 Mount the bottom screw cap and tighten using a 6mm hexagon screwdriver.
Maintaining the Evacuation - AGSS/WAGD tubing

1 Remove the clear AGSS/WAGD tube from the ventilator manifold.
Rel. 1.0 machines Rel. 2.0 machines

2 Connect a tube extension adapter between the old and the new clear AGSS/WAGD tube.
3 Remove the AGSS/WAGD tube from the bottom of the flow marker manifold on the inside of the
machine.
4 Pull the tube out of the machine from the top, while assisting the tube from the bottom.
5 Connect the new tube in both ends.
6 Remove the AGSS/WAGD reservoir tube from the ventilator manifold.
7 Twist the tube, while pulling it out to remove the tube from the left side of the machine.

8 To remove the tube from the machine, unscrew the two cable binders.
9 Mount the new cable binders..
10 Both tubes are reconnected.
Maintaining the AGSS/WAGD Ejector Unit

1 Release the screws and remove the ejector unit from the machine.

2 To disassemble, release the two screws at the bottom of the ejector unit.
3 Disassemble the unit.
4 Remove the O-ring and the filter.
NOTE Be careful not to drop the brass flow resistor after the o-ring and filter is removed.
5 Place new filter and O-ring.

6 Assemble the ejector unit.
Rel. 1.0 ejector unit Rel. 2.0 ejector unit

7 When the ejector unit is assembled correctly, remount it inside the machine.
Maintaining the Fan Filters

Replace filters in upper and lower fans.
1 Click off the cover and remove the used filter.
2 Add the new filter and remount the cover.

3 Repeat the procedure for the lower fan.
Maintaining the Patient Suction System

1 Remove the filter housing of the patient suction system with the special tool, “ Tool for filter
change in Patient suction” on page 412
2 Replace the two filters and remount the housing.
Maintaining the Integrated Breathing System (IBS)

1 Start the procedure by removing the absorber from the IBS.

2 Remove the IBS from the IBS base.
3 Using the special tool, remove the three valves (A, B, C) from the bottom.
4 Release the adjustable pressure limit (APL) valve and remove it.
5 Remove the O-rings from the APL valve.

6 Remove valve domes and one-way yellow valves.
7 Remove the two O-rings, using the grooves and O-ring pick tool for easier access.
8 Remove the remaining three O-rings from the cones on the IBS.
9 Remove the chamber and the bellows.

10 Remove the blue O-ring, using the groove and O-ring pick tool for easier access.
11 Remove the spill valve cover, and remove the black O-ring inside.
12 Remove the membrane from the IBS and then remove the metal weight from the membrane.
13 The IBS is now cleared.
CAUTION Before assembly, do a visual inspection and ensure that the IBS is clean.

CAUTION Before assembly, check that all new parts are clean and intact.
14 Mount the new membrane on the metal weight (mount against the side with the smooth surface).
15 Mount the membrane lightly with the metal weight on top and ensure that it stays on when you
pull it.
16 Press the O-ring into the track on the spill valve cover.
17 Mount the cover correctly and ensure that it closes completely.

18 Press the blue O-ring into the IBS. Use a tool if needed, but not a sharp one.
19 Mount bellows and the chamber. To fix the O-ring, press down the chamber.
20 Mount the O-rings on the APL valve.
21 Remount it on the IBS with the text facing upwards.

22 Mount the three O-rings on the IBS cones.
NOTE DO NOT lubricate these O-rings before mounting.
23 Mount the O-rings on the one-way yellow valve guards.
24 Mount one-way yellow valves and valve domes.
25 Mount the new A, B and C valves.

26 Remove the four gaskets from the IBS base.
27 Mount the new gaskets.
CAUTION Be aware of the direction, when mounting the rubber gaskets on the IBS base.
28 Mount the IBS on the base and lock the handle.
29 Mount the absorber.

4.4.4 1-Year Maintenance Post Maintenance

See “4.4.8 Post Maintenance” on page 119.
4.4.5 2-year Maintenance

Every second year the following optional unit is part of preventive maintenance in addition to the
annual preventive maintenance units:
• “ Maintaining the Multigas Module” on page 110.
The corresponding spare parts are contained in the following service kit:
• “9.1.4 Service Kit, 2-Year, IntelliSave AX700” on page 331
Maintaining the Multigas Module

1 Remove the cover of the multigas module by removing the screws.
2 Disconnect the sample gas return tube, and remove filter.
3 Mount new filter as shown below with the blue side in correct direction.

4 Remove the nafion sample tube from second connector (from the bottom).
5 Pull out the nafion sample tube from the water trap receptacle and remove the tube completely
from the machine.
6 Mount the new nafion tube.
7 Remount the cover.

8 Remove the o-rings on the water trap receptacle, and replace with new ones.
4.4.6 2-Year Maintenance Post Maintenance

See “4.4.8 Post Maintenance” on page 119.
4.4.7 4-year Maintenance

Every fourth year the following units are part of preventive maintenance in addition to the annual and
2-year units:
• “ Maintaining the EGM Battery” on page 112
• “ Maintaining Ventilator Backup Battery” on page 116
• “ Maintaining Ventilator Reduction Valve” on page 117
The corresponding spare parts are contained in the following service kit:
• “ Service Kit, 4-Year for Rel. 1.0” on page 332
• “ Service Kit, 4Y, IntelliS. AX700 for Rel. 2.0” on page 333
Maintaining the EGM Battery
WARNING When removing and mounting the battery terminals and while they are unmounted, take care not to
short-circuit the terminals with the metal cover.
on the rear side of the machine. The machine must be grounded to earth.

Handle circuit boards on the edges only; avoid touching board surfaces. Contaminants like skin oil
attracts dust to accumulate which could retain moisture and affect the circuit performance.
1 The EGM battery is located here.
2 Remove the black (-) terminals.
3 Unscrew the two strain reliefs on the cover.
4 Remove the terminals completely.

5 Mount protection covers on the red (+) terminals (take from new batteries...).
6 Remove the remaining nuts from the cover and remove it.
7 Remove the batteries.
8 Mount four sticky rubber feet on each battery.

9 Place the new batteries.
10 Remount the cover.
11 Remount the terminals. The red (+) first.
12 Mount the strain reliefs.

Maintaining Ventilator Backup Battery

1 Disconnect the ventilator backup battery.
2 Loosen the two screws on each side of the cover.

Remove the battery cover by pulling it back and upwards.
3 Replace the battery.
4 Mount the cover and tighten the screws.

5 Reconnect the cable.
Maintaining Ventilator Reduction Valve
NOTE This procedure is only applicable to Rel. 1.0 machines.
1 Loosen the nut that fixes the valve adjustment.
2 Release the valve housing.

3 Remove the friction ring and membrane.
4 Unscrew the and remove the valve.
Position the new valve, mount the valve seat and tighten firmly.
NOTE To fit correctly in the thread, it is crucial that it is aligned on the tool
5 Place the membrane and the friction ring.

6 Ensure that the spring inside the valve housing does not exceed the top of the housing.
7 Tighten the valve housing.
4.4.8 Post Maintenance

If the machine requires 2-year or 4-year service, complete those procedures before performing the post
maintenance steps below:
1 Mount the top cover and reconnect the ON/OFF switch.
2 Connect all supply hoses to pressure, VAC and AGSS/WAGD. (VAC only if installed.)
3 Connect to mains.
4 Complete the performance verification tests (see “5 Performance Verification” on page 121).


5
5Performance Verification
After preventive maintenance or repair of a faulty machine, the service engineer must complete
performance verification to ensure that the machine is ready for use before handing it over to the
customer.
To prepare for the task, read “5.1 Prerequisites” on page 121.
In connection with preventive maintenance, all the procedures in “5.2 Performance Verification
Procedures” on page 123 must be followed from beginning to end and a test report should be filled
out. A Philips engineer uses an online tool to report back to Philips while non-Philips personnel should
make a copy of the checklist in “5.5.1 Test and Inspection Report” on page 191, and fill it out while
verifying the machine. The bold X in the procedure indicates that this is a valve that needs to be
recorded in the Test and Inspection Report.
See also the full sequence in “4.1 Preventive Maintenance Sequence” on page 87.
In addition to the performance verification procedures related to the AX700 itself, this chapter also
contains a procedure for spot check of the vaporizer used with the machine. See “Vaporizer Tests” on
page 203.
In connection with a repair, the specific performance verification procedures relevant after each repair
are described at the end of each repair procedure in “8 Repair” on page 253. Section “5.3.4 System
Test” on page 188 further lists the performance verification procedures required after repairs or
replacements in each specific functional block.
5.1 Prerequisites
• For instructions on how to access the machine see “Accessing the Machine” on page 255.
• All supplies that the machine is normally configured with, must be connected to wall outlets before
starting any of the performance verification tests in this section, unless otherwise is stated.
• The machine must be connected and switched on.
• At power up, complete the self-test unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
• The performance verification requires reference measuring instruments for:
– High pressure: 0-6x100 kPa (0-87 psig)
– Low pressure: -10 - +100 hPa(cmH2O)
– Flow: 0-100 L/min.

5 Performance Verification 5.1 Prerequisites
CAUTION All measurement of flow and pressure must be done according to STPD conditions (atmospheric
pressure of 1013 hPa(cmH2O) and temperature of 21ºC (69.8ºF). The flow and pressure measuring
reference instruments must be able to convert the results to these conditions.
CAUTION Measured gas for flow and volume on the reference instrument must correspond to the actual gas used
in the patient system.
CAUTION Do not save any calibration or test settings during performance verification. End tests by selecting
Reset settings & data, unless otherwise has been specified exclusively.
CAUTION When measuring volumes you must place a filter on inlet to the reference instrument, or between test
lung and the flow sensor.
CAUTION When testing the neonatal capabilities, use a neonatal test lung.
on the rear side of the machine. The machine must be grounded to earth.
5.1.1 Visual Inspection

Check all exterior housings for cracks and damage. Check the condition of all external cables and
hoses, especially for splits or cracks and signs of twisting. If serious damage is evident, the damaged part
should be replaced immediately. Check that all mountings are correctly installed and secure. Refer to
the instructions that accompany the relevant mounting solution.

5.2 Performance Verification Procedures 5 Performance Verification
5.2 Performance Verification Procedures

• “5.2.1 Internal Pressure Regulators Test” on page 125
• “5.2.2 Yoke Tests” on page 127
• “5.2.3 O2 Gas Supply Alarm Test” on page 130
• “5.2.4 Air Gas Supply Alarm Test” on page 132
• “5.2.5 N2O Gas Supply Alarm Test” on page 133
• “5.2.6 High Pressure Leakage Tests” on page 135
“ L(1): O2, Air and N2O Test” on page 136
“ L(2): Air Selector Valve Open Test” on page 137
“ L(3): N2O Selector Valve Open Test” on page 138
• “5.2.7 Dose System Leakage Test” on page 140
• “5.2.8 Integrated Patient Suction Test” on page 141
• “5.2.9 Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System (AGSS/WAGD) Test” on page 142
• “5.2.10 Running the Self-tests” on page 144
• “5.2.11 Auxiliary O2 Flowmeter Test” on page 146
• “5.2.12 O2 Flush Test” on page 147
• “5.2.13 Emergency Fresh Gas Test” on page 148
• “5.2.14 O2 Fresh Gas Flow Test” on page 148
• “5.2.15 Air Fresh Gas Flow Test” on page 150
• “5.2.16 N2O Fresh Gas Flow Test” on page 151
• “5.2.17 Auxiliary Fresh Gas Test” on page 152
• “5.2.18 MPL Valve for IBS Test for Rel. 2.0” on page 153
• “5.2.19 MPL Valve for Aux. Fresh Gas Outlet Test” on page 154
• “5.2.20 MPL Valve for Ventilator Test” on page 155
• “5.2.21 Drive Gas Selection and Drive Gas Alarm Test” on page 158
• “5.2.22 Mains Alarm Test” on page 162
• “5.2.23 IBS Switches Test” on page 163
• “5.2.24 Volume Measurement Zeroing Function Test” on page 164
• “5.2.25 Tidal Volume Test” on page 165
• “5.2.26 Ped. Volume Measurement Test” on page 166
• “5.2.27 Adult Volume Measurement Test” on page 168
• “5.2.28 Pressure Measurement Test” on page 170
• “5.2.29 PEEP Function Test” on page 171
• “5.2.30 PCV Function Test” on page 172
• “5.2.31 NPL Valve Test” on page 172

5 Performance Verification 5.2 Performance Verification Procedures
• “5.2.32 System Pressure Alarm and Disconnection Alarm Test” on page 175
• “5.2.33 High Pressure Alarm Test” on page 176
• “5.2.34 O2 Fuel Cell Sensor Test” on page 176
• “5.2.35 Multigas Module Test” on page 176
• “5.2.36 Fans Test” on page 178
• “5.2.37 Auxiliary Power Outlets Test” on page 178
• “5.2.38 SmartLog Test” on page 179
• “5.3 Safety Tests” on page 180
• “5.3.4 System Test” on page 188

5.2.1 Internal Pressure Regulators Test

This test verifies that the internal pressure regulators are within limits to ensure the condition for
pneumatic functionality is fulfilled.
EGM Manifold
Perform the test on all five regulators.
Regulators: Test points:
A B C A
B E C
D E D
Regulator Description Expected Result

A N2O for EGM X1 = 2.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)(29 ± 2.9 psig)
B O2 for EGM X2 = 2.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)(29 ± 2.9 psig)
C O2 Rel. 1.0: X3 = 4.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)(58 ± 2.9 psig)
Rel. 2.0: X3 = 3.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)(43.5 ± 2.9 psig)
D Air for EGM X4 = 2.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)(29 ± 2.9 psig)
E Drive Gas X5 = 3.5 ± 0.5 (x100 kPa)(51 ± 7.3 psig)
1 Connect a pressure measuring reference instrument to the corresponding test point, and check that
the pressure is within limits.
2 If not, see “Calibrating the Internal Pressure Regulators” on page 235.
Ventilator
NOTE For Rel 2.0 machines: Use the steps below, otherwise go to step 1 after note below.

1 In the ventilator, release the quick connector by pressing it backwards.
2 Mount a pressure measuring reference instrument on the regulator and activate it by pressing the
white knob on the pilot valve.
3 Check on the reference instrument that the pressure is X6 3.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa) (43.5 ± 2.9 psig).
If not, see “Calibrating the Internal Pressure Regulators” on page 235.
4 Remove the pressure measuring reference instrument and re-connect hose.
NOTE For Rel. 1.0 machines: Use the steps below.
1 In the ventilator, release the quick connector by pressing it backwards.

2 Mount a pressure measuring reference instrument on the regulator and activate it by pressing the
white knob on the pilot valve.
3 Check on the reference instrument that the pressure is X6 3.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa) (43.5 ± 2.9 psig).
4 Remove the pressure measuring reference instrument and re-connect hose.
5.2.2 Yoke Tests

Option# A01, C20, C22, C24
If the machine is equipped with yokes for gas cylinders, the following tests must be carried out, to
check that the reduced pressure from the Yoke pressure regulator is within limits, and that there is no
high pressure leakage from the cylinders. The standard version (A01) will always be equipped with one
(1) yoke for O2 (except if option C82 - 10L cylinder stand is installed). Additionally two (2) extra
yokes can be installed as either O2 (C20), Air (C22), or N2O (C24).
The below test applies to Rel. 1.0 machines.
For Rel. 2.0, see “Yoke Test for Rel. 2.0” on page 129.
CAUTION Check that the cylinders are clean, undamaged, and intact before connecting to the machine.
Yoke Tests for Rel. 1.0

Prerequisites
1 Disconnect the gas supply hoses from the wall outlets.
2 Mount gas cylinders on the installed yokes.
NOTE Do not open at this point.

3 On the high pressure tube for the pressure reference instrument, remove quick connector and
mount a T-piece as shown below:.
To EGM
To ref. instrument
Perform the following test for each gas

1 By using a T-piece, connect a pressure reference instrument between the EGM and the connector
for EGM/Yoke on the EGM manifold.
N2O Air
O2
T-piece for reference instrument
2 Open for the gas cylinder attached to the yoke under test.
3 For each Yoke in the table below, check on the reference instrument that the reduced pressure from
the gas cylinders is within the Expected Results, and remains stable after 2 minutes.

4 Check on the reduced pressure on the reference instrument.
Description Expected Result

Reduced pressure at yoke O2 (1) X1 = 4.5 ± 0.5 (x100 kPa)
(standard) (65.3 ± 7.3 psig)
Reduced pressure at yoke O2 (2) X1 = 4.5 ± 0.5 (x100 kPa)
(option) (65.3 ± 7.3 psig)
Reduced pressure at yoke Air X2 = 4.5 ± 0.5 (x100 kPa)
(option) (65.3 ± 7.3 psig)
Reduced pressure at yoke N20 X3 = 4.5 ± 0.5 (x100 kPa)
(option) (65.3 ± 7.3 psig)
5 Close the gas cylinder.

6 Check on the pressure gauge for the corresponding gas, that the high pressure from the gas cylinder
has not dropped more than 10 (x100 kPa) (145 psig) after 2 minutes.
7 Check on the reference instrument, that the reduced pressure from the yoke remains stable after 2
minutes.
8 Remove the T-piece for the reference instrument, and continue with the remaining yokes.
After testing remove the gas cylinder and reconnect the gas supply hoses.
If these check fail, replace the yoke.
Yoke Test for Rel. 2.0

1 Disconnect the gas supply hoses from the wall outlets.
2 Mount gas cylinders on the installed yokes.
3 Open for the gas cylinders.
4 Connect a pressure reference instrument to test point on EGM manifold, and check the reduced
pressure from each yoke.

J
F G
EGM Manifold- Left side EGM Manifold- Right side
Test Point Description Expected Result

F Reduced pressure at yoke O2 (1) X1 = 4.5 ± 0.5 (x100 kPa)
(standard) (65.3 ± 7.3 psig)
F Reduced pressure at yoke O2 (2) X1 = 4.5 ± 0.5 (x100 kPa)
(option) (65.3 ± 7.3 psig)
G Reduced pressure at yoke Air X2 = 4.5 ± 0.5 (x100 kPa)
(option) (65.3 ± 7.3 psig)
J Reduced pressure at yoke N20 X3 = 4.5 ± 0.5 (x100 kPa)
(option) (65.3 ± 7.3 psig)
5 For each Test Point in the table above, check on the reference instrument that the reduced pressure
from the gas cylinders is with the test limits, and remains stable after 2 minutes.
6 Close the gas cylinders, and start the stop watch on the screen.
7 Check on the pressure gauge for the corresponding gas, that the high pressure from the gas cylinder
has not dropped more than 10 (x100 kPa) (145 psig) after 2 minutes.
8 Check on the reference instrument, that the reduced pressure from the yoke remains stable after 2
minutes.
If the test fails, replace the yoke.
5.2.3 O2 Gas Supply Alarm Test

For Rel. 2.0, see “O2 Gas Supply Alarm Test for Rel. 2.0” on page 131.
O2 Gas Supply Alarm Test for Rel. 1.0

This test verifies that the pressure sensors in the EGM is calibrated correctly, to give an “O2 supply
pressure low” at the right pressure.
Prerequisites
1 Disconnect the O2 supply from wall outlet.

2 By using a T-piece, connect a pressure reference instrument in line with the inlet pressure tube, and
the connector for O2 on the EGM manifold.
To EGM
O2 Air N2O
To ref. instrument
3 Reconnect O2 supply.
Perform the following test

1 On the screen, set status to MAN.
2 Set O2 fresh gas flow to 2 L/min.
3 Reduce the O2 inlet pressure using a pressure regulator and check that the “O2 supply pressure
low” alarm starts when the measured inlet pressure has dropped to 2.5 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa) (36.25 ±
2.90) read on the pressure reference instrument. If yes, go to step 5.
4 If not, the O2 inlet pressure sensor must be re-calibrated (see “6.6 Calibrating the O2 Inlet
Pressure” on page 215) and then redo this test.
5 After testing, set status to STBY and in Setup menu, select Reset settings & data.
6 Disconnect the O2 supply and remove test equipment.
7 Reconnect the O2 supply.
O2 Gas Supply Alarm Test for Rel. 2.0

This test verifies that the pressure sensors in the EGM is calibrated correctly, to give an “O2 supply
1 Connect a pressure measuring reference instrument to test point F on the EGM manifold.
Right-hand side of EGM Manifold

3 Set O2 fresh gas flow to 2 L/min.

4 Reduce the O2 inlet pressure using a pressure regulator and check that the “O2 supply pressure
low” alarm starts when the measured inlet pressure has dropped to 2.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa) (29 ± 2.9
psig) read on the pressure reference instrument. If yes, go to step 5.
5 If not, the O2 inlet pressure sensor must be re-calibrated (see “6.6 Calibrating the O2 Inlet
7 Remove test equipment, and reconnect the O2 supply.
5.2.4 Air Gas Supply Alarm Test

For Rel. 2.0, see “Air Gas Supply Alarm Test for Rel. 2.0” on page 133.
Air Gas Supply Alarm Test for Rel. 1.0

This test verifies that the pressure sensors in the EGM is calibrated correctly, to give an “Air supply
Prerequisites
1 Disconnect the Air supply from wall outlet.
the connector for Air on the EGM manifold.
To EGM
To ref. instrument
3 Reconnect Air supply.

2 Set Air fresh gas flow to 2 L/min.
3 Reduce the Air inlet pressure using a pressure regulator and check that the “Air supply pressure
low” alarm starts when the measured inlet pressure has dropped to 2.5 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa) (36.25 ±
2.9 psig) read on the pressure reference instrument. If yes, go to step 5.
4 If not, the Air inlet pressure sensor must be re-calibrated (see “6.7 Calibrating the Air Inlet
6 Disconnect the Air supply and remove test equipment.
7 Reconnect the Air supply.

Air Gas Supply Alarm Test for Rel. 2.0

This test verifies that the pressure sensors in the EGM is calibrated correctly, to give an “Air supply
1 Connect a pressure measuring reference instrument to test point G on the EGM manifold.
Right-hand side of EGM Manifold

3 Set Air fresh gas flow to 2 L/min.
4 Reduce the Air inlet pressure using a pressure regulator and check that the “Air supply pressure
low” alarm starts when the measured inlet pressure has dropped to 2.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa) (29± 2.9
5 If not, the Air inlet pressure sensor must be re-calibrated (see “6.7 Calibrating the Air Inlet
7 Remove test equipment, and reconnect the Air supply.
5.2.5 N2O Gas Supply Alarm Test

For Rel. 2.0, see “N2O Gas Supply Alarm Test for Rel. 2.0” on page 134.
N2O Gas Supply Alarm Test for Rel. 1.0

This test verifies that the pressure sensors in the EGM is calibrated correctly, to give an “N2O supply
Prerequisites
1 Disconnect the Air supply from wall outlet.

the connector for N2O on the EGM manifold.
To EGM
To ref. instrument
3 Reconnect N2O supply.

2 Set Carrier gas to N2O in Setup menu.
3 Set O2 and N2O fresh gas flow to 2 L/min.
4 Reduce the N2O inlet pressure using a pressure regulator and check that the “N2O supply pressure
low” alarm starts when the measured inlet pressure has dropped to 2.5 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa) (36.3 ± 2.9
5 If not, the N2O inlet pressure sensor must be re-calibrated (see “6.8 Calibrating the N2O Inlet
7 Disconnect the N2O supply and remove test equipment.
8 Reconnect the N2O supply.
N2O Gas Supply Alarm Test for Rel. 2.0

This test verifies that the pressure sensors in the EGM is calibrated correctly, to give an “N2O supply
1 Connect a pressure measuring reference instrument to test point J on the EGM manifold.
Left-hand side of EGM Manifold

3 Set O2 and N2O fresh gas flow to 2 L/min.

4 Reduce the N2O inlet pressure using a pressure regulator and check that the “N2O supply pressure
low” alarm starts when the measured inlet pressure has dropped to 2.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa) (29 ± 2.9
5 If not, the Air inlet pressure sensor must be re-calibrated (see “6.8 Calibrating the N2O Inlet
7 Remove test equipment, and reconnect the Air supply.
5.2.6 High Pressure Leakage Tests

These tests check for possible leakages of O2, Air, and N2O in the high pressure system of the machine,
and verifies the function of the Air/N2O selector valve.
The tests can be carried out using the Philips PLT-01 Leakage Tester, or any equivalent high pressure
leakage tester. This test is using the PLT-01 Leakage Tester.
Prerequisites
The PLT-01 Leakage Tester can be mounted on a rail e.g. the side rail, or on the table top of the
anesthesia machine.
Push
1 Ensure the anesthesia machine is turned on, and the self-test is bypassed.
2 Connect O2 gas supply hose from the wall outlet (3-6 (x100 kPa) (44-87 psig))) to the inlet of the
leakage tester.
NOTE If your country specific gas supply hoses does not have a NIST female connection, you need an adapter
from O2 NIST to the specific standard in your country.
See “Pneumatics Leakage Tester” on page 415.
NOTE Ensure that all flows are closed, including patient suction.
3 Set the switch on the leakage tester to Inlet Regulator.

4 Connect a pressure reference instrument to TP-1 on the leakage tester.
5 Adjust the Inlet Regulator to give a pressure of 2.8 to 2.9 (x100 kPa) (40.6 to 42 psig), measured
on TP-1.
L(1): O2, Air and N2O Test

This test verifies the leakage / flow in the O2, Air, and N2O supply line, when all flows have been
turned off.
NOTE Before starting this procedures, read “Prerequisites” on page -135.
1 Connect test adapter to machine inlets.
A B C
NOTE A) Test adapter for NIST inlets. If there are mounted adapters for AFNOR or SIS hoses on the NIST
inlets, remove these in order to connect the test adapter for NIST. B) Test adapter for DISS.
C) If the DUT is configured without N2O, you must mount the N2O blind plug on the test adapters
N2O connector.

2 Connect the test hose between the leakage tester and test adapter.
3 Press O2 Flush on the DUT for approx. 1 second and wait 1 minute for the pressure to stabilize.
4 Set the switch on leakage tester to Leak Test, and wait approx. 2 minutes.
NOTE Under certain circumstances, the flowmeter ball can get stuck at the top of the flowmeter during
pressure alignment on both sides of the flow-meter. If this happens, tilt the PLT approx. 10° to the left,
and let it drop back into the upright position, and wait for the ball in the flowmeter to stabilize.
5 When the flowmeter ball is stable, check that the flowmeter on the leakage tester indicates a flow
(leakage) < 20ml/min. If yes, go to step 7.
6 If not, see “Table 7-6: High pressure, supply and drive gas O2/Air/N20” on page 244 in
Troubleshooting
7 After testing, set the switch on the leakage tester to Inlet Regulator, remove the test equipment,
and reconnect the gas supply hoses of the machine to the wall outlets
L(2): Air Selector Valve Open Test

This test verifies the function of the Air/N2O selector valve and a possible Air leakage while having an
N2O flow open.
1 Connect test adapter to the Air inlet of the machine, and mount blind plugs on the test adapters
O2 and N2O connectors.
The O2 and N2O inlets should still be connected to the wall outlets.

NOTE A Test adapter is available for NIST and DISS inlets. If there are mounted adapters for AFNOR or SIS
hoses on the NIST inlets, remove the inlet adapter for Air in order to connect the test adapter for
NIST.
2 Connect the test hose between leakage tester and test adapter.
3 Set Carrier gas to Air in the Setup menu.

4 Set status to MAN.
5 Set Air fresh gas flow to zero.
6 Set Carrier gas to N2O in the Setup menu and set a fresh gas flow of 2 L/min for O2 and N2O.
7 Set Carrier gas to Air, and check that the N2O Flow column is zero.
8 Set Carrier gas to N2O and check that the N2O flow column again shows 2 L/min.
9 Set switch on leakage tester to Leak Test, and wait approx. 2 minutes.
and let it drop back into the upright position, and wait for the ball in the flowmeter to stabilize.
10 Check that the flowmeter on the leakage tester indicates a Air flow (leakage) < 20ml/min. If yes, go
to step 12.
Troubleshooting
12 After testing, set status to STBY and go to the Setup menu, select Reset settings & data.
13 Set the switch on the leakage tester to Inlet Regulator, remove test equipment, and reconnect the
gas supply hoses of the machine to the wall outlets.
L(3): N2O Selector Valve Open Test

This test verifies the function of the Air/N2O selector valve for a possible N2O leakage while having an
Air flow open.

1 Connect test adapter to the N2O inlet of the machine, and mount blind plugs on the test adapters
O2 and Air connectors.
The O2 and Air inlets should still be connected to the wall outlets.
NOTE A Test adapter is available for NIST and DISS inlets. If there are mounted adapters for AFNOR or SIS
hoses on the NIST inlets, remove the inlet adapter for N2O in order to connect the test adapter for
NIST.
2 Connect the test hose between leakage tester and test adapter.
3 Set Carrier gas to N2O in the Setup menu.

5 Set N2O fresh gas flow to zero.
6 Set Carrier gas to Air in the Setup menu and set a fresh gas flow of 2 L/min for O2 and Air.
7 Set Carrier gas to N2O and check that the N2O flow column again shows 0 L/min.
8 Set switch on leakage tester to Leak test, and wait approx. 2 minutes.
let it drop back into the upright position, and wait for the ball in the flowmeter to stabilize.
9 Check that the flowmeter on the leakage tester indicates a Air flow (leakage) < 20ml/min. If yes, go
to step 12.
Troubleshooting

11 After testing, set status to STBY and go to the Setup menu, select Reset settings & data.
12 Set the switch on the leakage tester to Inlet Regulator, remove test equipment, and reconnect the
gas supply hoses of the machine to the wall outlets.
5.2.7 Dose System Leakage Test

This test verifies if there is a leakage in the internal dose system, when the auxiliary fresh gas outlet is
activated.
1 Activate the auxiliary fresh gas outlet.
2 Connect a pressure reference instrument to the auxiliary fresh gas outlet.
3 Set status to MAN, and wait until the MPL valve opens (at 90-100 hPa). Note the MPL opening
pressure X1.
4 Set status to STBY and start the Stop Watch.
5 Check that the pressure has not dropped more than 20 hPa over 10 seconds.
6 If above step passes successfully, go to step 10. If not, go to step 7.
7 Wait until the pressure has dropped to the range of 30-50 hPa. Note the pressure X2, and start the
Stop Watch.
8 After 10 seconds, note the pressure again X3.
9 Verify that X2 has not dropped more than 20 hPa. Over 10 seconds. X4 = X2-X3 = <20.
10 After testing, set aux. fresh gas switch to OFF, and remove test equipment.

5.2.8 Integrated Patient Suction Test

This test verifies the performance of the integrated patient suction in all settings.
A minimum inlet pressure of 3.5(x100 kPa) (51 psig) is required for this test.
1 Connect the pressure measuring reference instrument to the suction outlet.
2 Set the patient suction knob to max.
3 Turn the switch to MAX, and check on the reference instrument that the vacuum is X1 < -0.7
(x100 kPa) (-10.2 psig)(-525 mmHg).
4 Turn the switch to the left position, and check that the suction can be adjusted from 0.0 to < -0.7
(x100 kPa) (-10.2 psig)(-525 mmHg)
If yes, go to step 6.
5 If not, and the patient suction is powered by Air or O2, the suction unit placed on the back of the
machine could be defective or blocked.

6 Turn the patient suction knob to the left (adjust) and adjust VAC to highest suction.
7 Check on the reference instrument that the vacuum can be adjusted from 0 to < -0.7 (x100 kPa) (-
10.2 psig) (-525 mmHg). If yes, go to (step 9).
8 If not, see “Table 7-10: Integrated Patient Suction (VAC/pressure regulated)” on page 247 in
Troubleshooting.
9 After testing, switch off the patient suction and remove test equipment.
5.2.9 Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System (AGSS/WAGD) Test

This test verifies that the AGSS/WAGD flow is within the range of 25-40 L/min when connected to
the AGSS/WAGD wall connector, in order to properly remove any waste anesthetic gases from the
system. This will be visually indicated by the flow marker located on the left side of the machine.
CAUTION As this test is dependent of the resistance in the hospitals central scavenging system, this procedure
must be performed in the room, where the machine is used, with the machine connected to the AGSS/
WAGD wall connector.
Prerequisites
1 Connect a 2L respiration bag to the Y-piece..
2 Start the ventilator with the following settings:.

3 Set a fresh gas flow of 5 L/min.
Active AGSS/WAGD
1 Activate the AGSS/WAGD flow.
Rel. 1.0 machine Rel. 2.0 machine
2 For Rel. 1.0 machines, check that the yellow ball in the flow marker is visible in the clear area of
the flow marker.
NOTE For Rel. 2.0 machines, if the ball is in the lower red-area the flow is too low. If the ball is visible in the
upper red-area, the flow is too high.
For Rel 2.0 machines, check that the green ball in the flow marker is within the clear area of the flow
marker.
3 If yes, go to (step 5).

4 If not, the AGSS/WAGD ejector must be re-calibrated. See “Calibrating the Anesthesia Gas
Scavenging System (AGSS/WAGD)” on page 236.
Refer to Table 7-8 on page 246 for more troubleshooting hints.
5 After testing, switch off the AGSS/WAGD flow, and set status to STBY in the Setup menu, and
select Reset settings & data.
Passive AGSS/WAGD
If the machine have a passive AGS system (no ON/OFF switch on the flow marker) you should
perform following steps:
1 Activate the AGSS/WAGD flow from wall outlet.
2 Check that the ball in the flow marker is visible in the clear area of the flow marker.
If yes, go to (step 4).
3 If not, the AGSS/WAGD flow from the hospital must be adjusted to be within specification.
NOTE If the customer is using WAGD, and the flow is too high, the flow restrictor (PN 989803194321) can
be ordered. This part can also be ordered as an accessory to the system. See “6.18.2 Calibrating the
Passive AGSS/WAGD (Option # C10)” on page 238.
4 After testing, switch off the AGSS/WAGD flow.
5.2.10Running the Self-tests

There are two self-tests in the machine. A Full Test and an LC Test. The Full Test check the function
of the different sub systems in the machine, and measures the leakage and system compliance. The LC
Test is only used for measuring the leakage and compliance.
After a repair or preventive maintenance you must perform the Full Test with the absorber connected,
and the LC Test without absorber, to verify the leakage measurement in both cases.
NOTE If the machine is equipped with an integrated multigas module, the sample tube to this module must
be connected at the Y-piece during the self-test. Otherwise the measurement of leakage will be
incorrect.

Full Self-test with Absorber

1 Set status to STBY.
2 In Setup menu, select Selftest -> FULL test.
3 Perform the self-test according to the instructions on the screen. It takes approx. three minutes.
4 Check that the DUT (device under test) passes the test with leakage X1 < 50ml/min.
NOTE All alarms are disabled during Self-test.
5 Check that no error messages appear during the self-test. If no errors, go to (step 7).
6 In case of errors, consult the list of alarms in the IntelliSave AX700 Instructions for Use.
7 When the self-test has finished, the machine is ready for use.
LC Self-test without Absorber

1 Remove the CO2 absorber from the IBS.
3 In Setup menu, select Selftest -> LC test.
4 Perform the self-test according to the instructions on the screen. It takes approx. three minutes.
5 Check that the DUT (device under test) passes the test with leakage X2 < 50ml/min.
NOTE All alarms are disabled during Self-test.
6 Check that no error messages appear during the self-test.

If no errors, go to step 7.
7 In case of errors, consult the list of alarms in the IntelliSave AX700 Instructions for Use.
8 When the self-test has finished, the machine is ready for use.
9 After testing, remount the absorber.

5.2.11Auxiliary O2 Flowmeter Test

This test verifies the accuracy of the auxiliary O2 flowmeter.
in the patient system (O2).
1 Connect a flow measuring reference instrument and an oxygen analyzer to the outlet of the
auxiliary O2 flowmeter.
2 Check on the reference instrument that the gas is 100% O2.

3 Set the flowmeter to the following values, and check that it is within limits.
Release Test Expected results

(Rel. 1.0)
Rel. 1.0 AUX O2 @ 5 L/min X1 = 5 ± 0.6
AUX O2 @ 14 L/min X2 = 14 ± 1.3
Rel. 2.0 AUX O2 @ 6 L/min X1 = 6 ± 0.7
AUX O2 @ 12 L/min X2 = 12 ± 1.2
4 If not, replace the flowmeter and repeat from step 2.

5 After testing, set the emergency flow regulator to the minimum position, close the auxiliary O2
flowmeter, and remove the test equipment.

5.2.12O2 Flush Test

This test verifies the function of the O2 flush valve.

2 Activate the auxiliary fresh gas outlet and connect a flow measuring reference instrument and an
oxygen analyzer to the outlet.
3 Activate the O2 flush and check on the reference instrument that the flow is 100% O2 and
between X1 35 to 50 L/min. If yes, go to (step 5).
4 If not, see “Table 7-11: O2 Flush” on page 247 in Troubleshooting.

5 After testing, switch off the auxiliary fresh gas.

5.2.13Emergency Fresh Gas Test

This test verifies the emergency fresh gas switch, and the accuracy of the emergency O2, flowmeter.
2 Activate the emergency fresh gas flow and check that information appears on the display, telling
that the emergency fresh gas flow is activated.
3 Check on the reference instrument that the gas is 100% O2.

4 Set the flow to the following values and check that it is within limits.
Test Expected results

Emergency flow @ 5 L/min X1 = 5 ± 0.5 L/min
Emergency flow @ 15L/min X2 = 15 ± 1.5 L/min
If not, see “Table 7-7: Dose System” on page 245 in Troubleshooting and repeat from step 2.
5 After testing, deactivate the emergency fresh gas flow and check that the message disappears from
the screen.
6 Switch off the auxiliary fresh gas switch and remove the test equipment.
5.2.14O2 Fresh Gas Flow Test

This test verifies the regulation of the O2 flow control valve, and the accuracy of the flow.

CAUTION The machine must be powered up for at least 30 minutes before performing this calibration, to ensure
accuracy of the calibration. It is recommended that the machine is in status MAN or VENT with 1 L/
min O2 and Air fresh gas flow for 30 minutes to ensure the valves reach normal working temperature.
2 On the screen, set status to MAN and O2 fresh gas flow to 0.3 L/min.
NOTE The carrier gas must be set to zero (0) during this test.
3 Check that the flow column appears after a little while and that no alarms are activated.
4 Check on the reference instrument that the O2 concentration is 100%.
5 Set the O2 fresh gas flow to the following values, and check that it is within limits.
NOTE At all values, the flow column must be stable and without fluctuations.

O2 fresh gas flow @ 10.0 L/min X1 = 10.0 ± 1 L/min
O2 fresh gas flow @ 5.0 L/min X2 = 5.0 ± 0.5 L/min
O2 fresh gas flow @ 2.5 L/min X3 = 2.5 ± 0.25 L/min
O2 fresh gas flow @ 0.3L/min X4 = 0.3 ± 0.05 L/min
6 If not, the O2 fresh gas flow must be re-calibrated (see “6.3 Calibrating the O2 Flow” on page 211)
and then redo this test.
7 After testing, set the auxiliary fresh gas switch to off, set status to STBY, and in Setup menu select
Reset settings & data.

5.2.15Air Fresh Gas Flow Test

This test verifies the regulation of the Air flow control valve, and the accuracy of the flow.
in the patient system (Air).
2 On the screen, set status to MAN and Air fresh gas flow to 0.3 L/min.
NOTE The O2 flow must be set to zero (0) during this test.
4 Check on the reference instrument that the O2 concentration is 21%.
5 Set the Air fresh gas flow to the following values, and check that it is within limits.

Air fresh gas flow @ 10.0 L/min X1 = 10.0 ± 1 L/min
Air fresh gas flow @ 5.0 L/min X2 = 5.0 ± 0.5 L/min
Air fresh gas flow @ 2.5 L/min X3 = 2.5 ± 0.25 L/min
Air fresh gas flow @ 0.3L/min X4 = 0.3 ± 0.05 L/min
6 If not, the Air fresh gas flow must be re-calibrated (see “6.4 Calibrating the Air Flow” on page 212)
and then redo this test.

5.2.16N2O Fresh Gas Flow Test

This test verifies the regulation of the N2O flow control valve, and the accuracy of the flow, by
measuring the O2 percentage in an 50% mix with N2O.
NOTE This test can only be performed if test “5.2.14 O2 Fresh Gas Flow Test” on page 148 has been
completed successfully.
oxygen sensor to the outlet.
NOTE Be sure to take the necessary precautionary measures for evacuation of the N2O gas flow.
2 On the screen, set status to MAN and O2 and N2O fresh gas flow to 0.3 L/min.
4 Set the O2 and N2O fresh gas flows to the following values, and check that the O2 concentration of
the mixture stabilizes within limits.

O2 and N2O fresh gas flow @ 10.0 L/min X1 = 50 ± 3% O2


5 If not, the N2O fresh gas flow must be re-calibrated (see “6.5 Calibrating the N2O Flow” on
page 214) and then redo this test.
5.2.17Auxiliary Fresh Gas Test

This test verifies that there is no leakage between the two positions of the switch (ON = auxiliary
outlet, OFF = patient system).
2 Switch on the auxiliary fresh gas outlet and check that information confirming this appears on the
screen.
3 Connect a flow measuring reference instrument to BAG connection on the IBS.
4 Set the fresh gas flow to 10 L/min and check on the reference instrument that measured flow is
0.00 L/min. If yes, go to step 6.
5 If not, an internal leakage in the fresh gas switch must be repaired.
6 Switch off the auxiliary fresh gas outlet and check that the message disappears from the display.
7 Connect the flow measuring reference instrument to the auxiliary fresh gas outlet.
8 Check on the reference instrument that measured flow is 0.00 L/min. If yes, go to step 10.

9 If not, the fresh gas selector valve could be defective.

10 After testing, close the fresh gas flow and switch off the auxiliary fresh gas.
5.2.18MPL Valve for IBS Test for Rel. 2.0

This test verifies the function of the Maximum Pressure Limiting (MPL) valve for the fresh gas flow to
the IBS. This test also maintains and prevents the membrane in the valve from getting stuck over time.
NOTE This test only applies to Rel. 2.0 machines.
1 Block the inspiratory outlet.
2 Press the O2 flush.

3 Remove the blocking and connect a blocked pressure measuring reference instrument (0-100cm H
2O) to the outlet.
4 On the screen, set status to MAN and O2 fresh gas flow to 2 L/min.
5 Check on the reference instrument that the pressure is X1 = 90-100cm H2O.

6 If not, adjust the MPL valve by firmly holding the valve house and adjusting the top of the MPL
valve.
Twist
Hold
If the pressure is too low -> turn clockwise.

If the pressure is too high -> turn counter clockwise.
7 After adjustment, go to step 5.
8 After testing remove the test equipment, close the fresh gas and set status to STBY.
5.2.19MPL Valve for Aux. Fresh Gas Outlet Test

This test verifies the function of the Maximum Pressure Limiting (MPL) valve for the auxiliary fresh
gas outlet. This test also maintains and prevents the membrane in the valve to get stuck over time.
1 Block the auxiliary fresh gas outlet and activate it.
2 Press the O2 flush.
3 Remove the blocking and connect a pressure measuring reference instrument (0-100
hPa(cmH2O)) with a blocked outlet.
4 On the screen, set status to MAN and O2 fresh gas flow to 2 L/min.
5 Check on the reference instrument that the pressure is X1 90-100 hPa(cmH2O).

valve.
Twist
Hold

7 After adjustment, go to step 5
8 After testing, switch off the auxiliary fresh gas and remove test equipment.
9 Close the fresh gas flow and set status to STBY.
5.2.20MPL Valve for Ventilator Test

For Rel. 2.0, see “MPL Valve for Ventilator Test for Rel. 2.0” on page 156.
MPL Valve for Ventilator Test for Rel. 1.0

This test verifies the function of the Maximum Pressure Limiting (MPL) valve in the ventilator, and
ensures the valve opens at the correct pressure setting. This valve is maintained daily when running the
self-test to prevent the membrane in the valve from getting stuck over time.
1 In Setup menu -> Service, enter password.
2 In the Calibration menu, select BiB & Pat. pressure and follow the instructions on the screen.
3 Connect Y-piece to a blocked pressure measuring reference instrument (0-100 hPa(cmH2O)).
4 With the control dial Set O2 fresh gas flow to 2 L/min and check on the reference instrument that
pressure is X1 90-100 hPa(cmH2O).

valve.

7 After testing, press Main Screen to cancel the calibration of »BiB & Pat. pressure«, mount the
bellows and remove test equipment.
MPL Valve for Ventilator Test for Rel. 2.0

This test verifies the function of the Maximum Pressure Limiting (MPL) valve in the ventilator, and
ensures the valve opens at the correct pressure setting. This valve is maintained daily when running the
self-test to prevent the membrane in the valve from getting stuck over time.
1 In the ventilator, remove the hose on the valve block to the IBS. The text “To IBS” is engraved on
the valve block indicating which hose to remove.
2 Connect a test hose to the IBS instead.

3 Mount a reference instrument for flow and pressure to the valve block.
4 Go to Calibration menu, select Ventilator Insp. Flow.

Ignore the instructions on the screen. Press the control dial to proceed to the next step.
5 “Check vent. reduction valve...” is displayed on the screen. Ignore the instructions on the screen.
Press the control dial to proceed to the next step.
6 “Check that flow -instrument reads 0.0 L/min....” is displayed on the screen. Ignore the
instructions on the screen. Press the control dial to proceed to the next step.
7 “Adjust Insp. flow until flow-instr. reads 1.0 L/min....” is displayed on the screen, and adjust flow
until reference instrument reads 2.0 L/min. (Do NOT press the control dial).
8 Mount a reference instrument for pressure, as shown below.
9 Check on the reference instrument that the pressure is X1 90-100 hPa (cmH2O).
valve.

If the pressure is too low->turn clockwise.

If the pressure is too high->turn counter clockwise.
12 After testing, press Main Screen to cancel the calibration of ventilator Insp. Flow.
13 Remove the test equipment from the ventilator, and reconnect the hose from the IBS to the valve
block.
5.2.21Drive Gas Selection and Drive Gas Alarm Test

This test verifies the adjustment of the pressure switches for the automatic drive gas selection, and the
drive gas low alarm; the test verifies the function of the drive gas selection.
Prerequisites
The PLT-01 can be used as a pressure regulator in order to reduce the inlet pressure to the machine to
the required ranges for the test.
The PLT-01 Leakage Tester can be mounted on a rail e.g. the side rail on the table top on the
anesthesia machine.
Push
tester.

2 Set switch on leakage tester to Inlet Regulator.

4 Adjust the Inlet Regulator to give a pressure of > 3 (x100 kPa) (44 psig), measured on TP-1.
5 Connect test adapter to machine inlets.
Test adapter for NIST inlets. Test adapter for DISS. If the DUT is configured without
N2O, you must mount the N2O
If adapters for AFNOR or SIS
hoses have been mounted on the blind plug on the test adapters
NIST inlets, remove these in order N2O connector.
to connect the test adapter for
NIST.
NOTE A Test adapter is available for NIST and DISS inlets. If adapters for AFNOR or SIS hoses have been
mounted on the NIST inlets, remove the inlet adapter for Air in order to connect the test adapter for
NIST.

6 Connect the test hose between tester and test adapter.
Drive Gas Selection and Drive Gas Alarm Test for Rel. 1.0
For Rel. 2.0 machines, see “Drive Gas Selection and Drive Gas Alarm Test for Rel. 2.0” on page 161.
1 Connect a test lung to the Y-piece.
2 Set the Ventilator mode to VCV, Respiration Rate to 4, I:E ratio to 3:1, and TV to 200m/l.
3 Set status to VENT.
4 Connect a pressure reference instrument to test point E (drive gas) on the EGM manifold.
5 5Use the Inlet Regulator on the PLT tester to reduce the drive gas pressure to the machine, and
check that the machine switches (click) from the primary to the secondary drive gas, and issues the
alarms O2 drivegas low. Air is used as drivegas / Air drivegas low. O2 used as drivegas, when the
drive gas has dropped to:
2.0 (x100 kPa) (29 psig) - Rel. 1.0 machines
2.5 (x100 kPa) (36.3 psig) - Rel. 2.0 machines

(read on the reference instrument).

If not, go to “6.16.1 Calibrating the Automatic Drive Gas Selection” on page 232.
6 Use the Inlet Regulator on the PLT tester to reduce the drive gas pressure to the machine further,
and check that the Drivegas low alarm starts when the pressure has dropped to:
2.0 (x100kPa) (29 psig) - Rel. 1.0 machines.
1.5(x100 kPa) (21.8 psig) - Rel. 2.0 machines.
(read on the reference instrument)

7 If not, go to “6.16.2 Adjustment of Ventilator Drive Gas Low Alarm” on page 233.
8 Use the Inlet Regulator on the PLT tester to increase the pressure to:
>4.0 (x100kPa) (43.5 psig) - Rel. 1.0 machines.
>3.0 (x100 kPa) (58.0 psig) - Rel. 2.0 machines.

9 8Check that the ventilator starts functioning again, and that it switches back to the primary drive
gas (all alarms are cleared).
10 After testing, set status to STBY and in Setup Menu, select Reset settings & data.
11 Remove test equipment, and connect inlet pressure to wall outlets.
Drive Gas Selection and Drive Gas Alarm Test for Rel. 2.0
This test verifies the adjustment of the pressure switches for the automatic drive gas selection, and the
drive gas low alarm. Is also verifies the function of the drive gas selection.
2 Set the Ventilator mode to VCV, Tidal Volume to 500 ml, I:E Ratio to 3:0:1, Respiration Rate to
4, and Fresh Gas Flow to 0.20 l/min (Air or O2).
3 If the drive gas is O2, fill the bellows by pressing the O2 flush.
4 Connect a pressure reference instrument to test point G (drive gas) on the EGM manifold.
Pressure switch
NOTE On the picture above the primary drive gas is configured as Air. If the primary drive gas was configured
as O2, the pressure switch would be located in the left side of the EGM manifold.

5 Disconnect the primary drive gas (O2 or Air) supply hose from the wall outlet and check on the
reference instrument that the machine switches to the secondary drive gas when the primary drive
gas pressure at the ventilator has dropped to 2.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa) (29 ± 2.9 psig), and that the
ventilator continues to function as before.
6 If not, go to “6.16.1 Calibrating the Automatic Drive Gas Selection” on page 232.
7 Disconnect the secondary drive gas supply hose from the wall outlet and check that the “Ventilator
drive gas low” alarm starts when the pressure of the secondary drive gas is 1.5 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)
(21.8 ± 2.9 psig). If yes, go to step 9.
8 If not, go to “6.16.2 Adjustment of Ventilator Drive Gas Low Alarm” on page 233.
9 Connect the primary drive gas supply hose to the wall outlet. Check that the ventilator starts
functioning again and that it switches back to the primary drive gas.
10 Connect the secondary drive gas supply hose to the wall outlet and check that all alarms disappear.
5.2.22Mains Alarm Test

This test verifies the battery backup function of the machine.
This test includes 10 minutes monitoring and in case of errors, 8 hours recharging of batteries.
3 Disconnect the mains power cable from the mains wall outlet.
4 Check that “Ventilator mains power failure” and “Mains power failure” alarms start and that the
machine functions as before. If yes, go to step 6.
5 If not, see “Table 7-4: Mains Power” on page 243 in Troubleshooting and then redo this test.
6 Start the stopwatch and let the machine run on batteries for 10 minutes.
7 If a “Battery low” alarm starts during these 10 minutes, charge the batteries for at least 8 hours and
redo this test. If ok, go to step 9.
8 If not, see “Table 7-4: Mains Power” on page 243 in Troubleshooting.
9 After testing, connect the mains power cable to the machine and clear all alarms.

5.2.23IBS Switches Test

This test verifies function of IBS and ABS micro-switches on the IBS base, and their connection to the
alarm handling system in the EGM.
2 Set the Ventilator mode to VCV, Tidal Volume to 500 ml, Respiration Rate to 12 resp./min., and
I:E Ratio to 1:2.
3 Fill bellows by pressing the O2 flush.
4 Set fresh gas flow to 0.3 L/min.
5 Disconnect the CO2 absorber from the IBS by pressing the release knob.
6 Check that »Absorber disconnected« appears on the screen after approx. 20 sec.
7 Check that the bellows still go to the top of the chamber during expiration.
8 If not, the absorber valves may be defect.
9 Disconnect the IBS from the base and check that the ventilator stops and »Breathing system
disconnected« appears on the screen. If yes, go to step 11.
10 If not, see “Table 7-9: Integrated Breathing System (IBS)” on page 246 in Troubleshooting and
then redo this test.
11 After testing, connect the IBS to the base and lock it. Check that “Breathing system disconnected”
disappears from the screen.
12 Connect the CO2 absorber to the IBS and check that “Absorber disconnected” disappears from the
screen.

5.2.24Volume Measurement Zeroing Function Test

Inspiratory/expiratory volumes can be measured by a flow sensor, which can be placed at the Y-piece or
the expiratory port. The flow sensor gives a pressure signal to the P9 pressure sensor of the ventilator.
The ventilator then calculates the actual patient flow over time which gives a volume reading. During
start-up and every 10 min. the two zero-valves are activated by the ventilator for approx. 3 sec. in order
to do zero calibration of the P9 pressure sensor.
This test verifies for leakage around the zero calibration valve.
NOTE Before performing this test, the self-test must be performed using the same patient tube set to be used
in the test. This is to ensure that leakage and compliance measurements are accurate.
CAUTION Before performing this test, the machine must have been ventilating with a test lung for 30 minutes.
1 On the screen, set status to STBY.

2 Open the Y-piece of the patient system to ambient air.
3 In Setup menu, go to Spirometry sub-menu and set the sensor to Ped.

4 Set the sensor to Adult, to activate the zero calibration of the pressure transducers in the ventilator.
5 Connect a test lung to the Y-piece and set status to VENT.
6 Set the Ventilator mode to VCV, Tidal Volume to 500 ml, Respiration Rate to 12 resp./min., and
I:E Ratio to 1:2.
7 Set High alarm limit to 80 hPa(cmH2O) and fill the bellows by pressing the O2 flush.
8 After 5 respirations read and note the measured X1 TV exp value shown on the screen.
9 Set respiration rate (RR) to 4.
10 In Setup menu, go to Spirometry sub-menu and set the sensor to Ped.
11 Set sensor back to »Adult« and press the control dial during an inspiration.
12 Set respiration rate to 12, wait 5 respirations and read and note the measured X2 TV exp value
shown on the screen.
13 Check that the difference between the two measured values X3 |X1 - X2| <= 20ml.

14 If not, the zero-calibration valves for the volume measurement might be leaking.
15 After testing, set status to STBY, and in Setup menu select Reset settings & data.
5.2.25Tidal Volume Test

This test verifies the accuracy of the tidal volume delivered by the ventilator.
CAUTION The tidal volume is automatically regulated up to 10% 1minute after the last setting has been
confirmed. Therefore, read the measured VTI on the reference instrument after at least 5 respirations
within 1 minute.
CAUTION When measuring volumes you must place a filter on inlet to the reference instrument, or between
testlung and the flow sensor.
1 Connect the Y-piece to a volume measuring reference instrument and a test lung.
Tidal volume test, general Tidal volume test, neonatal

2 Go to Setup menu -> Spirometry -> Sensor and set to No Sensor

3 Remove the bellows from the bag in bottle and mount the chamber.
4 Go to Setup menu -> Service and enter the service password.
5 Set the Ventilator mode to VCV, Tidal Volume to 500 ml, Respiration Rate to 12 resp./min., I:E
Ratio to 1:2, and Fresh gas flow to 0.2 L/min.
6 Set High alarm limit to 80 hPa(cmH2O).
7 For the following settings, measure the inspired tidal volume after 3 respirations, and check that all
volumes are within limits.
CAUTION When testing the neonatal capabilities, use a neonatal test lung.
Trigger flow on Ref. instrumenta

TV RR I:E Start End Expected Result
20 ml 20 1:5 1 L/min -1 L/min X1 = 20 ± 10ml
(neonatal)
50 ml 20 1:5 2 L/min -1 L/min X2 = 50 ± 10ml
100 ml 10 1:2 2 L/min -1 L/min X3 = 100 ± 10ml
200 ml 10 1:2 2 L/min -1 L/min X4 = 200 ± 20ml
500 ml 10 1:2 5 L/min -1 L/min X5 = 500 ± 35ml
700 ml 10 1:2 5 L/min -1 L/min X6 = 700 ± 49ml
a.For all flow measurement, use these settings on Averaging Setup Menu on the reference instru-
ment: Number of Breaths Averaged=1 and Second Average for Real-Time values=0.5
8 If not, the ventilator inspiratory flow must be re-calibrated (see “6.9 Calibrating the Ventilator
Inspiratory Flow” on page 219) and then redo this test.
10 Mount the bellows in the bag-in-bottle chamber.
5.2.26Ped. Volume Measurement Test

This test verifies the accuracy volume measurements with an pediatric patient flow sensor, done by the
ventilator.

CAUTION The tidal volume is automatically regulated up to 10% 1 minute after the last setting has been
confirmed. Therefore, read the measured VTE on the reference instrument after at least 5 respirations
within 1 minute.
1 Place an Ped. flow sensor in the patient system.
Pediatric volume measurement test, general Pediatric volume measurement test, neonatal

3 In Setup menu -> Spirometry, set sensor to Ped.
4 Start the ventilator with default values. See “Default settings relevant in verification procedures” on
page 429.
5 Set the fresh gas flow to 10 L/min until the bellows are filled.
NOTE The set fresh gas must be the same gas as used for the machine’s drive gas
6 Set the total fresh gas flow to 0.2.

7 For the following settings, measure the expired tidal volume both on the reference instrument and
on the screen of the DUT.
The test is passed when the difference on the two measurements is within the expected result in the
table below.
If OK, go to step 9.

CAUTION When testing the neonatal capabilities, use a neonatal testlung.
Trigger flow on Ref. Expected Results

instrumenta
TV RR I:E Start End Ref. instrument DUT Pass criteria
20 ml 20 1:5 1 L/min -1 L/min X1 = 20 ± 10ml X2 = 20 ± 14ml X3 = |X1-X2| <= 10ml
(neonatal)
50 ml 20 1:5 2 L/min -1 L/min X4= 50 ± 10ml X5 = 50 ± 14ml X6 = |X4-X5| <= 10ml
a.For all flow measurement, use these settings on Averaging Setup Menu on the reference instrument: Number of
Breaths Averaged=1 and Second Average for Real-Time values=0.5
8 If measurements exceed the expected result, the pediatric flow sensor must be re-calibrated (see
“6.11 Calibrating the Flow Sensors” on page 224) and then redo this test.
9 After testing, set status to STBY.
5.2.27Adult Volume Measurement Test

This test verifies the accuracy of the volume measurements with an adult patient flow sensor, done by
the ventilator.
CAUTION The tidal volume is automatically regulated up to 10% 1 minutes after the last setting has been
confirmed. Therefore, read the measured VTE on the reference instrument after at least 5 respirations
within 1 minute.

1 Place an ADULT flow sensor in the patient system. Remember to place a filter between the test

3 In Setup menu -> Spirometry, set sensor to ADULT.
4 Start the ventilator with default values. See “Default settings relevant in verification procedures” on
page 429.
5 Set High alarm limit to 80.
6 Set the fresh gas flow to 10 L/min until the bellows are filled.
NOTE The set fresh gas must be the same gas as used for the machine’s drive gas
7 Set total fresh gas flow to 0.2.

8 For the following settings, measure the expired tidal volume both on the reference instrument and
on the screen of the DUT.
The test is passed when the difference on the two measurements is within the expected result in the
table below.
Trigger flow on Ref. Expected Results

instrumenta
TV RR I:E Start End Ref. instrument DUT Pass criteria
500 10 1:2 5 L/min -1 L/min X4 = 500 ± 35ml X5 = 500 ± 90ml X6 = |X4-X5| <= 55ml
700 10 1:2 5 L/min -1 L/min X7 = 700 ± 49ml X8 = 700 ± 120ml X9 = |X7-X8| <= 75ml
a.For all flow measurement, use these settings on Averaging Setup Menu on the reference instrument: Number of
Breaths Averaged=1 and Second Average for Real-Time values=0.5
9 If not, the Adult flow sensor must be re-calibrated (see “6.11 Calibrating the Flow Sensors” on
page 224) and then redo this test.

11 Remove test equipment.
5.2.28Pressure Measurement Test

This test verifies the accuracy of the patient and system pressure reading on the user interface.
1 Connect the pressure measuring reference instrument on the Y-piece, including the flow sensor,
spirometry tube and the sample tube.
2 Remove chamber and bellows from the IBS.

3 In Setup menu -> Service -> Calibration, select BiB and Pat. pressure and follow the instructions
on the screen, but without pressing the control dial to confirm.
4 Check the pressure is 0 hPa ± 1 hPa on the machine display as well as at the test instrument.
5 Press the control dial to confirm.
6 Follow the instructions on the screen.
NOTE The picture above shows the pressure measurement on the screen.
The BIB pressure and the measurement at the reference instrument should be equal ± 1 hPa(cmH2O)
The test is passed when the differences of the two measurements is within limits.
Expected Results
Test Ref. instrument DUT Pass criteria
Pressure @ 0 hPa(cmH2O) X1 = 0 ± 1 hPa(cmH2O) X2 = 0 ± 1 hPa(cmH2O) X3 = |X1-X2| 0± 1
hPa(cmH2O)
Pressure @ 10-20 hPa(cmH2O) X4 = 10-20 hPa(cmH2O) X5 = 10-20 hPa(cmH2O) X6 = (X4-X5) 0± 1
hPa(cmH2O)

Expected Results
Test Ref. instrument DUT Pass criteria
hPa(cmH2O)
hPa(cmH2O)
7 If not, the BiB and Patient pressure must be calibrated (see “6.10 Calibrating the Bag-in-Bottle and
Patient Pressure” on page 223) and then redo this test.
8 After testing, press Main Screen.
9 Remove test equipment and mount bellows.
5.2.29PEEP Function Test

This test verifies the regulation of the PEEP valve, and the function of the expiratory valve during
PEEP.
1 Place a test lung (NOT a respiration bag) at the Y-piece.
2 Set respiration rate to 6.

3 Set High alarm limit to 80 hPa(cmH2O).
5 Fill the bellows by pressing the O2 flush.
6 For the following PEEP values, check on the screen that the airway pressure graph is stable during
the expiratory phase indicating a stable pressure and that PEEP reading on the screen is within
limits.
PEEP Expected Result

5 hPa(cmH2O) X1 = 5 ± 2 hPa(cmH2O)
7 If the pressure is not stable, the PEEP valve must be recalibrated (see “6.12 Calibrating the PEEP
Valve” on page 227). Then redo this test.

5.2.30PCV Function Test

This test verifies regulation of the PEEP valve during pressure controlled ventilation.
1 Place a test lung (NOT a respiration bag) at the Y-piece.
2 Set respiration rate to 10.

3 Set ventilation mode to PCV.
6 For the following inspiratory pressure values, check on the screen that the airway pressure graph is
stable during the inspiratory phase indicating a stable pressure and that the Peak pressure reading
on the screen is within limits.
Pinsp. Expected Result

27 hPa(cmH2O) X2 = 30± 2 hPa(cmH2O)
47 hPa(cmH2O) X3 = 50± 2 hPa(cmH2O)
NOTE The peak pressure is calculated as Pinsp above PEEP e.g. Pinsp = 17 + (PEEP (OFF) = 3) => 20
7 If the pressure is not stable, the PEEP valve must be re-calibrated (see “6.12 Calibrating the PEEP
Valve” on page 227). Then redo this test.
9 Remove test equipment.
5.2.31NPL Valve Test

This test verifies that the negative pressure relief valve is adjusted to prevent vacuum in the patient
airway to exceed -5 to -7.5 hPa(cmH2O).
The valve is tested at a vacuum flow of -4 L/min.
Prerequisites

Ensure that vacuum is available in order to perform this test, either within the machine, or through a
secondary source. This test uses the internal patient suction as vacuum source.
Test setup
1 Connect the tube from the patient suction inlet to the pressure and flow measuring reference
instrument.
2 Turn the patient suction knob to the left.
3 Adjust the VAC flow so that the reference instrument reads X1 -4 ± 0.5 L/min.
Test
1 Connect the Y-piece to the output side of the pressure measuring reference instrument.
2 Check on the reference instrument that the opening pressure of the valve is between -5
hPa(cmH2O) and -7.5 hPa(cmH2O). If yes, go to step 5.

3 If not, adjust the NPL valve by loosening the counter nut.
4 Adjust the pressure.
if vacuum is too high -> turn counter clockwise.

if vacuum is too low -> turn clockwise.
5 After testing, tighten the counter nut.
6 Set the patient suction knob to OFF and remove the test equipment.

5.2.32System Pressure Alarm and Disconnection Alarm Test

This test verifies that the machine gives an alarm if the BiB pressure is more than 10 hPa(cmH2O)
higher than the set airway pressure alarm limit, and there has not been any variation in the airway
pressure for more than 15 sec.
1 Place a test lung at the Y-piece.

4 Remove the test lung and check that the “Ventilator system pressure High” alarm starts when the
bellows are at the bottom of the chamber.
5 Check that the “Disconnection” alarm starts approx. 15 sec. after removal of test lung.
6 Connect the test lung, activate O2 flush until bellows are in top position, and check that both
alarms stop after a couple of respirations. If yes, go to step 8.
7 If not, the Pat. and BiB pressure sensors must be re-calibrated (see “6.10 Calibrating the Bag-in-
Bottle and Patient Pressure” on page 223) and redo this test.
8 After testing, set status to STBY and cancel all alarms.

5.2.33High Pressure Alarm Test

This test verifies the limitation of the airway pressure.
1 Set High pressure limit to 15 hPa(cmH2O).
2 Set status to VENT using the default values (See “Default settings relevant in verification
procedures” on page 429.) and check that the »Airway pressure high« alarm starts.
3 Check that the PEAK pressure is regulated to X1 15 ± 1 hPa(cmH2O) shown on the screen.
4 Set High alarm limit to 80 hPa(cmH2O) and check that the alarm stops after one respiration cycle.
5 If not, contact the supplier.
6 After testing, set status to STBY, cancel all alarms and in Setup menu select Reset settings & data.
5.2.34O2 Fuel Cell Sensor Test

If the machine is equipped with an external O2 fuel cell sensor the following test must be performed, to
check that is measures correctly.
1 Remove the O2 sensor from the IBS and place it in room air, or in 10 L/min Air flow.
2 Check on the screen that the O2 concentration is X1 21 ± 1%.
4 Place the O2 sensor on the INSP cone on the IBS and set fresh gas flow to 10 L/min O2.
5 Check on the screen that the O2 concentration is X2 100 ± 2.

6 If one of these two tests indicates an inaccuracy, the O2 sensor must be re-calibrated (see “6.15
Calibrating the O2 Fuel-cell Sensor” on page 230) and then redo this test.
7 After testing, close the fresh gas flow and set status to STBY.
5.2.35Multigas Module Test

If an multigas module is installed the following test needs to be performed.
This test verifies the accuracy of the gas measurements from the multigas module, and verifies that
there is no leakage in the measurement chamber and gas flow path.
If the machine is equipped with an integrated multigas module, the following test must be performed:
1 Turn the machine off and on.
2 Check that “Gas module warming up” appears on the screen at power-up and disappears after
approx. 2 minutes.

3 Let the sample tube to the gas module draw room air, and check on the screen that measured O2
concentration is X1 21 ±1%.
4 In Service -> Calibration, select Gas module -> Leak check.
5 Within 10 seconds block the inlet on the gas module water trap.
6 Check on the screen that gas module leak check is ok.

7 If not, see “Table 7-12: Multigas module” on page 247 in Troubleshooting to repair and then redo
this test.
8 Follow the instructions on back of the Artema gas bottle.
9 Connect the sample tube to an Artema calibration gas bottle.
10 Check on the screen that the gas concentrations are within limits as below.
Gas Concentration Expected Result

O2% X2 = 42 - 49
N2O% X3 = 45 - 52
CO2% X4 = 4.6 - 5.4
AA% X5 = 1.3 - 1.7 ISO
NOTE If the CO2 unit is NOT set to “%”, go to Setup Menu -> Gas meas. setup -> CO2 unit and select %.
After testing, set the unit back to the initial unit (%, kPa, mmHg)
11 If not, replace the multigas module.

12 After testing, remove test equipment and mount sample tube.

NOTE When the machine has been in STBY mode for more than 10 min, the multigas module sample pump
will stop. In order to start the pump, set the machine to MAN.
5.2.36Fans Test
This test verifies both the function of the fans, and the fan-sense system.
1 Check that both the upper and the lower fans are running.
2 Block the fans and check that the alarm messages “EGM fan stopped” and “Ventilator fan stopped”
appear on the screen.
3 If not, check the cables and plugs.
5.2.37Auxiliary Power Outlets Test

If the machine is equipped with auxiliary power outlets, the following test must be performed, to
check, that none of the corresponding fuses are blown.
1 Connect a voltmeter to each of the three auxiliary power outlets.
2 Check that the voltage is within 220-230V or 100-115V (country specific).

3 If voltage is not present for one of the outlets, the fuse for the outlet (F6, F7 or F8) could be
defective.
4 If voltage is not present for all of the outlets, the common fuse for the outlets (F5) could be
defective.
5 Connect a voltmeter to the vaporizer power outlet.
6 Check that the voltage is within 220-230V or 100-115V (country specific).


7 If not, fuse F20 could be defective.

8 After testing, remove test equipment.
5.2.38SmartLog Test
This test verifies the communication to -and from the SmartLog, and it’s functionality.
NOTE Philips recommend using a USB memory stick with a built-in LED that indicates when the USB is
recognized by the system, and when there is communication to/from the USB.
1 On a USB stick, create two new folders named ‘configuration’ and ‘diagnostic_data’.
2 Insert the USB stick in the SmartLog USB port on the rear side of the machine.
3 Wait one minute for the SmartLog to detect the USB stick.
4 On the Trend menu, select Export log files... and wait one minute.
NOTE If EGM software version is 7.1.2 go to Setup Menu > Service… > Miscellaneous, select Dump logfiles
and wait 1 minute.
5 Remove the USB memory stick and insert it in your PC.

6 Check that the USB stick contains at least the following files:
File
YYYY-MM-DD_tt.mm.ss_logXX.txt
YYYY-MM-DD_tt.mm.ss_logXX.pdf
YYYY-MM-DD_tt.mm.ss_logXX_alarms.pdf
YYYY-MM-DD_tt.mm.ss_logXX_selftest.pdf
syslog.txt
The files are all located in the root folder of USB memory stick, for example D:\ if D is the drive letter
of the USB memory stick. File name syntax can vary depending on smartlog software revision.

5 Performance Verification 5.3 Safety Tests
Note that the following data is only available on SmartLog version 2.0 build 52 or higher:
File Location
installed_version.txt D:\configuration
active_data_handler.conf D:\configuration
diagnostics.txt D:\diagnostic_data
monit_deamon.txt D:\diagnostic_data
5.3 Safety Tests

Safety tests are comprised of the following tests performed on the anesthesia workstation:
• protective earth resistance
• equipment leakage current
Safety test requirements are set according to international standards, their national deviations and
specific local requirements. The safety tests detailed in this Service Guide are derived from
international standards but may not be sufficient to meet local requirements. We recommend that you
file the results of safety tests. This may help to identify a problem early particularly if the test results
deteriorate over a period of time.
Each individual piece of equipment which has its own connection to mains or which can be connected
or disconnected from mains without the use of a tool must be tested individually.
Accessories which can affect the safety of the equipment under test or the results of the safety test must
be included in the tests and documented.
5.3.1 Precautions
• These tests are well established procedures of detecting abnormalities that, if undetected, could
result in danger to either the patient or the operator.
• Disconnect the device under test from mains before performing safety tests. If this is not possible,
ensure that the performance of these tests does not result in danger to the safety analyzer operator,
patients or other individuals.
• Test equipment (for example, a Safety Analyzer) is required to perform the safety tests. Please refer to
Annex C of IEC/EN 62353 for exact requirements for the measurement equipment and for
measurement circuits for protective earth resistance and leakage currents. Refer to the
documentation that accompanies the test equipment. Only certified technicians should perform
safety testing.
• The consistent use of a Safety Analyzer as a routine step in closing a installation, maintenance or
repair and is emphasized as a mandatory step to maintain user and patient safety. You can also use
the Safety Analyzer as a troubleshooting tool to detect abnormalities of line voltage and grounding
plus total current loads.
• During safety testing, mains voltage and electrical currents are applied to the device under test.
Ensure that there are no open electrical conductive parts during the performance of these tests.
Avoid that users, patients or other individuals come into contact with touch voltage.

5.3 Safety Tests 5 Performance Verification
• For Europe, Asia/Pacific and US, the anesthesia machine complies with:
IEC 60601-1:1988 + A1:1991 + A2:1995 + Corr:1995; IEC 60601-1-1:2000; EC 60601-1-2:2007;
IEC 60601-1-4:1999; IEC 60601-1-6:2006; IEC 60601-1-8:2006 + A1:2012; IEC 60601-2-
13:2009.
• Local regulations supersede the testing requirements listed in this chapter.
• If a non-medical electrical device is connected to a medical electrical device, the resulting medical
electrical system must comply with IEC/EN 60601-1-1.
• Perform safety tests as described on the following pages.
5.3.2 Safety Test Procedures

Use the test procedures outlined here only for verifying and recording the initial values prior to or at
installation, after repairs, and for periodic recurrent testing after maintenance. The setups used for
these tests and the acceptable ranges of values are derived from local and international standards but
may not be equivalent. These tests are not a substitute for local safety testing where it is required for an
installation or a service event. If using an approved safety tester, perform the tests in accordance with
the information provided by the manufacturer of the tester and in accordance with your local
regulations, for example IEC/EN 60601-1, UL60601-1 (US) and IEC/EN 62353. The safety tester
should print results as detailed in this chapter, together with other data.
Please refer to Annex C of IEC/EN 62353 for requirements for the measurement equipment and for
measurement circuits for protective earth resistance and leakage currents.
The following symbols are used in the diagrams illustrating the electrical safety tests:

Supply mains Protective earth
Supply mains terminals Protective earth terminal

Mains part Applied part
F-type applied part Measurement device
Resistance measuring device Connection to accessible conductive

parts
......... Optional connection

CAUTION After each service, maintenance or repair event:

Ensure all fuses accessible from the outside comply with the manufacturer’s specification.
Check:
• the integrity of mechanical parts, internally and externally.
• any damage or contamination, internally and externally.
• that no loose parts or foreign bodies remain in the device after servicing or repair.
• the integrity of all relevant accessories.
Hints for Correct Performance of Safety Tests

• Perform a visual inspection on all detachable power cords used with the anesthesia workstation and
include these in all safety test procedures.
• Connection lines such as e.g. data lines may appear to act like protective earth connections. These
may lead to incorrect measurements and need to be considered during testing. If necessary, unplug
these connections.
• Measurement of insulation resistance is not required.
• When testing a medical electrical system, where possible, test it such that potential ground voltage
variations are present as they may be during actual use.

Guideline for Performance of Safety Tests

Connect the detachable power cord of the device under test to the safety analyzer's test mains port.
Connect the enclosure test lead of the safety analyzer to the enclosure of the device under test, e.g. to
the equipotential connector. For testing the applied part leakage current, connect all applied parts to
the safety analyzer using the appropriate patient lead or adapter cable. For the ECG parameter all ten
ECG-leads need to be connected to the safety analyzer. If necessary, use an adapter cable to connect all
ten ECG-leads. If necessary, repeat the safety test procedure until all available applied parts have been
tested. Refer to the documentation that accompanies the safety analyzer for further details on how to
set up and perform the test.
Set-up example
NOTE Protective Earth Resistance Test: The test lead needs to go to parts that require protective earthing.
This may be a single connection or several tested after each other.
NOTE Equipment Leakage Current Test: The test lead needs to go to the grounded enclosure parts, the
ungrounded enclosure parts and all of the applied parts connected together.
NOTE The above graphics resemble the Fluke ESA-620 setup and are protected by copyright (Copyright
owned by Fluke).
NOTE The mains switch and the ON/OFF switch must both be switched ON during electrical safety testing.

5.3.3 Electrical Safety Testing
S(1): Protective Earth Resistance Test

Perform the following test:
Measuring circuit for the measurement of Protective Earth Resistance in medical electrical
equipment that is disconnected from the supply mains.
This measures the impedance of the Protective Earth (PE) terminal to all exposed metal parts of the
Device under Test (DUT), which are for safety reasons connected to the Protective Earth (PE).
You can find metal parts of the device at the equipotential connector.
Measurements shall be performed using a measuring device capable to deliver a current of at least 200
mA into 500 mOhms with maximum open circuit voltage of 24V.
This safety test is based on IEC/EN 62353.
Report the highest value (X1).
Test Expected Results

Protective Earth Resistance Test (with mains X1 ≤ 300 mOhms
cable)
NOTE If the protective earth resistance test fails, testing must be discontinued immediately and the device
under test must be repaired or labeled as defective.
NOTE All values for current and voltage are the root mean square (r.m.s.) values, unless otherwise stated.

NOTE Flex the power cord during the protective earth resistance test to evaluate its integrity. If it does not
pass the test, exchange the power cord. Then repeat the test. If it still does not pass, follow the
instructions in the first bullet point of this note above.
S(2): Equipment Leakage Current Test - Normal Condition

Measuring circuit for the measurement of Equipment Leakage Current - Direct method according
to IEC/EN 62353.
This test measures leakage current of accessible conductive and non-conductive metal parts of the
anesthesia machine and the functional earth leakage current. It tests normal and reversed polarity.
Perform the test with S1 (mains switch) closed (Normal Condition).
There are no parts of the equipment that are not protectively earthed. Disconnect any data cables and
any connections that may provide an extraneous earth path. Do not touch the DUT during testing.

Equipment Leakage Current Test (Normal X2 ≤ 100 μA
Condition - with mains cable)

S(3): Equipment Leakage Current Test - Single Fault Condition

Measuring circuit for the measurement of Equipment Leakage Current - Direct method according
to IEC/EN 62353.
This test measures leakage current of accessible conductive and non-conductive metal parts of the
anesthesia machine and the functional earth leakage current. It tests normal and reversed polarity.
Perform the test with S1 open (Single Fault Condition).
There are no parts of the equipment that are not protectively earthed. Disconnect any data cables and
any connections that may provide an extraneous earth path. Do not touch the DUT during testing.

Equipment Leakage Current Test (Single X3 ≤ 300 μA
Fault Condition - with mains cable)

5.3.4 System Test

After setting up a system, perform system safety tests according to IEC/EN 60601-1-1.
What is a Medical Electrical System?

A medical electrical system is a combination of at least one medical electrical piece of equipment and
other electrical equipment, interconnected by functional connection or use of a multiple portable
socket-outlet.
• Devices forming a medical electrical system must comply either with IEC/EN 60601-1-1 or IEC
60601-1 edition 3 clause 16.
• Any electrical device such as IT equipment that is connected to the medical electrical equipment
must comply either with IEC/EN 60601-1-1 or IEC 60601-1 edition 3 clause 16 and be tested
accordingly.
• Non-medical electrical equipment
General Requirements for a System

After installation or subsequent modification, a system must comply with the requirements of the
system standard IEC/EN 60601-1-1. Compliance is checked by inspection, testing or analysis, as
specified in the IEC/EN 60601-1-1 or in this book.
Medical electrical equipment must comply with the requirements of the general standard IEC/EN
60601-1, its relevant particular standards and specific national deviations. Non-medical electrical
equipment shall comply with IEC safety standards that are relevant to that equipment.
Relevant standards for some non-medical electrical equipment may have limits for equipment leakage
currents higher than required by the standard IEC/EN 60601-1-1 or IEC 60601-1 edition 3 clause 16.
These higher limits are acceptable only outside the patient environment. It is essential to reduce
equipment leakage currents to values specified in IEC/EN 60601-1 when non-medical electrical
equipment is to be used within the patient environment.
WARNING • Do not use additional AC mains extension cords or multiple portable socket-outlets. If a multiple
portable socket-outlet is used, the resulting system must be compliant with IEC/EN 60601-1-1 or
IEC 60601-1 edition 3 clause 16. Do not place multiple socket-outlets on the floor. Do not exceed
the maximum permitted load for multiple socket-outlets used with the system. Do not plug
additional multiple socket outlets or extension cords into multiple socket outlets or extension cords
used within the medical electrical system.
• Do not connect any devices that are not supported as part of a system.
• Do not use a device in the patient vicinity if it does not comply with IEC/EN 60601-1 or IEC
60601-1 edition 3 clause 16. The whole installation, including devices outside of the patient
vicinity, must comply with IEC/EN 60601-1-1 or IEC 60601-1 edition 3 clause 16. Any
nonmedical device placed and operated in the patient’s vicinity must be powered via a separating
transformer (compliant with IEC/EN 60601-1-1 or IEC 60601-1 edition 3 clause 16) that ensures
mechanical fixing of the power cords and covering of any unused power outlets.

System Test Procedure

Connect the detachable power cord of the device under test to the safety analyzer's test mains port.
Connect the enclosure test lead of the safety analyzer to the enclosure of the device under test, e.g. to
the equipotential connector. Refer to the documentation that accompanies the safety analyzer for
further details on how to set up the test.
Perform the following tests:

Sys(1): Equipment Leakage Current Test X1 ≤ 100 μA
(Normal Condition)
Sys(2): Equipment Leakage Current Test X2 ≤ 300 μA
(Single Fault Condition)
After the testing of the device as a standalone device and as part of the system, check that the resulting
values (without connection and with connection to the system) do not differ by more than ± 10% from
each other.
If the devices in the medical electrical system are connected to a multiple portable socket outlet the
resulting protective earth leakage current needs to be determined. All system components must be
connected to the multiple portable socket outlet and be switched on during this measurement.

Sys(3): Protective Earth Leakage Current of X3 ≤300 μA
Multiple Socket Outlets
Refer to the documentation that accompanies the safety analyzer for further details on how to set up
the test.

5 Performance Verification 5.4 After Testing and Repair
5.4 After Testing and Repair

Before handing the anesthesia machine over to the end-user, make sure it is configured appropriately.
See “8.5 Assembling the Machine” on page 258 for instructions on how to reassemble the machine.
After upgrades, ensure that the user receives the current revision of the user documentation.
5.5 Reporting of Test Results

Philips recommends that all test results are documented in accordance with local laws. Authorized
Philips personnel report test results back to Philips to add to the product development database.
Hospital personnel (biomedical engineers or technicians) do not need to report results to Philips, but
Philips recommends that they record and store the test results.
Table 5-3 on page 202 lists what to record after completing the tests in this chapter. Record the results
in the empty column in Table 5-3.
The following is a guide as to what your documentation should also include:
• Identification of the testing body (for example, which company or department carried out the tests).
• Name of the person(s) who performed the tests and the concluding evaluation.
• Identification of the device(s) being tested (serial number, etc.).
• Identification of the measurement equipment being used (manufacturer, calibration due date, etc.)
• Date of testing and of the concluding evaluation.
• A record of the actual values of the test results, and whether these values passed or failed the tests.
NOTE All tests described in this chapter are required after preventive maintenance. The tests required after
installation are specified in “3.9 Checking the Machine” on page 83; the tests required after repairs and
replacements are listed in the table in “8.16 Test Requirements After Repairs” on page 316, specified
according to the affected functional block or part.

5.5 Reporting of Test Results 5 Performance Verification
5.5.1 Test and Inspection Report

Table 5-1: Test Report
After installation
Testing Organization: ____________________________________ After annual service 1-year 2-year
3-year 4-year
Name of Tester: _________________________________________
After repair
Responsible Organization: Repaired Parts:
Device Under Test: Date of Manufacture:
Product Number: Serial Number:
Measurement Equipment:
Description Manufacturer Type/Model No. Serial No. Calibration due date
(MM/YY)
Pressure measuring
reference instrument
Flow measuring reference
instrument
Pressure leakage tester
Electrical safety analyzer
Digital Multimeter for

electrical testing
How to Fill Out the Report

• All the performance verification procedures from “5.2 Performance Verification Procedures” on
page 123 in the Service Guide are listed in Test or Inspection to Perform together with a
Description and Expected Test Result for each test.
• What to Record - specifies the accepted reporting values for each test:
– P = Passed: test passed without any modification.
– F = Failed: test failed and was NOT corrected. No recording of the failure value.
– P/X = Test passed. 1st test cycle result to be recorded. E.g. P/1.8
– N/A= Test is covering an option which is not installed in the DUT, and is therefore Not
Applicable. After corrective maintenance, test is not applicable for the repaired part.
• Actual Result - In the greyed out column, write only ONE value for passed or indicate for passed,
failed or not applicable.

5 Performance Verification 5.5 Reporting of Test Results
Table 5-2: Test and Inspection Matrix

Test or Inspection to Perform Description Expected Test Record the Results
Results
What to Actual Result
Record
(P, F, P/X, or
N/A)
“5.1.1 Visual Inspection” on Pass / Fail P or F
page 122
“5.2.1 Internal Pressure Manifold Regulator A X1 = 2.0 ± 0.2 P/X1 or F
Regulators Test” on page 125 (x100 kPa)
(29 ± 2.9 psig)
Manifold Regulator B X2 = 2.0 ± 0.2 P/X2 or F
(x100 kPa)
(29 ± 2.9 psig)
Manifold Regulator C If Rel. 1.0: X3 = 4.0 ± P/X3 or F
0.2(x100 kPa)
(58 ± 2.9 psig)
If Rel. 2.0: X3 = 3.0 ±
0.2 (x100 kPa)
(43.5 ± 2.9 psig)
Manifold Regulator D X4 = 2.0 ± 0.2 P/X4 or F
(x100 kPa)
(29 ± 2.9 psig)
Manifold Regulator E X5 = 3.5 ± 0.5 P/X5 or F
(x100 kPa)
(58 ± 2.9 psig)
Ventilator Regulator X6 = 3.0 ± 0.2 P/X6 or F
(x100 kPa)
(43.5 ± 2.9 psig)


Results
Record
(P, F, P/X, or
N/A)
“5.2.2 Yoke Tests” on page 127 Reduced Pressure @ yoke X1 = 4.5 ± 0.5 P/X1 or F
O2 (1) (x100 kPa)
(65.3 ± 7.3 psig)
High pressure leak @ yoke Pass / Fail P or F
O2 (1)
Reduced pressure leak @ Pass / Fail P or F
yoke O2 (1)
Reduced Pressure @ yoke X1 = 4.5 ± 0.5 P/X1 or F
O2 (2) (x100 kPa)
(65.3 ± 7.3 psig)
O2 (2)
yoke O2 (2)
Air
(x100 kPa)
(65.3 ± 7.3 psig)
Air
yoke Air
N2 O (x100 kPa)
(65.3 ± 7.3 psig)
N2 O
yoke N2O
“5.2.3 O2 Gas Supply Alarm If Rel. 1.0, alarm starts at: Pass / Fail P or F
Test” on page 130 2.5 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)
(36.3 ± 2.9 psig)
If Rel. 2.0, alarms starts at:
2.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)
(29 ± 2.9 psig)
“5.2.4 Air Gas Supply Alarm If Rel. 1.0, alarm starts at: Pass / Fail P or F
Test” on page 132 2.5 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)
(36.3 ± 2.9 psig)
If Rel. 2.0, alarm starts at:
2.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)
(29 ± 2.9 psig)


Results
Record
(P, F, P/X, or
N/A)
“5.2.5 N2O Gas Supply Alarm If Rel. 1.0, alarm starts at: Pass / Fail P or F
Test” on page 133 2.5 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)
(36.3 ± 2.9 psig)
If Rel. 2.0, alarm starts at:
2.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)
(29 ± 2.9 psig)
“5.2.6 High Pressure Leakage L(1): O2, Air and N2O Pass / Fail P or F
Tests” on page 135 Test
L(2): Air Selector Valve Pass / Fail P or F
Open Test
L(3): N2O Selector Valve Pass / Fail P or F
Open Test
“5.2.7 Dose System Leakage Test” Starting point 1: X1 = Pressure in step X1
on page 140 MPL opening pressure 3
MPL pressure drop over X1 has not dropped P or F
10 sec. more than 20 hPa
Starting point 2: X2 = Pressure in step X2
MPL pressure 7
MPL pressure after 10 sec. X3 = Pressure in step X3
8 (after 10 sec)
MPL pressure has not X4 = X2-X3 = <20 P/X4 or F
dropped more than 20 hPa hPa
after 10 sec.
“5.2.8 Integrated Patient Suction Measured MAX vacuum X1 = <-0.7 (x100 P/X1 or F
Test” on page 141 kPa)
(-10.2 psig)
(-525 mmHg)
Adjustable from 0 to Pass / Fail P or F
< -0.7 (x100 kPa)
(-10.2 psig)(-525 mmHg)
“5.2.9 Anesthesia Gas Scavenging The ball is visible Pass / Fail P or F
System (AGSS/WAGD) Test” on
page 142
“5.2.10 Running the Self-tests” VENT system leakage X1= < 50ml/min P/X1 or F
on page 144 with absorber
No error messages during Pass / Fail P or F
FULL test
VENT system leakage X2= < 50ml/min P/X2 or F
without absorber
No error messages during Pass / Fail P or F
LC test


Results
Record
(P, F, P/X, or
N/A)
“5.2.11 Auxiliary O2 Flowmeter Flow is 100% O2% Pass / Fail P or F
Test” on page 146 If Rel. 1.0: Emergency If Rel. 1.0: X1 = 5 ± P/X1 or F
flow @ 5 L/min 0.6 L/min
If Rel. 1.0: Emergency If Rel. 1.0: X2 = 14 ± P/X2 or F
If Rel. 2.0: Emergency If Rel. 2.0: X1 = 6± P/X1 or F
If Rel. 2.0: Emergency If Rel. 2.0: X2 = 12 ± P/X2 or F
“5.2.12 O2 Flush Test” on Flow is 100% O2 Pass / Fail P or F
page 147
O2 flow X1 = 35 - 50 L/min P/X1 or F
“5.2.13 Emergency Fresh Gas Flow is 100% O2% Pass / Fail P or F
Test” on page 148 O2 flow @ 5 L/min X1 = 5 ± 0.5 L/min P/X1 or F
O2 flow @ 15 L/min X2 = 15 ± 1.5 L/min P/X2 or F
“5.2.14 O2 Fresh Gas Flow Test” 0.3 L/min (on the screen) Pass / Fail P or F
on page 148 Flow is 100% O2 Pass / Fail P or F
O2 flow @ 10 L/min X1 = 10.0 ± 1 L/min P/X1 or F
O2 flow @ 5.0 L/min X2 = 5.0 ± 0.5 L/min P/X2 or F
O2 flow @ 2.5 L/min X3 = 2.5 ± 0.25 L/ P/X3 or F
min
O2 flow @ 0.3 L/min X4 = 0.3 ± 0.05 L/ P/X4 or F
min
“5.2.15 Air Fresh Gas Flow Test” 0.3 L/min (on the screen) Pass / Fail P or F
on page 150 Flow is 21% O2 Pass / Fail P or F
Air flow @ 10 L/min X1 = 10.0 ± 1 L/min P/X1 or F
Air flow @ 5.0 L/min X2 = 5.0 ± 0.5 L/min P/X2 or F
Air flow @ 2.5 L/min X3 = 2.5 ± 0.25 L/ P/X3 or F
min
Air flow @ 0.3 L/min X4 = 0.3 ± 0.05 L/ P/X4 or F
min


Results
Record
(P, F, P/X, or
N/A)
“5.2.16 N2O Fresh Gas Flow 0.3 L/min (on the screen) Pass / Fail P or F
Test” on page 151 O2 and N2O flow @ 10 L/ X1 = 50 ± 3% O2 P/X1 or F
min
O2 and N2O flow @ 5.0 X2 = 50 ± 3% O2 P/X2 or F
L/min
L/min
L/min
“5.2.17 Auxiliary Fresh Gas Test” Auxiliary outlet ON with Pass / Fail P/X1 or F
on page 152 fresh gas flow 10 L/min
Auxiliary outlet OFF with Pass / Fail P/X2 or F
fresh gas flow 10 L/min
“5.2.18 MPL Valve for IBS Test Flow at 2 L/min X1 = 90 - 100 P/X1 or F
for Rel. 2.0” on page 153 hPa(cmH2O)
“5.2.19 MPL Valve for Aux. Fresh Flow at 2 L/min X1 = 90 - 100 P/X1 or F
Gas Outlet Test” on page 154 hPa(cmH2O)
“5.2.20 MPL Valve for Ventilator Flow at 2 L/min X1 = 90 - 100 P/X1 or F
Test” on page 155 hPa(cmH2O)
“5.2.21 Drive Gas Selection and Rel. 1.0: Switch to Pass / Fail P or F
Drive Gas Alarm Test” on secondary drive gas at:
page 158 2.5 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)
(36.3 ± 2.9 psig)
Rel. 1.0: Ventilator drive Pass / Fail P or F
gas low alarm starts at:
2.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)
(29 ± 2.9 psig)
Rel. 1.0: Automatic Pass / Fail P or F
switchback to primary
drive gas
Rel. 2.0: Rel. 2.0: Switch Pass / Fail P or F
to secondary drive gas at:
2.0 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)
(29 ± 2.9 psig)
Rel. 2.0: Ventilator drive Pass / Fail P or F
gas low alarm starts at:
1.5 ± 0.2 (x100 kPa)
(21.8 ± 2.9 psig)
Automatic switchback to Pass / Fail P or F
primary drive gas


Results
Record
(P, F, P/X, or
N/A)
“5.2.22 Mains Alarm Test” on “Ventilator mains power Pass / Fail P or F
page 162 failure” and “Mains power
failure” alarms, and
normal function on
battery operation > 10
mins.
“5.2.23 IBS Switches Test” on Correct function of the Pass / Fail P or F
page 163 IBS and ABS switches
“5.2.24 Volume Measurement X1 = TV exp in step 8 X1
Zeroing Function Test” on X2 = TV exp in step 12 X2
page 164
X3= |X1 - X2| <= 20ml P/X3 or F
“5.2.25 Tidal Volume Test” on 20ml X1 = 20 ±10ml P/X1 or F
page 165 (neonatal)
50ml X2 = 50 ± 10ml P/X2 or F
100ml X3 = 100 ± 10ml P/X3 or F
200ml X4 = 200 ± 20ml P/X4 or F
500ml X5 = 500 ± 35ml P/X5 or F
700ml X6 = 700 ± 49ml P/X6 or F
“5.2.26 Ped. Volume X1 = 20ml (neonatal) X1= 20 ± 10ml X1
Measurement Test” on page 166 measured on the reference
instrument
X2 = 20ml (neonatal) X2= 20 ± 14ml X2
measured on screen of the
DUT
X3 = |X1-X2| X3= <= 10 ml P/X3 or F
X4 = 50ml measured on X4= 50 ± 10ml X4
the reference instrument
screen of the DUT
X6 = |X4-X5| X6= <= 10ml P/X6 or F
X7 = 100ml measured on X7= 100 ±10ml X7
X8 = 100ml measured on X8= 100 ±15ml X8
screen of the DUT
X9 = |X7-X8| X9= <= 10ml P/X9 or F
screen of the DUT
X12 = |X10-X11| X12= <= 20ml P/X12 or F


Results
Record
(P, F, P/X, or
N/A)
“5.2.27 Adult Volume X1 = 250ml measured on X1= 250 ± 25ml X1
Measurement Test” on page 168 the reference instrument
screen of the DUT
X3 = |X1-X2| X3= <= 55ml P/X3 or F
screen of the DUT
X6 = |X4-X5| X6= <= 55ml P/X6 or F
screen of the DUT
X9 = |X7-X8| X9= <= 75ml P/X9 or F


Results
Record
(P, F, P/X, or
N/A)
“5.2.28 Pressure Measurement Pressure @ 0
Test” on page 170 hPa(cmH2O):
X1 = 0 hPa(cmH2O X1= 0± 1 X1
measured on the reference hPa(cmH2O)
instrument
X2 = 0 hPa(cmH2O X2= = 0± 1 X2
measured on the screen of hPa(cmH2O)
the DUT
X3 = X1-X2 X3= 0± 1 P/X3 or F
hPa(cmH2O)
Pressure @ 10-20
hPa(cmH2O):
X4 = 10-20 hPa(cmH2O X4= 10-20 X4
instrument
X5 = 10-20 hPa(cmH2O X5= 10-20 X5
the DUT
X6 = X4-X5 X6= 0± 1 P/X6 or F
hPa(cmH2O)
Pressure @ 40-50
hPa(cmH2O):
X7 = 40-50 hPa(cmH2O X7= 40-50 X7
instrument
X8 = 40-50 hPa(cmH2O X8= 40-50 X8
the DUT
X9= X7-X8 X9= 0± 1 P/X9 or F
hPa(cmH2O)
Pressure @ 70-80
hPa(cmH2O):
X10 = 70-80 hPa(cmH2O X10= 70-80 X10
instrument
X11 = 70-80 hPa(cmH2O X11= 70-80 X11
measured on screen of the hPa(cmH2O)
DUT
X12= X10-X11 X12= 0± 1 P/X12 or F
hPa(cmH2O)


Results
Record
(P, F, P/X, or
N/A)
“5.2.29 PEEP Function Test” on PEEP @ 5 hPa(cmH2O) X1 = 5 ± 2 P/X1 or F
page 171 hPa(cmH2O)
Stable expiratory phase of Pass / Fail P or F
the graph
PEEP @ 10 hPa(cmH2O) X2 = 10 ± 2 P/X2 or F
hPa(cmH2O)
the graph
PEEP @ 20 hPa(cmH2O) X3 = 20 ± 2 P/X3 or
hPa(cmH2O) F
the graph
“5.2.30 PCV Function Test” on Pinsp @ 17 hPa(cmH2O) X1 = 20 ± 2 P/X1 or F
page 172 hPa(cmH2O)
Stable inspiratory phase of Pass or Fail P or F
the graph
Pinsp @ 27 hPa(cmH2O) X2 = 30 ± 2 P/X3 or F
hPa(cmH2O)
the graph
Pinsp @ 47 hPa(cmH2O) X3 = 50 ± 2 P/X3 or F
hPa(cmH2O)
the graph
“5.2.31 NPL Valve Test” on VAC flow X1= 4± 0.5 L/min X1
page 172 NPL opening pressure is Pass / Fail P or F
-5 to -7.5 hPa(cmH2O)
“5.2.32 System Pressure Alarm System Pressure Alarm Pass / Fail P or F
and Disconnection Alarm Test” starts when the difference
on page 175 in pressure in the
ventilator and the airway
exceeds 15 hPa (cmH20)
Disconnection Alarm
starts after 15 sec.
“5.2.33 High Pressure Alarm PEAK Pressure on the X1 = 15 ± 1 P/X1 or F
Test” on page 176 screen of the DUT hPa(cmH2O)
“5.2.34 O2 Fuel Cell Sensor Test” O2% in room air X1 = 21 ± 1% P/X1 or F
on page 176 O2% in O2 flow X2 = 100 ± 2% P/X2 or F


Results
Record
(P, F, P/X, or
N/A)
“5.2.35 Multigas Module Test” O2% in room air X1 = 21 ± 1% P/X1 or F
on page 176 Leak check Pass / Fail P or F
O2 % X2 = 42 - 49% P/X2 or F
N2O% X3 = 45 - 52% P/X3 or F
CO2% - X4 = 4.6 - 5.4% P/X4 or F
AA (ISO)% X5 = 1.3 - 1.7% P/X5 or F
“5.2.36 Fans Test” on page 178 Fans are running Pass / Fail P or F
“5.2.37 Auxiliary Power Outlets Voltage is present in all 4 Pass / Fail P or F
Test” on page 178 outlets
“5.2.38 SmartLog Test” on Check USB stick Pass / Fail P or F
page 179
“5.3.3 Electrical Safety Testing” S(1): Protective Earth Maximum impedance P/X1 or F
on page 185 Resistance Test (X1):
<= 300mOhms
S(2): Equipment Leakage Maximum leakage P/X2 or F
Current Test - Normal current (X2):
Condition <= 100 μA
S(3): Equipment Leakage Maximum leakage P/X3 or F
Current Test - Single Fault current (X3):
Condition <= 300 μA
“5.3.4 System Test” on page 188 Sys(1): Equipment Maximum leakage P/X1 or F
Leakage Current Test current (X1):
(Normal Condition) <= 100 μA
Sys(2): Equipment Maximum leakage P/X2 or F
Leakage Current Test current (X2):
(Single Fault Condition) <= 300 μA
Sys(3): Protective Earth Maximum leakage P/X3 or F
Leakage Current of current (X3):
Multiple Socket Outlets <= 300 μA

Table 5-3: Evaluation

Yes No
All tests passed or corrected
Device can stay in operation, but repair required at a later date
Device must be taken out of operation until repair and passed tests
Device cannot be repaired and must be taken our of operation
Notes:
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Next service before end of (MM/YYYY)

Name:
_______________________________________________________
Date/Signature: ____________________________________________________________________

5.6 Vaporizer Tests 5 Performance Verification
5.6 Vaporizer Tests

The following is a generic test setup to be used when performing spot check of vaporizers connected to
the anesthesia machine.
CAUTION Check calibration of vaporizers regularly using a proper gas indicator (e.g. refractometer or similar).
CAUTION Vaporizers should be serviced according to the manufacturer’s instructions by an authorized service
center.
CAUTION To ensure correct readings, before performing this procedure, the vaporizer(s) must have obtained
room temperature (approx. 21ºC / 69.8ºF)
When moving the vaporizer(s) from places with big temperature changes, they need to stabilize for
approx. 4 hours to obtain room temperature.
CAUTION AGSS/WAGD should always be connected and activated when using the machine with anesthetic
agents.
NOTE Refer to the manufacturer of the vaporizer’s documentation e.g. user manual or service manual for
specific test procedures, tolerances and recommended test/service intervals.
5.6.1 Leakage Test

This test verifies the leak tightness of the anesthesia machine with a vaporizer connected.
1 Perform LC Self-test, and note leakage value X1. See See “Running the Self-tests” on page 144.
2 Connect the vaporizer to the back bar of the machine.
3 Set the vaporizer concentration dial to half scale position.
4 Perform LC Self-test, and note leakage value X2. See “Running the Self-tests” on page 144.
5 Check that the difference between the measured leakage with and without vaporizer does not
exceed 25ml/min.
5.6.2 Vaporizer Output Concentration Test

This test verifies that the vaporizer output concentration is within specifications.
NOTE The vaporizer should always be verified against a calibrated agent analyzer e.g. Riken or similar. This
could be a pre-verified anesthesia gas module in the anesthesia machine or from a patient monitor.

5 Performance Verification 5.6 Vaporizer Tests
With the following test setup, perform a vaporizer output concentration test according to specifications
in the user or service documentation for the specific vaporizer.
1 Connect the Y-piece to the test adapter on the IBS and block the bag connection.
2 Connect a bacteria filter with a luer lock connection to the inspiratory port on the IBS.
3 Connect sample tube to bacteria filter with luer lock connection and to agent analyzer.
4 Activate AGSS/WAGD flow.

6 Set the APL valve to SP.

7 Set the O2 fresh gas flow to 4 L/min.

8 Check on the agent analyzer that the output concentration is within the specified tolerances of the
specific vaporizer, at set values of 1% and over, and at zero.

Table 5-4: Vaporizer Tests Report
Testing Organization: ____________________________ Spot check
Name of Tester: _________________________________

Responsible Organization: Vaporizer Type:
Device Under Test: Date of Manufacture:
Product Number: Serial Number:
Table 5-5: Test and Inspection Matrix

Results
Record
(P, F, P/X,
or N/A)
“5.6.1 Leakage Test” on Leakage value without Pass or Fail P or F
page 203 vaporizer (X1)
Leakage value with Pass or Fail P or F
vaporizer (X2)
Difference (Vaporizer leak) <= 25ml/min P/X
= |X1 – X2|
“5.6.2 Vaporizer Output Vaporizer output Pass or Fail P or F
Concentration Test” on concentration is within
page 203 manufacturer’s
specifications at set values
of 1% and over, and at
zero.

Table 5-6: Evaluation

Yes No
All tests passed
Device can stay in operation, but repair required at a later date
Device must be taken out of operation until repair and passed tests
Device cannot be repaired and must be taken our of operation
Notes:
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Next Spot Check:

Name:
_______________________________________________________
Date/Signature: ____________________________________________________________________


6
6Calibration
Calibration can be required after long-time normal use of the machine. Therefore corrective actions are
part of the annual service if performance verification measurements are out of limit.
Calibration can also be part of troubleshooting and after a repair.
Read the Prerequisites section below before starting any calibration.
6.1 Prerequisites
• All supplies that the machine is normally configured with, must be connected to wall outlets before
starting any of the calibration steps in this section.
• Before calibration can start, the following performance verification tests must be carried out:
– “5.1.1 Visual Inspection” on page 122
– “5.2.1 Internal Pressure Regulators Test” on page 125
– “5.2.6 High Pressure Leakage Tests” on page 135
– “5.2.10 Running the Self-tests” on page 144
• The calibration requires reference measuring instruments for:
– High pressure: 0-6x100 kPa (0-87 psig)
– Low pressure: -10 - +100 hPa(cmH2O)
– Flow: 0-100 L/min.
CAUTION The machine must be switched on for at least 30 min. before calibration is performed to ensure the
accuracy of the calibration. During at least 15 minutes of this time, it is recommended that the
machine be in VENT mode with 1 L/min O2 and Air fresh gas flow in order to activate the valves and
assure they reach normal working temperature. Remember to place a test lung on the Y-piece while the
machine is in VENT mode.

6 Calibration 6.2 Calibration Procedures
CAUTION All calibration of flow and pressure must be done according to STPD conditions (atmospheric pressure
of 1013 hPa(cmH2O) and temperature of 21ºC (69.8ºF)). The flow and pressure measuring reference
instruments must be able to convert the results to these conditions.
CAUTION When calibrating the patient flow sensor, it must be placed with the port labeled “PATIENT” facing
the flow measuring reference instrument.
6.1.1 Entering Calibration Menu

1 Activate Setup menu.
2 Select Service and enter the service engineer password (91-34-80).
3 Select Calibration.
NOTE Calibration can be cancelled at all times, by pressing Main screen.
6.2 Calibration Procedures

Calibration menu:
• “6.3 Calibrating the O2 Flow” on page 211
• “6.4 Calibrating the Air Flow” on page 212
• “6.5 Calibrating the N2O Flow” on page 214
• “6.6 Calibrating the O2 Inlet Pressure” on page 215
• “6.7 Calibrating the Air Inlet Pressure” on page 216
• “6.8 Calibrating the N2O Inlet Pressure” on page 217
• “6.9 Calibrating the Ventilator Inspiratory Flow” on page 219
• “6.10 Calibrating the Bag-in-Bottle and Patient Pressure” on page 223
• “6.11.1 Calibrating the Adult Patient Flow Sensor” on page 224
• “6.11.2 Calibrating the Ped. Patient Flow Sensor” on page 226
• “6.12 Calibrating the PEEP Valve” on page 227
• “6.13 Calibrating the Ventilator Temperature Compensation” on page 229
• “6.14 Calibrating the Gas module” on page 229
Other menus:
• “6.15 Calibrating the O2 Fuel-cell Sensor” on page 230

6.3 Calibrating the O2 Flow 6 Calibration
Mechanical calibration:
• “6.16.1 Calibrating the Automatic Drive Gas Selection” on page 232
• “6.16.2 Adjustment of Ventilator Drive Gas Low Alarm” on page 233
• “6.17 Calibrating the Internal Pressure Regulators” on page 235
• “6.18 Calibrating the Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System (AGSS/WAGD)” on page 236
6.3 Calibrating the O2 Flow

NOTE For flow calibration, the flow will automatically drop slowly, but you confirm the value of the actual
flow when the accuracy is within tolerances on the reference instrument.
1 Select O2 flow... to activate calibration of the O2 fresh gas flow sensor.

3 Activate the auxiliary fresh gas outlet and connect a flow measuring reference instrument to the
outlet.
4 Text “Check O2 flow is 0.0 L/min” appears on the screen.

Check on the reference instrument that flow is 0.00 L/min.
Press the control dial.
5 Text “Set O2 flow to 10.0 L/min” appears.
Adjust flow on the control dial until the reference instrument indicates 9.9-10.1 L/min.
6 Text “Redo calibration” appears.
Press the control dial to perform step 4 to step 5 again.
7 Repeat until the measured flow at step 5 is 9.9-10.1 L/min without adjusting on the control dial.
8 When text “Redo calibration” appears, press “Fresh Gas flow” on the screen to confirm the
calibration and continue.

6 Calibration 6.4 Calibrating the Air Flow
9 Text “Set O2 flow to 0.3 L/min” appears.

For each value in the following table, adjust flow on the control dial until the values on the
reference instrument are within tolerances. Press the control dial to confirm.
NOTE When calibrating at 0.3 L/min, it can seem that the flow is stuck at zero. This is not the case, and flow
should be increased by turning the control dial clockwise. If flow is increased >0.3 L/min, turn the dial
counter-clockwise until the accurate flow is achieved.
Calibration Accuracy
0.3 L/min 0.29-0.31 L/min
0.6 L/min 0.59-0.61 L/min
1.0 L/min 0.99-1.01 L/min
2.0 L/min 1.98-2.02 L/min
5.0 L/min 4.95-5.05 L/min
10 Text “Save calibration” appears.

Press the control dial to save the calibration.
11 Press Main Screen to exit.
12 After calibration, switch off the auxiliary fresh gas outlet and remove test equipment.
6.4 Calibrating the Air Flow

in the patient system (Air).
1 Select Air flow... to activate calibration of the Air fresh gas flow sensor.

6.4 Calibrating the Air Flow 6 Calibration
outlet.
4 Text “Check Air flow is 0.0 L/min” appears on the screen.

Check that flow is 0.00 L/min on reference instrument.
5 Text “Set Air flow to 10.0 L/min” appears.
8 When text “Redo calibration” appears, press “Fresh Gas flow” on the screen to continue.
9 Text “Set Air flow to 0.3 L/min” appears.
For each value below, adjust flow on the control dial until the reference instrument indicates the
expected result. Press the control dial to confirm.
0.3 L/min 0.29-0.31 L/min
0.6 L/min 0.59-0.61 L/min
1.0 L/min 0.99-1.01 L/min
2.0 L/min 1.98-2.02 L/min
5.0 L/min 4.95-5.05 L/min
10 Text »Save calibration« appears.


6 Calibration 6.5 Calibrating the N2O Flow
6.5 Calibrating the N2O Flow

CAUTION Measured gas for flow and volume on the reference instrument must correspond to the actual gas
delivered to the patient system (N2O).
1 Select N2O flow... to activate calibration of the N2O fresh gas flow sensor.
outlet.
NOTE Be sure to take the necessary precautionary measures for evacuation of the N2O gas flow.
4 Text “Check N2O flow is 0.0 L/min” appears on the screen.

Check that flow is 0.00 L/min on reference instrument.
5 Text “Set N2O flow to 10.0 L/min” appears.
8 When text “Redo calibration” appears, press “Fresh Gas flow” on the screen to continue.
9 Text “Set N2O flow to 0.3 L/min” appears.

6.6 Calibrating the O2 Inlet Pressure 6 Calibration
0.3 L/min 0.29-0.31 L/min
0.6 L/min 0.59-0.61 L/min
1.0 L/min 0.99-1.01 L/min
2.0 L/min 1.98-2.02 L/min
5.0 L/min 4.95-5.05 L/min

6.6 Calibrating the O2 Inlet Pressure

NOTE Air pressure can be used for calibration of the O2 inlet pressure sensor.
NOTE For Rel. 1.0 machines: you need to have 6.0x100kPa (87 psig) available in order to this calibration.
For Rel. 2.0 machines: you need to have 2.5x100kPa (36.3 psig) available in order to this calibration.
Before performing this calibration see “Prerequisites” on page 231 until step 3
1 Select O2 inlet press... to activate calibration of the O2 inlet pressure sensor.
outlet.
4 Text “Disconnect O2 supply” appears on the screen.

5 Disconnect O2 supply and wait until reference flow instrument indicates 0.0 L/min.
Press the control dial to confirm.

6 Calibration 6.7 Calibrating the Air Inlet Pressure
6 Text “Connect O2 supply. Adjust O2 pressure to 2.5 x100kPa” appears.

Connect O2 supply and adjust inlet pressure to 2.5 x100kPa (36.3 psig).
NOTE For Rel. 1.0 machines: Text “Connect O2 supply. Adjust O2 pressure to 6.0 x100kPa” appears.
Connect O2 supply and adjust inlet pressure to 6.0 x100kPa (87 psig).
For Rel. 2.0 machines: Text “Connect O2 supply. Adjust O2 pressure to 2.5 x100kPa” appears.
Connect O2 supply and adjust inlet pressure to 2.5x100kPa (36.3 psig).

Press the control dial to repeat from step 4 to step 6.
8 Repeat the steps twice.
9 Press “Fresh Gas flow” on the screen.
6.7 Calibrating the Air Inlet Pressure

NOTE O2 pressure can be used for calibration of the Air inlet pressure sensor.
1 Select Air inlet press... to activate calibration of the Air inlet pressure sensor.
outlet.

6.8 Calibrating the N2O Inlet Pressure 6 Calibration
4 Text “Disconnect Air supply” appears on the screen.

5 Disconnect Air supply and wait until reference flow instrument indicates 0.0 L/min.
6 Text “Connect Air supply. Adjust Air pressure to 2.5 x100kPa” appears.
Connect Air supply and adjust inlet pressure to 2.5 x100kPa (36.3 psig).
NOTE For Rel. 1.0 machines: Text “Connect Air supply. Adjust Air pressure to 6.0 x100kPa” appears.
Connect Air supply and adjust inlet pressure to 6.0 x100kPa (87 psig).
For Rel. 2.0 machines: Text “Connect Air supply. Adjust Air pressure to 2.5 x100kPa” appears.
Connect Air supply and adjust inlet pressure to 2.5 x100kPa (36.3 psig).

6.8 Calibrating the N2O Inlet Pressure

NOTE Air or O2 pressure can be used for calibration of the N2O inlet pressure sensor.
1 Select N2O inlet press... to activate calibration of the N2O inlet pressure sensor.

6 Calibration 6.8 Calibrating the N2O Inlet Pressure
outlet.
4 Text “Disconnect N2O supply” appears on the screen.

5 Disconnect N2O supply and wait until reference flow instrument indicates 0.0 L/min.
6 Text “Connect N2O supply. Adjust N2O pressure to 2.5 x100kPa” appears.
Connect N2O supply and adjust inlet pressure to 2.5 x100kPa (36.3 psig).
NOTE For Rel. 1.0 machines: Text “Connect N2O supply. Adjust N2O pressure to 6.0 x100kPa” appears.
Connect N2O supply and adjust inlet pressure to 6.0 x100kPa (87 psig).
For Rel. 2.0 machines: Text “Connect N2O supply. Adjust N2O pressure to 2.5 x100kPa” appears.
Connect N2O supply and adjust inlet pressure to 2.5 x100kPa (36.3 psig).


6.9 Calibrating the Ventilator Inspiratory Flow 6 Calibration
6.9 Calibrating the Ventilator Inspiratory Flow

If the drive gas is O2, or if the drivegas is Air and no flow sensor is installed, use “Calibrate the
ventilator inspiratory flow ONLY” on page -219
If the drivegas is Air and a volume sensor is installed, use “Calibrate BOTH the ventilator inspiratory
flow and the adult patient flow sensor” on page -220.
NOTE On the picture below the primary drive gas is configured as Air. If the primary drive gas was configured
as O2, the pressure switch would be located on the left side of the EGM manifold.
Pressure switch
NOTE For Rel. 1.0 machines, the primary drive gas is always Air.
Calibrate the ventilator inspiratory flow ONLY

If the default setting for flow sensor is No sensor connect the reference instrument as shown below:
1 Select Ventilator Insp. flow to calibrate the sensor that measures the inspiratory flow from the
ventilator to the BiB.
2 Remove bellows from the bag-in-bottle, and connect the flow measuring reference instrument to
the inspiration port of the integrated breathing system (IBS).

6 Calibration 6.9 Calibrating the Ventilator Inspiratory Flow
Calibrate BOTH the ventilator inspiratory flow and the adult patient flow
sensor
NOTE For Rel. 1.0 machines, the primary drive gas is always Air.
If the default setting for volume sensor is either At Exp cone or At Y-piece connect the reference
instrument as shown below:
1 Select Ventilator Insp. flow to calibrate the sensor that measures the inspiratory flow from the
ventilator to the Bag-in-Bottle (BiB).
2 Remove bellows from the bag-in-bottle, remount the bag, and connect the external adult patient
flow sensor to the inspiratory port of the IBS and then to flow measuring reference instrument.
NOTE To ensure correct measurements, the sample line must be disconnected from the flow sensor during
this calibration. Instead, mount a luer lock plug to the flow sensor.
Start calibration:
1 Mount a pressure measuring reference instrument on the test point on the valve block in the
ventilator.

6.9 Calibrating the Ventilator Inspiratory Flow 6 Calibration
2 Check on the reference instrument that the pressure is 2.8 - 3.2 (x100 kPa) (40.6 - 46.4 psig).
NOTE The ventilator automatically generates a flow, which makes adjustment possible.
3 If yes, disconnect the pressure measuring reference instrument and re-connect the vent.
connection.
For Rel. 1.0 machines: Perform step 4-6, otherwise go to step 7.
4 Check on the reference instrument that inspiratory flow is 78-82 L/min.
NOTE During calibration, the screen shows the inspiratory flow measured by the ventilator according to data
from last calibration and the electrical signal to the insp. valve as “PWM”. Ignore this and use only the
reference instrument.
5 If not, adjust screw on top of inspiratory valve on the pneumatic block inside the ventilator.

7 Check on the reference instrument that inspiratory flow is 0.0 L/min.
For each calibration value below, adjust flow on the control dial until the reference instrument
indicates the highest acceptable flow in the range.
Press the control dial to confirm and wait 10 secs.
Example
For Calibration value 25 L/min, adjust the flow to 25.1 L/min.
Press the control dial to confirm, and wait 10 seconds.
Continue to the next calibration value.
from last calibration and the electrical signal to the insp. valve as »PWM«. Ignore this and use only the

6 Calibration 6.9 Calibrating the Ventilator Inspiratory Flow
0.0 L/min 0.0 L/min
1.0 L/min 0.95-1.05 L/min
2.0 L/min 1.95-2.05 L/min
5.0 L/min 4.95-5.05 L/min
10.0 L/min 9.9-10.1 L/min
15.0 L/min 14.9-15.1 L/min
20.0 L/min 19.9-20.1 L/min
25.0 L/min 24.9-25.1 L/min
30.0 L/min 29.9-30.1 L/min
40.0 L/min 39.9-40.1 L/min
50.0 L/min 49.9-50.1 L/min
60.0 L/min 59.9-60.1 L/min
80.0 L/min 79.8-80.2 L/min

10 Mount bellows in the BiB chamber and remove test equipment.

6.10 Calibrating the Bag-in-Bottle and Patient Pressure 6 Calibration
6.10 Calibrating the Bag-in-Bottle and Patient

Pressure
1 Select BiB & Pat. pressure to calibrate the sensor that measures the pressure between chamber and
bellows in the bag-in-bottle system, and the sensor that measures the airway pressure in the patient
breathing system.
2 Assemble the integrated patient breathing system, incl. hoses and Y-piece, and connect the Y-piece
to pressure measuring reference instrument. Block the outlet of the reference instrument.
NOTE To ensure correct measurements, the sample line must be connected to the flow sensor during this
calibration.
3 Remove the bag-in-bottle (BiB) chamber and bellows.

4 Press the control dial to calibrate at 0 hPa(cmH2O).
NOTE During calibration, the BiB pressure and the patient breathing system pressure measured by the
ventilator according to data from last calibration, appears on the screen as “BiB” and “Pat.”. Ignore this
and use only the reference instrument
NOTE The BIB & Pat. pressures shown on the screen should be equal ± 1 hPa(cmH2O)
5 Remount only the BiB chamber and open fresh gas flow by turning the control dial until stable
pressure reading on the reference instrument is 80 hPa(cmH2O).
Press the control dial to calibrate at 80 hPa(cmH2O).

6 Calibration 6.11 Calibrating the Flow Sensors
6 Remove the BiB chamber.

Press the control dial to re-calibrate at 0 hPa(cmH2O).
7 Remount only the BiB chamber and open fresh gas flow by turning the control dial until stable
reading on the reference instrument is 80 hPa(cmH2O).
Press the control dial to re-calibrate at 80 hPa(cmH2O).
10 Mount bellows in the BiB chamber and remove test equipment.
6.11 Calibrating the Flow Sensors

6.11.1Calibrating the Adult Patient Flow Sensor
NOTE This procedure requires that Drive Gas is Air. If Drive Gas is O2, disconnect and run the ventilator for
1 minute.
1 Select Vol. sensor Adult to calibrate the external adult patient flow sensor.
2 Remove bellows from bag-in-bottle, remount the bag, and connect the external adult patient flow
sensor to the inspiratory port of the IBS and then to flow-measuring reference instrument.

6.11 Calibrating the Flow Sensors 6 Calibration
3 Press control dial to confirm.

For each calibration value below, adjust flow on the control dial until the reference instrument
indicates the highest acceptable flow in the range.
Press the control dial to confirm and wait 10 secs.
Example
Press the control dial to confirm and wait 10 seconds.
Within this time, the flow should be within the range of 24.9 to 25.1.
If yes, continue to the next calibration value.
If not, cancel the calibration by pressing the Main Screen, and restart the calibration.
0.0 L/min 0.0 L/min
1.0 L/min 0.95-1.05 L/min
2.0 L/min 1.95-2.05 L/min
5.0 L/min 4.95-5.05 L/min
10.0 L/min 9.9-10.1 L/min
15.0 L/min 14.9-15.1 L/min
20.0 L/min 19.9-20.1 L/min
25.0 L/min 24.9-25.1 L/min
30.0 L/min 29.9-30.1 L/min
40.0 L/min 39.9-40.1 L/min
50.0 L/min 49.9-50.1 L/min
60.0 L/min 59.9-60.1 L/min
80.0 L/min 79.8-80.2 L/min

6 After calibration, press Main Screen to exit.

6 Calibration 6.11 Calibrating the Flow Sensors
6.11.2Calibrating the Ped. Patient Flow Sensor

NOTE This procedure requires that Drive Gas is Air. If Drive Gas is O2, disconnect and run the ventilator for
1 minute.
1 Select Vol. sensor Ped. to calibrate the external pediatric patient flow sensor.
2 Remove bellows from bag-in-bottle, remount the chamber, and connect the external ped. patient
flow sensor to the inspiratory port of the IBS and then to flow measuring reference instrument.

from last calibration and the electrical signal to the insp. valve as “PWM”. Ignore this and use only the

6.12 Calibrating the PEEP Valve 6 Calibration
Example
Press the control dial to confirm and wait 10 seconds.
Within this time, the flow should be within the range of 24.9 to 25.1.
If yes, continue to the next calibration value.
If not, cancel the calibration by pressing the Main Screen, and restart the calibration.
0.0 L/min 0.0 L/min
1.0 L/min 0.95-1.05 L/min
2.0 L/min 1.95-2.05 L/min
4.0 L/min 3.95-4.05 L/min
7.0 L/min 6.9-7.1 L/min
10.0 L/min 9.9-10.1 L/min
15.0 L/min 14.9-15.1 L/min
20.0 L/min 19.9-20.1 L/min
25.0 L/min 24.9-25.1 L/min
30.0 L/min 29.9-30.1 L/min
35.0 L/min 34.9-35.1 L/min

6 After calibration, press Main Screen to exit.
6.12 Calibrating the PEEP Valve

Before the characteristics of the PEEP valve can be calibrated, the ventilator insp. flow and the
pediatric flow sensor must be calibrated first (see “6.9 Calibrating the Ventilator Inspiratory Flow” on
page 219 and “6.11.2 Calibrating the Ped. Patient Flow Sensor” on page 226).
1 Select PEEP valve to calibrate the PEEP valve in the ventilator.

6 Calibration 6.12 Calibrating the PEEP Valve
2 Remove insp. and exp. hoses from the IBS.

Remove bellows in BiB and mount BiB chamber. Place the pediatric flow sensor on insp. cone of
the IBS.

4 The PEEP valve is now warming up quickly during a 4 min. period.
During this period, the temperature of the PEEP valve coil must be measured, using an infrared
temperature sensor. Point the sensor at the middle of the coil as indicated by the yellow circle in the
picture below.
If the temperature of the coil reaches 35-40OC before the 4 min, press the control dial to start next
calibration step.
5 The PEEP valve temperature stabilizes during the next 5 min. period.
When the 5 min. period has ended, the next calibration step activates automatically.
6 The PEEP valve is now warming up slowly during a period of max. 20 minutes.
During this period, the temperature of the PEEP valve coil must be measured, using an infrared
temperature sensor.
When the temperature of the coil has reached 37-43ºC (98.6ºF- 109.4ºF), press the control dial to
start next calibration step.
NOTE Calibration is automatically cancelled if control dial is not pressed within 20 min.

6.13 Calibrating the Ventilator Temperature Compensation 6 Calibration
NOTE If the valve gets too hot, then cancel the calibration by pressing Main Screen and wait until
temperature of the valve coil is below 30ºC (86ºF). Then restart the calibration.
7 The ventilator verifies the characteristics of the PEEP valve.

“Difference flow” appears on the screen signalling that the PEEP valve must be adjusted.
8 Adjust the screw on top of the PEEP valve on the ventilator manifold, until “Difference flow” is
0.0 L/min.
If the flow is too high -> turn clockwise.

If the flow is too low -> turn counter clockwise.
9 Press the control dial to confirm and the verification restarts automatically. When the valve
characteristics are within the limits, a confirmation message appears on the screen
10 Press the control dial to finish the PEEP valve calibration and then press Main Screen.
11 After calibration, remove test equipment and mount bellows and hoses.
6.13 Calibrating the Ventilator Temperature

Compensation
The Vent. temp. comp. is for definition of the temperature characteristics of the pressure sensors used
in the ventilator.
This calibration cannot be performed in the field, as it requires specific control of room temperature
for the electronic box of the ventilator.
6.14 Calibrating the Gas module

Select Gas module... to see how many hours the machine has been in use, and how many hours the
pump has been running.
Select Leak check in order to perform leakage check of the gas module (see “5.2.35 Multigas Module
Test” on page 176).

6 Calibration 6.15 Calibrating the O2 Fuel-cell Sensor
6.15 Calibrating the O2 Fuel-cell Sensor

NOTE O2% calibration is only available if an external O2 fuel-cell sensor is installed instead of an
integrated multigas module.
Air available (Air carrier gas = enable)

1 In Setup menu, select O2% Calibration.
2 Place the O2 fuel-cell sensor on the breathing system's INSP. port, including patient hoses. The
Y-piece must open to ambient air. Press the control dial to confirm.
3 The electronic gas mixer automatically sets the fresh gas flow to 10 L/min Air. The machine
waits until the measured O2% has stabilized, and then proceeds to the next step in the
calibration.
4 The electronic gas mixer automatically shuts off the Air flow and then sets the fresh gas flow to
10 L/min O2. The machine waits until the measured O2% has stabilized, and then proceeds to
the next step in the calibration.
5 Press the control dial to save the calibration.
6 If calibration fails, see “Table 7-13: O2 Fuel Cell Sensor” on page 248 in Troubleshooting.
7 Press the control dial to exit the calibration.
Air not available (Air carrier gas = disable)

If Air is not available, use the following procedure:
1 In Setup menu, select O2% Calibration.
2 Place the O2 fuel-cell sensor in ambient air.
3 The machine waits until the measured O2% has stabilized at 21%, and then proceeds to the next
step in the calibration.
4 Place the O2 sensor on the breathing system's INSP. port, including patient hoses. The Y-piece
must open to ambient air. Press the control dial to confirm.
5 The machine waits until the measured O2% has stabilized at 100%, and then proceeds to the next
step in the calibration.
6 Press the control dial to save the calibration.
7 If calibration fails, see “Table 7-13: O2 Fuel Cell Sensor” on page 248 in Troubleshooting.
8 Press the control dial to exit the calibration.

6.16 Calibrating the Drive Gas Selection and Drive gas Low Alarm 6 Calibration
6.16 Calibrating the Drive Gas Selection and Drive

gas Low Alarm
Prerequisites
In order to do these calibrations you need to be able to reduce the inlet pressure for the primary drive
gas (O2 or Air)A. This can be done by using the Philips PLT-01 tester.
The PLT-01 Leakage Tester can be mounted on a rail e.g. the side rail on the table top on the
anesthesia machine.
Push
tester.
2 Set switch on leakage tester to Inlet Regulator.

4 Adjust the Inlet Regulator to give a pressure of > 3 (x100 kPa) (44 psig), measured on TP-1.
A. For Rel. 1.0 machines: The primary drive gas can only be Air.

6 Calibration 6.16 Calibrating the Drive Gas Selection and Drive gas Low Alarm
5 Connect test adapter to the inlet for the primary drive gas (O2 or Air)A of the machine, and mount
blind plugs on the test adapters unused connectors.
A B
A) If the primary drive gas is Air. B) If the primary drive gas is O2.
NOTE A Test adapter is available for NIST and DISS inlets. If there is mounted adapters for AFNOR or SIS
hoses on the NIST inlets, remove the inlet adapter for Air in order to connect the test adapter for
NIST.
6 Connect the test hose between tester and test adapter.
6.16.1Calibrating the Automatic Drive Gas Selection

5 Use the Inlet Regulator on the PLT tester to reduce the primary drive gas (O2 or Air)A supply
pressure:
Rel. 1.0 machines: set to 2.0 (x100 kPa) (29 psig)

Rel. 2.0 machines: set to 2.5 (x100 kPa) (36.3 psig)

6.16 Calibrating the Drive Gas Selection and Drive gas Low Alarm 6 Calibration
6 During inspiration, turn the adjustment screw on top of the pressure switch on the EGM
manifold, until the drive gas selector valve switches to the secondary drive gas (with a click).
7 Adjust the primary drive gas (O2 or Air)A supply pressure:
Rel. 1.0 machines set to 2.5 (x100 kPa) (36.3 psig)

Rel. 2.0 machines set to 3.0 (x100kPa) (43.5 psig)
Check that the drive gas selector valve switches back to the primary drive gas (with a click).
8 If not, adjust the pressure switch again during inspiration, until the drive gas selector valve switches
back to the primary drive gas.
9 Repeat step 5 to step 8 until both calibrations have passed successfully without any adjustments.
10 Set status to STBY and remove the test equipment.
6.16.2Adjustment of Ventilator Drive Gas Low Alarm


6 Calibration 6.16 Calibrating the Drive Gas Selection and Drive gas Low Alarm
5 Disconnect the pressure switch cable on the power management board (P19).
6 Use the Inlet Regulator on the PLT tester to reduce the primary drive gas (O2 or Air)A supply
pressure:
Rel. 1.0 machines set to 2.0 (x100kPa) (29 psig)

Rel. 2.0 machines set to 1.5(x100 kPa) (21.8 psig)
7 During inspiration, turn the adjustment screw on top of the pressure switch on the ventilator
manifold in a counterclockwise direction, until the “Ventilator drive gas low” alarm starts.
Release 1 Release 2
8 Adjust the primary drive gas (O2 or Air)A supply pressure:

For a higher pressure setting-> turn clockwise.

For a lower pressure setting -> turn counter clockwise.
9 If not, adjust the pressure switch by turning clockwise during inspiration, until the “Ventilator
drive gas low” alarm stops.
10 Repeat step 6 to step 9 until both calibrations have passed successfully without any adjustments.
11 After calibration, reconnect the pressure switch cable on the power management board (P19).
12 Set status to STBY and remove the test equipment.

6.17 Calibrating the Internal Pressure Regulators 6 Calibration
6.17 Calibrating the Internal Pressure Regulators

EGM Manifold
1 Release the lock-nut.
2 Using a 1/8” allen key, adjust the regulators to the correct value.
See section “5.2.1 Internal Pressure Regulators Test” on page 125 in Performance Verification.
3 Lock the nut.
4 Check that the pressure is stable after adjustment, and does not rise slowly.
If the pressure is too high -> turn clockwise.

If the pressure is too low -> turn counter clockwise.
Ventilator
1 Release the lock-nut.
2 Using a 5mm allen key, adjust the regulator to the correct value.
See section “5.2.1 Internal Pressure Regulators Test” on page 125 in Performance Verification.
3 Lock the nut.
4 Check that the pressure is stable after adjustment, and does not rise slowly.

6 Calibration 6.18 Calibrating the Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System (AGSS/WAGD)
6.18 Calibrating the Anesthesia Gas Scavenging

System (AGSS/WAGD)
CAUTION As this test is dependent of the resistance in the hospitals central scavenging system, this procedure
must be performed in the room where the machine is used, with the machine connected to the AGSS/
WAGD wall connector.
Prerequisites
1 Connect a 2L respiration bag to the Y-piece..
2 Start the ventilator with the following settings:.
3 Set a fresh gas flow of 5 L/min.

6.18 Calibrating the Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System (AGSS/WAGD) 6 Calibration
4 Activate the AGSS/WAGD flow..
Rel. 1.0 machine Rel. 2.0 machine
6.18.1Calibrating the Active AGSS/WAGD (Option # C11)
NOTE For Rel. 2.0 machines: Use the step below...
1 Adjust the flow resistor on the AGSS/WAGD ejector unit until the ball in the flow marker is visible
in the clear area of the flowmarker.
2 Unlock the thumb nut, and adjust the screw.
Lock
Adjust
3 After adjustment, lock the thumb nut.
NOTE For Rel. 1.0 machines: Use the step below...

6 Calibration 6.18 Calibrating the Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System (AGSS/WAGD)
1 Use a 3 mm Allen key to adjust.
6.18.2Calibrating the Passive AGSS/WAGD (Option # C10)

This procedure uses an external flow restrictor.
1 Disconnect the AGSS (WAGD) hose from the wall connection.
2 Disconnect the AGSS (WAGD) hose from the AX700 AGSS (WAGD) outlet.
3 Connected the AGSS (WAGD) flow restrictor (PN 989803194321) to the AX700 AGSS
(WAGD) outlet.
4 Connect the AGSS (WAGD) hose to the AGSS (WAGD) flow restrictor.
5 Connect the AGSS (WAGD) hose to the wall connection.
6 Adjust the AGSS (WAGD) flow restrictor until the flow marker is visible in the clear area of the
flow marker (25 - 40 L/min).
NOTE For more information, see the instructions enclosed with the flow restrictor.

7
7Troubleshooting
This section explains how to troubleshoot the machine if issues arise. Irregularities can be found during
preventive maintenance or reported as an issue from the field. Links to tables that list possible machine
difficulties and symptoms are supplied, along with probable causes, and recommended actions to
correct the difficulty.
7.1 How To Use This Section

Use this section in conjunction with “9 Service Parts and Tools” on page 323 for the ordering
numbers. To remove and replace a part you suspect is defective, follow the instructions in “8 Repair”
on page 253 or “4 Maintenance” on page 87.
“2 Theory of Operation” on page 21 offers information on how the machine functions.
7.2 Who Should Perform Repairs

Only qualified service personnel (biomedical engineers or technicians) should open the machine
housing, remove and replace components, or make adjustments. If your medical facility does not have
qualified service personnel, contact Philips’ Response Center or your local Philips representative.
7.3 Version Check

Some troubleshooting tasks may require that you identify the software versions of your machine. You
can find the software revisions along with other information in the machines versions screen:
1 Enter the Service menu.
2 Select Versions.
3 Note all relevant information.

7 Troubleshooting 7.4 Troubleshooting Guide
7.4 Troubleshooting Guide

Problems with the machine are separated into the categories indicated in the following sections and
tables:
• “7.4.1 Checks for Obvious Problems” on page 240.
• “7.4.2 Checks Before Opening the Machine” on page 240
• “7.4.3 Troubleshooting Functional Blocks” on page 241
• “7.4.4 Alarms Troubleshooting” on page 249
• “7.4.5 SmartLog Troubleshooting” on page 249
Taking the recommended actions discussed in this section will correct the majority of problems you
may encounter. However, problems not covered here can be resolved by calling Philips Response
Center or your local representative.
7.4.1 Checks for Obvious Problems

When first troubleshooting the machine, check for obvious problems by answering basic questions
such as the following:
1 Is the power switch turned on?
2 Is the battery adequately charged?
3 Is the AC power cord connected to the machine and plugged into an AC outlet?
4 Are all supplies incl. gases, VAC and AGSS/WAGD connected to the machine and plugged into
the respective outlets?
5 See also Appendix A & B in the IntelliSave AX700 Instructions for Use for a guide to Alarms &
Messages and Self-test Messages.
7.4.2 Checks Before Opening the Machine

You can isolate many problems by observing indicators on the machine: carefully observe the initial
self-test, and by consulting Appendix A and B in the IntelliSave AX700 Instructions for Use, before it is
necessary to open the machine.
Checks with the Machine switched Off

• AGSS/WAGD ON/OFF switch.
– Flow marker visible.
• Emergency O2 flowmeter, on/off, and adjustment.
– Flowmeter ball is floating.
• Patient suction, max and adjustment.
– Pressure gauge should indicate suction.

7.4 Troubleshooting Guide 7 Troubleshooting
Initial Boot Sequence

The table below describes the regular initial boot sequence of the machine and its components. For
these steps it is assumed that the machine is powered correctly. This is indicated by the green Power
On LED in the ON/OFF switch.
Time (sec.) Event

after Power
On
0 When the Power ON/OFF switch is pressed, the LED switches on immediately.
3 Test sound is issued.
12 The main screen appears.
16 The text “Gas module warming up” appears on the screen.
32 The blue “STBY” field becomes black.
42 The screen flickers shortly and the pressure graph begins to appear.
58 Self-test starts, touch screen is functional.
If the boot sequence does not proceed as described above, consult “Table 7-1: Boot Sequence Failures”
on page 242.
7.4.3 Troubleshooting Functional Blocks

The following tables list troubleshooting activities sorted according to symptoms.
For electrical block diagrams, and a detailed pneumatic schematic to help troubleshooting, see
“Electronics System Wiring Diagram- Top Level” on page 439.
NOTE Be sure to check all cable connections within the machine before proceeding to further
troubleshooting.
The most common problems in anesthesia machines are leaks. In order to locate a leak there are some
guidelines to be followed.
1 Locate the gas that is leaking (normally only one gas is leaking in the high pressure and dose
section).
2 Locate the leaking section.
A very useful aid in locating leaks is leak-finder spray.
WARNING Avoid spraying leak-finder spray on electrical or electronic wires and components.
Maximum allowable leaks:
High pressure section 25 ml/min. (each gas)

Dose section 50 ml/min.
Patient system 100 ml/min.

NOTE These values are absolute max. values, normally the actual leaks will be much less than these values, or
no leaks at all.
How to use the Troubleshooting tables

The possible causes of failure and the remedies listed in the troubleshooting tables should be checked
and performed in the order they appear in the tables. Always move on to the next symptom until the
problem is solved.
Table 7-1: Boot Sequence Failures
Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action

ON/OFF switch AC Connection not ok. Check that the mains switch is ON, AC-
LED does not Mains are powered and the power cord is
light up when it ok and connected.
is activated. Replace fuses according to “8.9 Replacing
Mains fuses, or fuses on the power
management board defective. the Power Management Board” on
page 273.
ON/OFF switch is defective. Replace ON/OFF switch.
Power management board defective. Exchange power management board.
Self-test is An active system alarm appeared during Read alarm message on the screen, and
bypassed after startup. refer to “Alarms troubleshooting”.
startup.
When troubleshooting power-up and battery operation problems, at can also be a help to check the
LED status indicators on the Power Management Board.
Table 7-2: LED indicators on Power Management board
D34 D31
D42
D33
D36
LED no. Color Description

D34 Green Rectified 34V AC supply from the transformer is active
D36 Green Battery Charger Output is active
D31 Green 12V DC supply to the EGM is active
(OFF when the machine is in STBY/OFF)

LED no. Color Description

D33 Red 29V DC supply is active
D42 Red 29V DC supply is NOT active
(Should be OFF when the machine is switched ON)
Table 7-3: Touch Operation not functioning

Touch Screen not Touch PCB cable not connected. Check connectors in both ends, and
functioning. reconnect cable.
Touch PCB defective. Replace Touch PCB.
EGM Main board defective. Exchange EGM.
If the touch operation is not functioning, you can still use the machine with manual ventilation. In this
situation, activate the Emergency O2. If the machine was in VENT status when the error occurred, this
will set the status back to MAN.
Table 7-4: Mains Power

Mains power failure. Mains switch turned off. Check that the mains switch is turned on.
Fuse blown in mains power inlet. Check fuses in the mains power inlet.
Fuse blown on Power Check fuses on the Power Management
Management Board. Board.
Ventilator mains power Fuse F21 is blown on the Power Check fuse F21 on the Power
failure. Management Board. Management Board.
Ventilator power caber cable Check Ventilator power cable.
between the Power Management
Board and Ventilator is
disconnected.
Table 7-5: Battery related problems

EGM battery low. The EGM battery is discharged. Charge EGM battery by turning on the
Mains switch.
The EGM battery is damaged or Replace EGM battery.
worn out.
Ventilator battery low. The ventilator battery is Charge Ventilator battery by turning on
discharged. the machine.
The Ventilator battery is damaged Replace Ventilator battery.
or worn out.

Table 7-6: High pressure, supply and drive gas O2/Air/N20

Usually only one gas will leak at a time. Perform the high pressure leak test on one gas at a time by
blocking the other gases at the test adapter. Once you find the leaking gas, you can further decide the
path of that gas e.g. by using a leak-finder spray to verify the leaking component.
Yokes
Large pressure drop at Inlet filter for the yoke is blocked. Change inlet filter and gasket.
normal flow.
Zero or wrong pressure High pressure gauges. Change pressure gauge.
displayed, pointer does
not show “0” at no
pressure.
Too Low pressure. Reduction valve adjustment is Replace the yoke.
Too High pressure. incorrect.
Reduced pressure Leakage in pressure regulator
increases -(internal
leakages).
High pressure leakage test Dust or metal parings present at
is OOR when there is the valve or in the yoke pressure
NO cylinder attached to regulator will cause this kind of
yoke leakage..
If that’s the case, they will most
likely be present in the one-way
valve for the reduced pressure as
well.
Central supply gases and ventilator drive gas
Leaks in high pressure Pressure regulator(s) are leaking. Replace reduction valve cartridge.
section Pressure regulator on ventilator Rel. 1.0: Repair with reduction valve
manifold leaking. repair kit.
Rel. 2.0: Replace valve cartridge
AGSS/WAGD ON/OFF valve Replace AGSS/WAGD flow marker
leaking. holder
O2 flush valve leaking. Replace O2 flush valve.
O2 flowmeter leaking. Replace O2 flowmeter.
Air leakage test fails in “ Leakage from Air selector valve on Replace Air selector valve.
L(2): Air Selector Valve the EGM manifold.
Open Test” on page 137.
N2O leakage test fails in “ Leakage from N2O selector valve Replace N2O selector valve.
L(3): N2O Selector Valve on the EGM manifold.
Open Test” on page 138.

High whistling sound Malfunction in pressure regulator Repair with reduction valve repair kit.
from the ventilator on the ventilator pneumatic
during inspiration. The manifold.
higher tidal volume, the
higher sound.
Large pressure drops Reduced pressure on the Adjust pressure regulators until pressure is
when ventilating with a pneumatic manifold, and/or within limits.
high inspiratory flow ventilator manifold is too low.
(high set TV, PCV, and Blocked inlet filter in NIST Ensure that the gases from the central
PRVT modes). manifold. outlet comply with the required quality,
Or it is not possible to and replace inlet filters.
calibrate ventilator owing
to too low pressure.
Too Low pressure. Reduction valve adjustment is Adjust pressure regulator(s) until pressure
incorrect. is within limits.
Too High pressure.
Reduced pressure Leakage in pressure regulator Replace reduction valve repair kit
increases -(internal
leakages).
Table 7-7: Dose System

You can troubleshoot by excluding sections or components from the circuit one by one. Also use a
leak-finder spray to verify the leaking component.
General
Leakage from back bar Back bar valve leaking. Replace back bar valve.
with no vaporizer
connected.
Leakage from back bar O-rings on the back bar leaking. Replace O-rings.
with vaporizer connected.
Leakage from back bar Lock on vaporizer. Change vaporizer and consult a
because vaporizer is biomedical engineer or technician.
incorrectly connected to
Lock spring on back bar damaged. Replace lock spring.
the back bar.
No fresh gas is led to Leakage from the negative pressure Replace negative pressure relieve valve.
either the AUX fresh gas relieve valve.
outlet or the patient
system.
Emergency Fresh Gas Flow
Information does not The micro switch or cable Replace ON/OFF switch.
appear on the screen. connection to the EGM is
defective.

The flowmeter does not The ON/OFF switch for Replace ON/OFF switch.
show any activity at all. emergency freshgas flow is
defective.
The flow is out of limit Flowmeter defective Replace the flowmeter
Table 7-8: AGSS/WAGD

Ball not visible/outside Too big resistance at the AGSS/ Check pressure to ejector
clear area in the flow WAGD outlet connector, due to (4.25 ± 0.25 (x100 kPa) 61.6 ± 3.6 psig).
marker. too long or too narrow tubing from Adjust AGSS/WAGD ejector.
outlet to wall/column connection.
Flow too high. Hospital scavenging See “Calibrating the Passive AGSS/
system generates too high vacuum WAGD (Option # C10)” on page 238.
flow.
Flow too low. Replace flow marker.
Check that the plug is mounted on the
AUX AGSS cone on back of the machine.
Adjust AGSS/WAGD ejector.
Reservoir blocked. Check, and clean reservoir inlet (rear left
side profile).
Replace reservoir tubing and clean inlet
opening.
Table 7-9: Integrated Breathing System (IBS)

Bellows penetrated or Bellows has been issued to an Change the bellows.
deformed. incorrect washing procedure, or
other mishandling.
Bellows is blown up in Cover for spill valve is incorrectly Ensure that the cover is correctly mounted
the self-test or during mounted. and tightened.
inspiration. Spill valve is incorrectly mounted Ensure that the spill valve is correctly
(upside down). mounted. If damaged, replace membrane.
No alarm message Micro switch for absorber Check cable, connector and micro switch.
appears when absorber defective.
Replace if defective.
has been disconnected
more than 20 sec.
No alarm when IBS is Faulty micro switch, cable or Check cable, connector and micro switch.
unlocked from the base. connector.
Replace if defective.


Leakage when absorber is Absorber connections dry. Apply oxygen compatible grease on
mounted. absorber connections.
Leaking absorber valves. Replace absorber valves (B & C valves).
Leaking absorber. Replace absorber.
Leakage when absorber is Leaking absorber valves. Replace absorber valves (B & C valves).
not mounted.
Table 7-10: Integrated Patient Suction (VAC/pressure regulated)

Adjustment not working. VAC regulator defective. Replace VAC regulator.
Pressure gauge suction Filters in suction unit are blocked. Replace filters.
too weak.
Suction unit defective. Replace suction unit located in the
ventilator.
VAC regulator defective. Replace VAC regulator.
No suction at all after The ON/OFF switch defective. Replace ON/OFF switch.
activation.
Table 7-11: O2 Flush

No flow. No main supply. Check the O2 supply.
Leakage in O2 high pressure Correct leakage, see “Table 7-6: High
section. pressure, supply and drive gas O2/Air/
N20” on page 244.
Out of limits. O2 flush unit defective. Replace the O2 flush unit.
Table 7-12: Multigas module

Leak check fail. Water trap is leaking. Replace water trap.
Leaking O-rings in the water trap Replace O-rings.
receptacle.
Interface between water trap and
water trap receptacle is leaking. Replace water trap receptacle.
Internal leak in the sample line.
Occlusion or sample flow Blockage in the sample flow or Replace water trap and sample line.
errors. exhaust line. Replace water trap receptacle incl. hoses.
Exchange gas module.


Gas module out of order. No power supply to gas module. Check and if needed replace F2 on Power
management board.
Replace Gas module power cable.
Exchange Power management board.
Communication error between Check or replace communication cable
EGM and Gas module. between EGM and gas module.
In the installation submenu Gas
measurement, Gas module has
erroneously been set to Andros.
Correct, by setting back to Artema, O2
fuel cell ON or OFF, and restart.
Gas module defective. Exchange gas module.
Gas concentration out of O-ring in water trap is misplaced, Replace water trap.
limit. so room air will be drawn in to the
sample line.
Servomex O2 sensor or AION Exchange gas module.
module in the gas module is out of
calibration.
Table 7-13: O2 Fuel Cell Sensor

Measurement value after No, or bad connection between O2 Check external O2 sensor cable and its
calibration is 0 (zero) or fuel sensor and E-box in the connections in both ends.
230 % O2. ventilator. Check internal O2 sensor cable between
the machines rear side O2 sensor
connector and the E-box in the ventilator.
O2 fuel sensor is worn out/ Replace O2 fuel sensor.
defective.
Measurement out of O2 fuel sensor is worn out / Replace O2 fuel sensor.
limits after calibration. defective.

7.4.4 Alarms Troubleshooting

Descriptions of each alarm can be found in the IntelliSave AX700 Instructions for Use Appendix A &
B.
7.4.5 SmartLog Troubleshooting

The SmartLog logs all settings, alarm strings and diagnostic data from the system every 2 seconds in a
number of files.
To extract these data you need a USB stick with a folder called diagnostic_data.
NOTE If the software version of the SmartLog is 1.52 the USB stick needs to be named PHILIPS.
NOTE Philips recommend using a USB memory stick with a built-in LED that indicates when the USB is
recognized by the system, and when there is communication to/from the USB.
1 On a USB stick, create two new folders named ‘configuration’ and ‘diagnostic_data’.
2 Insert the USB stick in the SmartLog USB port on the rear side of the machine
3 Wait one minute for the SmartLog to detect the USB stick.
The USB stick will now contain the following
Trend and alarm log files

The date and time stamp in the file name is the date and time when the file was created. ‘XX’ in the file
name is a counted number of the log file.
A new set of trend and alarm log files is created when in the following situations:
• A selftest is completed.
• The function Reset settings and data is selected in the Setup Menu.
• The function End Case is selected and confirmed by the user.
The following data can be exported from the Trend Menu using Export log files.
Wait one minute for the files to be transferred to the USB stick.

NOTE If EGM software version is 7.1.2 go to Setup Menu > Service… > Miscellaneous, select Dump logfiles
and wait 1 minute.
Filea Description Limitation

YYYY-MM-DD_tt.mm.ss_logXX.txt Comma separated text file with all raw data 50 cases
for a specific case.
YYYY-MM-DD_tt.mm.ss_logXX.pdf Contains all data from the trend menu for a 50 cases
specific case.
YYYY-MM- Contains all data from the alarm log from a 50 cases
DD_tt.mm.ss_logXX_alarms.pdf specific case.
YYYY-MM- Contains a selftest report from the specific 50 cases
DD_tt.mm.ss_logXX_selftest.pdf case.
syslog.txt Comma separated text file with raw data for Accumulative
all high priority alarms issued on the device. (no limit)
old_syslog.txt The previous version of syslog.txt (rolling log Accumulative
file concept). (no limit)
a.File name syntax can vary depending on SmartLog software revision.
The files are all located in the root folder of USB memory stick, for example D:\ if D is the drive letter
of the USB memory stick
Diagnostic data
The following files can be exported at all times, when mains power is connected to the machine.
NOTE The following data is only available on SmartLog version 2.0 build 52 or higher.
File Description Limitation Location

installed_version.txt This file contains the exact Accumulative D:\configuration
current version of the (no limit)
SmartLog software installed.
upgrade.txt This file contains a log of any Accumulative D:\configuration
software upgrades performed. (no limit)
Contents varies.
active_data_handler.conf This file is the active Accumulative D:\configuration
configuration file in the (no limit)
SmartLog.

File Description Limitation Location

diagnostics.txt This file contains information Accumulative D:\diagnostic_data
relevant for troubleshooting (no limit)
the AX700 at Philips
Anesthesia Care.
monit_deamon.txt This file contains information Accumulative D:\diagnostic_data
Anesthesia Care.
openInterfaceConfiguratio This file contains information Accumulative D:\diagnostic_data
nReport.txt relevant for troubleshooting (no limit)
Anesthesia Care.
openInterfacePackets.txt This file contains information Accumulative D:\diagnostic_data
Anesthesia Care. This file will
most likely not be present.
D is the drive letter of the USB memory stick.
7.4.6 Troubleshooting the Individual Measurements or Applications

For problems isolated to an individual parameter or application, please consult the AX700 Instructions
for Use and configuration information.
If you are getting questionable readings for individual measurements you may want to do the
Performance Verification tests in “5 Performance Verification” on page 121.


8
8Repair
The following section describes the removal and installation procedures for the major service parts in
connection with repairs. This section also describes the procedures for installing software, or changing
the software options and language in the machine.
NOTE After repairs, a series of tests is required to ensure that the repaired block functions correctly. A table
listing the required tests for each block can be found in “8.16 Test Requirements After Repairs” on
page 316. The minimum test requirement after each repair is the self-test and the electrical safety test.
8.1 Who Should Perform Repairs

Only qualified service personnel (biomedical engineers or technicians) should open the machine
housing, remove and replace components, or make adjustments. If your medical facility does not have
qualified service personnel certified by Philips, contact Philips’ Response Center or your local Philips
representative.
WARNING The electrical characteristics of anti-static mats or wrist strap should be checked before use, as described
in the manufacturer’s instructions for continued protection to both you and the equipment.
CAUTION After preventive maintenance or repair of a faulty machine, complete a performance verification to
ensure that the machine is ready for use before handing it over to the customer. See “5 Performance
Verification” on page 121 for the relevant information.
are described in “8 Repair” on page 253.

8 Repair 8.2 Prerequisites
CAUTION Before handling any circuit boards, wear the ESD wrist strap and connect it to the machine.
CAUTION Before starting any maintenance or repair, release all gas pressures; first N2O, then O2 and Air.
CAUTION Before removing any hoses, ensure a unique marking to reconnect correctly.
8.2 Prerequisites
For information about the required tool kit, test kit and service kit and other service parts, see “9
Service Parts and Tools” on page 323.
It is recommended that the machine is cleaned before starting repairs, See “Cleaning the IntelliSave
AX700” on page -90
8.3 Repair Procedures

• “8.4 Accessing the Machine” on page 255
• “8.5 Assembling the Machine” on page 258
• “8.6 Replacing the Electronic Gas Mixer (EGM)” on page 259
• “8.7 Replacing the EGM Manifold” on page 264
• “8.8 Replacing the Ventilator” on page 267
• “8.9 Replacing the Power Management Board” on page 273
• “8.10 Changing Fuses” on page 277
• “8.12 Adjust the IBS Lock” on page 298
• “8.13 Replacing the Optical Encoder” on page 299
• “8.14 Software Installation” on page 302
• “8.16 Test Requirements After Repairs” on page 316

8.4 Accessing the Machine 8 Repair
8.4 Accessing the Machine

8.4.1 Upper Rear Cover
1 Remove the four screws from the upper rear cover.
CAUTION Be aware that the cover will not fall down unnoticed, when the last screw is removed.
2 Remove the cover.
8.4.2 Top Cover

1 Remove the screws from the two lockers - one for each.

8 Repair 8.4 Accessing the Machine
2 Press the lockers in.
3 Release the ON/OFF connector from the top cover by moving the white plastic part upwards.
4 Remove the top cover.
8.4.3 Lower Rear Cover

1 Remove the five screws.

8.4 Accessing the Machine 8 Repair
2 Remove the cover.
8.4.4 Ventilator Drawer

1 Remove the two screws - one on each side of the drawer - and park them on the back of the drawer.
Place the screw here

while the drawer is open
2 Pull out the drawer.
8.4.5 Middle Rear Cover

1 Remove the four screws from the middle rear cover. Beware of the loose plate behind the cover.
2 Open the cover.

8 Repair 8.5 Assembling the Machine
8.4.6 Detach the anesthesia machine from a pendant

Follow these steps to detach the anesthesia machine from a pendant.
WARNING Keep your feet and lower limbs out of the area below the system when lowering the system.
1 Remove the M12 screws from the wheel base, and align the orientation sticks with the
corresponding holes underneath the anesthesia machine.
2 Move the machine down by pressing the DOWN control button on the pendant until the
machine is fully attached to the wheel base(e.g. use the remote if available).
3 Mount the two M12 screws to secure the anesthesia machine to the wheel base.
8.5 Assembling the Machine

1 Mount covers by following the steps in Accessing the Machine in reverse order.
CAUTION When mounting the top cover, ensure that it is tightly fixed to the cabinet in the front.

8.6 Replacing the Electronic Gas Mixer (EGM) 8 Repair
8.6 Replacing the Electronic Gas Mixer (EGM)

Before starting any replacement procedures, read the safety precautions and prerequisites sections in
this chapter.
1 If possible check and note down the EGM software version of the machine.
Go to Setup menu -> Service -> Versions.
CAUTION Before removing any supplies and cables from the EGM, and if technical possible, ensure that you have
a complete value’s list of the customer and country specific settings.
If the EGM version is 7.1.3 or higher see “GUI (EGM) Software Installation” on page 305.
2 Get access to the machine as described in “8.4 Accessing the Machine” on page 255.
3 From the upper backside of the machine, remove all supplies from the EGM.
O2 N2O Air
P7 P9
P8
4 Remove the three micro switches.
orange
green
brown
5 Remove the touch screen plug.

8 Repair 8.6 Replacing the Electronic Gas Mixer (EGM)
6 Remove the three communication cables (A = Ventilator, B = Gas Module, C = Ext. Serial).
A
B C
7 Unscrew the cable to the EGM fan and flow valves.
8 Remove the cables to power, the PM board and the control dial (“Swivel wheel” on label).
NOTE Ensure the control dial connector is correctly remounted, according to the illustrations below.

9 Remove the earth wire.
10 From the top of the machine, loosen the two screws on the backside of the SmartLog assembly.
11 Remove the two screws on the front side of the SmartLog assembly.

8 Repair 8.6 Replacing the Electronic Gas Mixer (EGM)
12 Remove the SmartLog assembly from the machine.
13 Dismount the four screws on each side of the EGM.
14 Remove the EGM from the machine.
15 Before mounting the new EGM, remove the protection sealing from the screen. Mount the
protection sealing on the replaced EGM, for protection of the display.

16 Ensure that the screen has a sealing band mounted at the edge of the frame before further
mounting.
17 Mount the new EGM by following the steps above in reverse order
18 Assemble the machine. See “Assembling the Machine” on page 258.
19 Connect pneumatic supplies and switch on power.
NOTE The exchange EGM will come with the latest software and English language installed. You may need to
up or downgrade the EGM software during installation to ensure compatibility. See “8.16 Test
Requirements After Repairs” on page 316 and “8.14.1 GUI (EGM) Software Installation” on page 305
for software installation instructions.
20 Enter customer and country specific settings.

If the EGM version is 7.1.3 or higher see “GUI (EGM) Software Installation” on page 305.
21 Complete the following calibration procedures:
– “6.3 Calibrating the O2 Flow” on page 211
– “6.4 Calibrating the Air Flow” on page 212
– “6.5 Calibrating the N2O Flow” on page 214
– “6.6 Calibrating the O2 Inlet Pressure” on page 215
– “6.7 Calibrating the Air Inlet Pressure” on page 216
– “6.8 Calibrating the N2O Inlet Pressure” on page 217.
• Complete the following performance verification procedures, before handing over the machine to
the customer:
– “5.2.3 O2 Gas Supply Alarm Test” on page 130
– “5.2.4 Air Gas Supply Alarm Test” on page 132
– “5.2.5 N2O Gas Supply Alarm Test” on page 133
– “5.2.14 O2 Fresh Gas Flow Test” on page 148
– “5.2.15 Air Fresh Gas Flow Test” on page 150
– “5.2.16 N2O Fresh Gas Flow Test” on page 151

8 Repair 8.7 Replacing the EGM Manifold
– “5.2.23 IBS Switches Test” on page 163

– “5.2.36 Fans Test” on page 178
– “5.3.3 Electrical Safety Testing” on page 185
– “5.3.4 System Test” on page 188
8.7 Replacing the EGM Manifold

this chapter.
2 Remove the pressure switch connection (P19) from the power management (PM) board.
3 Disconnect the flow control valves by removing the wires.

8.7 Replacing the EGM Manifold 8 Repair
4 Mark the tubes connected to the manifold as needed to ensure a correct reassembly.
NOTE See “1.8 Internal Color Coding for Gases” on page 13 for identification of the tubes.
5 Remove the tubes.

6 Release the 4 manifold screws.
7 Remove the manifold and replace with the new one.
8 Mount the manifold, start with fixing the screws.

9 Reconnect tubes according to marks.
10 On the left side:
– three silicone flow-sampling tubes (Clear)
– one red tube for the fresh gas output
– two N2O tubes (Blue)
11 On the top:
– two Air tubes (Black)
– three O2 tubes (Clear/White)
12 On the right side:
– three Air tubes (Black)
– two O2 tubes (Clear/White)

8 Repair 8.7 Replacing the EGM Manifold
13 Connect the flow control valves by remounting the wires with correct colors.
NOTE When mounting the wires, the polarity is not important for the valves.
14 Connect the pressure switch connection (P19) on the PM board

16 Complete the following calibration procedures:
– “6.3 Calibrating the O2 Flow” on page 211
– “6.4 Calibrating the Air Flow” on page 212
– “6.5 Calibrating the N2O Flow” on page 214
17 Complete the following performance verification procedures, before handing over the machine to
the customer:
– “5.2.1 Internal Pressure Regulators Test” on page 125
– “5.2.7 Dose System Leakage Test” on page 140
– “5.2.14 O2 Fresh Gas Flow Test” on page 148
– “5.2.15 Air Fresh Gas Flow Test” on page 150
– “5.2.16 N2O Fresh Gas Flow Test” on page 151
– “5.2.21 Drive Gas Selection and Drive Gas Alarm Test” on page 158

8.8 Replacing the Ventilator 8 Repair
8.8 Replacing the Ventilator

this chapter.
NOTE It is not possible to update the Rel. 1.0 machine with Rel. 2.0 ventilator software; the complete
ventilator must be changed.
1 If possible check and note down the ventilator (Whispa) software version of the machine.
Go to Setup menu -> Service -> Versions.
3 Disconnect the ventilator startup relay (P22) from the power management (PM) board, by
removing the wire.

8 Repair 8.8 Replacing the Ventilator
4 Disconnect the power supply (P9) from the PM board.
5 Remove the O2 sensor connector.
6 Disconnect the ventilator communication cable from the EGM, and pull it down through the back
of the machine..
7 Remove the nut on the backside of the earth connector to disconnect the earth wire to the
ventilator.

CAUTION Before removing any hoses, ensure a unique marking to reconnect correctly.
8 Disconnect the airway pressure connection to the IBS (S5 on the ventilator).
NOTE For Rel. 1.0 machines: Go to step 14.
9 Disconnect the three 22mm hoses, and the two spirometry sample lines (S2 and S3) on the
pneumatic manifold in the ventilator.
To IBS To Res.
o AGSS/WAGD
10 If the patient suction option is installed, disconnect the plastic hoses from the patient suction unit,
and the drive gas hose from the pneumatic manifold on the ventilator.

11 Disconnect the quick connector to the MAN/VENT change over valve.
12 Pull the quick releases on each side of the ventilator drawer, to dismount the ventilator drawer.
Left side Right side
13 Go to step 19.
14 Disconnect AGSS/WAGD and ventilator drive gas male cones from the outlets on the ventilator
manifold.
15 Mark the two spirometry sample tubes (S3) and (S4) and disconnect.

16 Mark the tubes to the patient suction system (if option is installed) and drive gas, and disconnect.
17 Disconnect the quick connector to the MAN/VENT change over valve.
18 Press the quick releases on each side of the ventilator drawer.
Left side Right side
19 Remove the ventilator and replace with the new one.

20 Assemble the ventilator by following the steps above in reverse order. Ensure that you remount all
connections:
– change over valve tube
– patient suction system (if option is installed) and drive gas tubes
– two spirometry sample tubes (S3) and (S4)
– AGSS/WAGD tube and drive gas ventilator outlet
– airway pressure connection to the IBS
– earth connector
– ventilator communication cable
– O2 sensor connector
– ventilator startup relay (P9) on the PM board
– power supply (P22) on the PM board.

21 Assemble the machine.

22 Connect supplies and switch on power.
NOTE The exchange ventilator will come with the latest software and english language installed. You may
need to up or downgrade the ventilator software during installation to ensure compatibility. See “8.16
Test Requirements After Repairs” on page 316 and “8.14.2 Ventilator (Whispa) Software Installation”
on page 308 for software installation instructions.
NOTE Compensating for Altitude: If the customer site is at altitudes above 1000 m. (3280.83 ft.), perform
the calibrations as described in “ Compensating for Altitude” on page 86.
NOTE If the machine is configured with O2 as the primary drive gas you need to recalibrate the new
ventilator.
See “Calibrating the Ventilator Inspiratory Flow” on page 219.
See “Calibrating the Flow Sensors” on page 224.
23 Complete the following performance verification procedures, before handing over the machine to
the customer:
“5.2.1 Internal Pressure Regulators Test” on page 125 (Ventilator ONLY)
“5.2.6 High Pressure Leakage Tests” on page 135
“5.2.8 Integrated Patient Suction Test” on page 141
“5.2.10 Running the Self-tests” on page 144
“5.2.20 MPL Valve for Ventilator Test” on page 155
“5.2.21 Drive Gas Selection and Drive Gas Alarm Test” on page 158
“5.2.22 Mains Alarm Test” on page 162
“5.2.24 Volume Measurement Zeroing Function Test” on page 164
“5.2.25 Tidal Volume Test” on page 165
“5.2.26 Ped. Volume Measurement Test” on page 166
“5.2.27 Adult Volume Measurement Test” on page 168
“5.2.28 Pressure Measurement Test” on page 170
“5.2.29 PEEP Function Test” on page 171
“5.2.30 PCV Function Test” on page 172
“5.2.33 High Pressure Alarm Test” on page 176
“5.2.34 O2 Fuel Cell Sensor Test” on page 176
“5.2.36 Fans Test” on page 178
“5.3.3 Electrical Safety Testing” on page 185

8.9 Replacing the Power Management Board 8 Repair
“5.3.4 System Test” on page 188
8.9 Replacing the Power Management Board

this chapter.
2 Unplug first the black cable and then the red cable to disconnect the EGM battery.
3 Remove one of the black cables between the batteries.

4 Remove the EGM battery charger cable from (P5) with a screwdriver.

8 Repair 8.9 Replacing the Power Management Board
5 Remove all other cables connected to the circuit board.

6 Remove the power management board assembly by removing the four nuts.
7 Unscrew the six screws to remove the circuit board from the assembly.
8 Place the old circuit board in the anti-static bag of the new board.
9 Replace with the new board and fix it to the cover.
10 Mount the assembly in the machine.
11 Connect the EGM battery charger cable to (P5).

8.9 Replacing the Power Management Board 8 Repair
12 Connect the auxiliary outlets.

Aux 3
Aux 2
Aux 1
13 Connect the remaining cables to the board.
P1 EGM battery
P2 EGM battery
P3 Trafo 3rd secondary (transformer)
P4 Multigas module (PSU)
P5 EGM battery charger
P6 EGM (PSU)
P9 Ventilator (PSU)
P10 Ext1 Pwr (Auxiliary outlet 1)
P13 MAINS (power)
P14 Trafo 1-2 secondaries
P15 Trafo Primary (transformer)
P16 ON/OFF switch
P17 LEDs
P18 Rear lamp
P19 Pressure switch

8 Repair 8.9 Replacing the Power Management Board
P21 Vaporizer power

P22 Ventilator ON/OFF relay
P23 SmartLog PC (PSU)
P24 Earth
14 Connect the black cable between the batteries.

15 Last, connect the EGM battery. with the red cable first and then the black cable.

18 Complete the following performance verification procedure, before handing over the machine to
the customer:
– “5.2.22 Mains Alarm Test” on page 162
– “5.3.4 System Test” on page 188.

8.10 Changing Fuses 8 Repair
8.10 Changing Fuses

Fuse locations are shown the diagram below, and ratings on “Table 8-1: Fuse Ratings” on page 278.
NOTE Aux 1, Aux 2 and Aux 3 are not mounted on Rel. 1.0 machines

8 Repair 8.10 Changing Fuses
Table 8-1: Fuse Ratings

Ref 230V Fuse 100-115V Fuse
Power Inlet
Inlet L and N T 5A H 250V T 10A H 250V
Power Management Board (Rev 7.4)a
PM-F1 T 6.3A H 250V
PM-F2 T 5A H 250V
PM-F3, F4 T 5A H 250V T 10A H 250V
PM-F5 T 4A H 250V T 8A H 250V
PM-F6, F7, F8, M 1.6A L 250V M 3.15A L 250V
F20
PM-F21 T 2A H 250V T 4A H 250V
PM-F22 T 400mA H 250V
PM-F23 T 3.5A SMD 125V (Littlefuse) 154)
Power Management Board (>=Rev 8.0)
PM-F1 T 6.3A H 250V
PM-F2 T 5A H 250V
PM-F3, F4 T 5A H 250V T 10A H 250V
PM-F5, F6, F7, T 4A H 250V T 8A H 250V
F8
PM-F20 M 1.6A L 250V M 3.15A L 250V
PM-F21 T 2A H 250V T 4A H 250V
PM-F22 T 400mA H 250V
PM-F23 T 3.5A SMD 125V (Littlefuse) 154)
PM-F24 T 375mA SMD 125V (Littlefuse 154)b
Ventilator
Vent-F4, F5, F6 T 4A H 250V
Auxiliary Power Outletsc
Aux1, Aux2, M 1.6A L 250V M 3.15A L 250V
Aux3
a.ONLY on Rel. 1.0 machines.
b.Mounted in the backside of the PCB.
c.These fuses are NOT mounted on Rel. 1.0 machines.
Ordering information for the fuses available as service parts can be found in “9.2.29 Generic small
parts kits” on page 406 in the “Service Parts and Tools” chapter.

8.10.1Power Management Board Fuses

this chapter. See Table 8-1: Fuse Ratings for correct fuse ratings.
2 The following fuses on the power management board can be replaced.
3 Remove safety caps and remove the relevant fuses using a pair of tweezers and replace with new
ones.
4 Remount the safety caps.
the customer:
– “5.2.37 Auxiliary Power Outlets Test” on page 178

8 Repair 8.10 Changing Fuses
8.10.2Ventilator Fuses
2 Remove the safety cap on the fuse box.
3 Remove the relevant fuses with a pair of tweezers and replace with new ones.
4 Remount the safety cap on the fuse box.

the customer:


8.10.3Auxiliary Power Outlet Fuses

1 Remove the fuse cap with the help of a slotted screwdriver.
Turn the cap counterclockwise, and pull out to remove.
2 Place the new fuse in the cap.
3 Push the cap in to the fuse slot, and turn it clockwise.
Fuses
the customer:
“5.2.22 Mains Alarm Test” on page 162
“5.2.37 Auxiliary Power Outlets Test” on page 178
“5.3.4 System Test” on page 188.
8.10.4Mains Power Inlet Fuses

1 Turn OFF the mains switch

8 Repair 8.11 Replacing Ventilator Valves
2 With the help of a screwdriver, pull out the fuse socket in the mains cable receptacle.
3 Change the fuses

the customer:
8.11 Replacing Ventilator Valves

8.11.1Replacing the ventilator inspiratory valve
The following procedure shows how to replace the ventilator inspiratory valve, and lists the required
verification procedures.
1 Remove the lower rear cover, and pull out the ventilator drawer; see “Accessing the Machine” on
page 255
2 For release 1.0 machines: continue below.
3 For release 2.0 machines: go to “ Ventilator - Inspiratory Valve, New Gen.” on page 286
Ventilator - Inspiratory Valve

PN 4535 644 16311
(ONLY for Rel. 1.0 machines)

8.11 Replacing Ventilator Valves 8 Repair
Description QTY
Valve coil 1
Valve body with plunger and spring 1
Lock 1
Screws 4
Required tools
Description Source/PN
3mm Allen screwdriver Purchase locally
Philips PH1 screwdriver Purchase locally
Adjustable Torque Screwdriver (0.5-15 Nm) Purchase locally
PH1 bit for torque screwdriver Purchase locally
Disassembly
1 Disconnect wires (3) from the valve coil.
NOTE Note the position of the wires on the valve coil.
2 Dismount the lock on top of the valve coil, by pushing in an outward motion (e.g. with the help of
a screwdriver), and remove valve coil from valve body

3 Remove the 4 screws from the valve body.
4 Remove valve body, plunger and spring from valve block assembly.
5 Discard all removed items (valve coil, valve body, plunger, spring and screws).
Assembly
NOTE Ensure that all surfaces are clean from dust or any other exterior particles before starting the assembly
procedure.

1 Assemble the plunger, spring and valve body as shown below.
2 Mount the valve body assembly on the ventilator valve block
3 Tighten the screws in two sequences in the order shown on the pictures.
3 2 3 2
1 4 1 4
A) 0.5 Nm B) 1 Nm
4 Mount the new valve coil, and lock.

5 Connect wires (3) as shown below (red, black and green/yellow wires).
6 Proceed with “ Post Repair Procedures” on page 290.
Ventilator - Inspiratory Valve, New Gen.

PN: 4535 644 49781
(ONLY for Rel. 2.0 machines)

Description QTY
Valve 1
Screws 2
O-rings 2
Required tools
Philips PH1 screwdriver Purchase locally
Qxygen Compatible Grease, liquid SPS/ 4535 644 16141
Disassembly
1 Disconnect the drive gas tube between the buffer tank and the ventilator valve block.
2 Remove buffer tank, by removing the 4 screws from the bottom side of the ventilator drawer.
3 Loosen the ventilator valve block, by removing the two screws from the bottom side of the
ventilator drawer. Move the valve block towards the right, to get room for a screwdriver.

4 Disconnect the two wires for the inspiratory valve.
5 Remove the two screws, and remove the inspiratory valve.
6 Discard the items shown on picture below.

Assembly
1 Lubricate O-rings and mount on the inspiratory valve as shown below.
2 Mount inspiratory valve on ventilator valve block. Tighten screws firmly.
3 Follow steps 1-4 in “ Disassembly” on page 287 in reverse order to reassemble wires, tubes and
buffer tank.

Post Repair Procedures

After the repair perform the following calibration / verification procedures to ensure proper machine
function:
“6.9 Calibrating the Ventilator Inspiratory Flow” on page 219
“6.11 Calibrating the Flow Sensors” on page 224
Complete the following performance verification procedures before handing over the machine to the
customer:
“5.2.1 Internal Pressure Regulators Test” on page 125
“5.2.6 High Pressure Leakage Tests” on page 135 - only (L1) is required
Follow “8.4 Accessing the Machine” on page 255 in reverse order to close the machine after repair.
8.11.2Replacing the ventilator expiratory valve

The following procedure shows how to replace the ventilator expiratory valve, and lists the required
verification procedures.
Ventilator - Expiratory Valve

Rel 1.0: PN 4535 644 08851 (36458-52)
Rel 2.0: PN 4535 644 51891 (36458-77)

Description QTY
Valve Coil w. O-ring and membrane 1
Screw M6X16 4
WASHER Facet OD 6mm. Brass /Chrome 4
Required tools
Adjustable Torque wrench (0.5-15 Nm) Purchase locally
5mm Allen bit for torque wrench Purchase locally
Disassembly
1 Remove the lower rear cover, and pull out the ventilator drawer. See “Accessing the Machine” on
page 255.
NOTE For Rel. 1.0 machines: Go to step 4. Otherwise continue with step 2 below.
2 Disconnect the drive gas tube between the buffer tank and the ventilator valve block.

3 Remove buffer tank, by removing the 4 screws from the bottom side of the ventilator drawer.
4 Loosen the ventilator valve block, by removing the two screws from the bottom side of the
ventilator drawer.
5 Disconnect wires/tubes from:

NOTE Note the position of tubes and wires on the valve coils.
– PEEP valve (black, blue and green/yellow wires (3)).
– Expiratory valve (black, yellow and green/yellow wires (3))
– Pressure switch & MAN/VENT pilot valve.
– AGSS tube.

CAUTION Be careful not to damage any of the tubes and hoses when re-orienting the valve block.
NOTE For Rel. 2.0 machines: Go to step 6. Otherwise continue below.
– Inspiratory valve (black, red and green/yellow wires (3)).
6 Place valve block with the expiratory valve facing upwards, and remove the 4 screws from the
expiratory valve.
NOTE For Rel. 2.0 machines: Go to step 8. Otherwise continue below.
7 Disconnect silicone tubes (S1 + S2).

S2
S1
Check tube marking in other end
8 Remove the expiratory valve coil/body from the valve block.
9 Remove the plunger, spring and membrane.
10 Remove O-ring.

11 Discard all removed items (valve coil/body, plunger, spring, membrane, O-rings and screws/
spacers).
Assembly
NOTE Ensure that all surfaces are clean from dust or any other exterior particles before starting the assembly
procedure.
1 Mount O-ring. Do not lubricate this O-ring.
2 Mount expiratory valve including membrane, plunger and spring.

3 Tighten the screws in two sequences in the order shown on the pictures:
A) 6Nm B) 12Nm
3 2 3 2
1 4 1 4
4 Mount valve block wires and tubes and close machine following the Disassembly section step 2-5
in reverse order.
Post Repair Procedures

After the repair perform the following verification procedures to ensure proper machine function:
“5.2.1 Internal Pressure Regulators Test” on page 125 - ventilator only.
“5.2.6 High Pressure Leakage Tests” on page 135 - only (L1) is required

8 Repair 8.12 Adjust the IBS Lock

Follow “8.4 Accessing the Machine” on page 255 in reverse order to close the machine after repair.
8.12 Adjust the IBS Lock

After frequent mounting and dismounting of the IBS, it may be necessary to adjust the IBS lock:
1 Loosen the 2 larger Allen screws to loosen the IBS lock.
2 Adjust the 2 smaller Allen screws so that the IBS lock is aligned with the IBS console.
3 Position the IBS lock so that it is aligned with Alignment Tool 72084 in the same way on both
sides.

8.13 Replacing the Optical Encoder 8 Repair
4 Tighten the 2 larger Allen screws.
5 Check that the IBS lock is aligned with the IBS console..
6 Mount the IBS and ensure it is correctly fixed to the IBS console.
8.13 Replacing the Optical Encoder

Required Tools
Description Source
Allen screwdriver 2.5mm Purchase locally
Torque wrench (1.5 Nm / 13 in-lbs) Purchase locally
with 14 fork or socket
Disassembly/Assembly
1 Disconnect the RS232 and power cable from the SmartLog if it is installed.
2 Dismount the upper rear cover, see “Upper Rear Cover” on page 255.
3 Disconnect the fan cable before removing the cover from the machine.
4 Disconnect the flat cable from the EGM.

8 Repair 8.13 Replacing the Optical Encoder
NOTE Ensure the control dial connector is correctly remounted, according to the illustrations below.
CAUTION When reconnecting the cable, ensure that the cable connector is aligned with the connector on the
EGM.
5 Pull off the black knob on the front side of the machine.
6 Use a socket wrench to remove the nut and spacer, and dismount the encoder.
CAUTION When mounting the encoder in the frame of the MMI, it must be tightened to a torque value of
1.5Nm / 13 in-lbs.

8.13 Replacing the Optical Encoder 8 Repair
7 Remove the existing spacer and nut from the encoder.
8 Mount the brass spacer from the repair kit onto the encoder, and replace the spacer and nut from
step 7..
9 Mount the new encoder by following this procedure in reverse order.

the customer:

8 Repair 8.14 Software Installation
8.14 Software Installation

The IntelliSave AX700 has five software components, of which three can be upgraded / configured in
the field. The following sections describe the procedures for installing software to these different
software components:
– “8.14.1 GUI (EGM) Software Installation” on page 305
– “8.14.2 Ventilator (Whispa) Software Installation” on page 308
– “8.14.3 SmartLog Software Installation” on page 310
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites need to be in place before these procedures can be performed:
– AC Software ToolKit from InCenter
– SW Package from InCenter
– “ USB to RS232 adapter f. SW update” on page 412
– Null modem cable (Female/Male)
– DB9 gender changer (Female/Female) without the fixing screws
– 3 mm Allen screwdriver
– A PC running Windows OS version 95, 98, XP, Windows 7
– USB 2.0 Card Reader (only for SmartLog upgrade)
AC Software Tool Kit

The AC Software Toolkit contains all necessary software tools for installing software to the different
software components in the device. The latest revision of the Toolkit can be downloaded from
InCenter. Extract the zip-package to a known location on your PC, for example on the desktop. Open
Readme.txt and follow the instructions for installation.
SW Package
The software package contains the latest compatible revisions of each software component for the
device. See “Software Compatibility Matrix” on page 314. for information about the latest revisions
across packages.
Starting with Rev. C of the AC Software Toolkit it is possible to have several SW packages for several
different machine types installed on a PC. The SW packages need to be installed in the C:\DL
directory in separate directories – see example below:

8.14 Software Installation 8 Repair
NOTE If a folder named GUI already exists in the DL folder this folder must be deleted for the AC Software
Toolkit to work properly.
The sub folders from a SW package zip-file must to be placed as sub folders for the package directory
for the SW Installation Tool to work (naming will depend on the SW package), see example below:
SW Package Installation
1 Extract the software zip-package to C:\DL\
2 In the folder C:\DL\<Package>\Ventilator, locate a file named either whispa_app_<buildXXX>.hex
or whispa_app.hex and copy the file to C:\flashhexfiles
3 If the file name included build information, <buildXXX>, rename the file to whispa_app.hex.
Change COM port settings

If your computer does not have a built-in COM port, use the USB to RS232 converter specified in the
prerequisites.
In this case you need to change the COM port settings as described below:
1 Connect USB to RS232 adapter for software update to a free USB port on your PC.
2 2. From Start > Control Panel > Device Manager go to Ports (COM & LPT).

3 Right click USB Serial Port, and select Properties.

4 Select Port Settings, and change the Bits per second to 115200.
5 Click OK to apply the new settings.

6 Note the COM port number for the USB serial port.

Setting up the DamecaV2 application

If your PC is running an OS newer than Win 98 / Win ME, you need to set compatibility mode for
DamecaV2 to Win 98 / Win ME
1 On the Desktop, right-click the DamecaV2 application, and select Properties
2 Select the Compatibility tab at the top, and set the settings as the following:
8.14.1GUI (EGM) Software Installation

This section describes the procedure for upgrading software and configuring / cloning user customer
specific settings / options.
NOTE Read Prerequisites before performing this procedure.
GUI (EGM) Software Upgrade

This procedure is used to reinstall or upgrade the GUI software on the IntelliSave AX700. You need to
know the language, and options before performing this procedure.
NOTE To see which options are installed on the machine, go to Setup menu > Service > Installation to check
if Neonatal and HLM Mode are enabled
To check if PRVT is installed go to the Main Screen, select Vent Mode and check if you can select
PRVT by turning the control dial.

1 Connect a null modem cable between the RS232 port on the rear side the machine, and the COM
1 port on your PC (e.g. by using the USB to RS232 converter).
2 Connect mains power, and press the ON/OFF switch on the front of the machine.
3 When the machine has booted up, bypass the selftest.
4 Go to Setup menu > Service, and enter the service password 91-34-80.
5 On your desktop, open the GUI Installation Tool application.
6 If the COM port for the USB serial cable is different from 1 (refer to your note in step 6 in section
“Change COM port settings”), change the COM port:
– Type S and press Enter to change the COM port.
– Enter the COM port number for the USB serial cable and press Enter.
7 On the anesthesia machine, go to Setup menu > Miscellaneous and select SW update.
8 Backup/clone customer specific settings if needed (optional step):
– Type C and press Enter to select Cloning.
– Type 1 and press Enter to select “Download settings from anesthesia machine.”
9 Type P and press Enter for a list of SW packages.
10 Type the number for the desired package and press Enter.
11 Type L and press Enter for a list of available country specific languages.
12 Enter the number for the desired language, and press Enter.
13 Type O and press Enter for a list of available customer specific options.

14 Choose the correct option according to the table below, and press Enter.
Option Option # Description Requirements
Selection
1 Standard VCV, PCV, SIMV, PSV, VSV N/A
2 V03 HLM mode HW opt. #M01
3 V01, V02, V03 All included HW opt. #M01
4 V02 Neonatal settings V01
5 V01 PRVT ventilation mode N/A
6 V01, V03 PRVT ventilation mode, HLM HW opt. #M01
mode
NOTE If you have retrieved the settings for cloning, the option selection above will be overwritten when
uploading the cloned settings afterwards.
15 Type D, and press Enter to start the installation.

16 Restore the settings if they were backed up in step 8 (optional step):
– Type C and press Enter to select Cloning.
– Type 2 and press Enter to select “Upload settings to anesthesia machine.”
After the installation do the following:
17 Turn OFF the machine by pressing the ON/OFF switch on the front.
18 Remove the null modem cable from the RS232 port on the rear side of the machine.
19 Connect pneumatic supplies and power ON the machine.
20 Bypass the self-test and go to Setup menu > Service > Versions to check that the correct version
number is displayed.
21 Change the default configuration of the EGM; see “Configuration Tasks” on page 83
the customer: “5.2.10 Running the Self-tests” on page 144.
CAUTION Consult a super user at the customer site or an applications specialist to setup all user default settings
correctly.

8.14.2Ventilator (Whispa) Software Installation

This procedure is used to upgrade / downgrade the ventilator unit of the IntelliSave AX700.
1 Turn OFF the machine by pressing the ON/OFF switch on the front.
2 Remove the upper rear cover, by removing the 4 screws with a 2.5mm Allen screwdriver.
3 Disconnect the ventilator communication cable from the port labeled Ventilator on the EGM.
4 With the help of a gender changer, connect a null modem cable to the disconnected ventilator
communication cable, and the COM 1 port on your PC (e.g. by using the USB to RS232
converter).

5 On your desktop start the DamecaV2 application.

6 Click Load Application Program to start the application.
7 Turn ON the machine by pressing the ON/OFF switch on the front.

The download should now start, and the application will show the progress.
NOTE Alarms should be disabled for the machine during the installation. Press the Cancel Alarms field to disable
the alarm sound for 120 seconds.
8 When the download is complete, press Terminate and turn OFF the machine.
NOTE Remember to tighten the thumb screws on the cable when reconnecting.
9 Assemble the machine, using step 2 to step 4 in reverse order.

10 Connect pneumatic supplies and switch ON the machine.
11 Bypass the selftest and go to Setup menu ->Service-->Versions to check that the correct Ventilator
(Whispa) version number is displayed.

the customer:
8.14.3SmartLog Software Installation

CAUTION When performing this installation, the existing log files will be deleted. If the existing smartlog files are
needed, see “SmartLog Troubleshooting” on page 249.
This section describes how to upgrade to SmartLog OS software and how to configure the SmartLog.
The HW option #J01 needs to be installed to have this feature.
• “ Upgrade” on page 310
• “ Configuration” on page 314
Upgrade
The SmartLog OS software is installed on a compact flash (CF) card located in the SmartLog module.
In order to upgrade the SmartLog OS software, a new boot-able image file needs to be flashed to this
compact flash (CF) card.
1 Remove the upper rear cover, by removing the 4 screws with a 2.5mm Allen screwdriver.
2 Turn OFF the SmartLog module, by pressing the ON/OFF switch to zero (0).

3 Remove the CF card from the SmartLog module.
4 Mount a CF card reader in a USB port on your computer.

5 Insert the CF card from the SmartLog in the card reader.
NOTE If you are prompted to format the CF card, accept by pressing Format disk. A new window will open.
Proceed from step 8.
6 Go to Start and open Computer.

7 Right-click the I: drive (where I is the drive letter for the CF card).
8 Select Format.
9 In the Format Removable Disk window set the settings as below:
10 Click Start to format the disk. When the formatting has completed, click Close.
11 Start the Win32DiskImager.exe from your desktop (part of the see “Prerequisites” on page 254).
12 In Win32DiskImager select browse.

13 Browse to C:\DL\<Package>\SmartLog.
14 Under Files of type select *.*.
15 Select reduced_ax700_logpcimage_buildXX.bootable, and click Open (in some software packages
the reduced image is not part of the package. In this case the file
ax700_logpcimage_buildXX.bootable should be selected).
16 Select the device to write to from those listed under Device. In the example the drive letter I: is the
CF card.
17 Now select Write to transfer the bootable image file to the CF card.
18 A new window opens. Press Yes to confirm.

19 Press OK to complete.
To verify that the file was written successfully do the following steps:
20 Create a folder named “configuration” on a USB stick.
21 Insert the USB stick in the SmartLog USB port on the rear side of the machine..
22 Perform step 1 to step 5 in reverse order.
23 Wait for minimum 1 minute, while the SmartLog is starting up.
24 Remove the USB stick.
25 Check the flash image build number in the file installed_version.txt, which is located on the USB
stick in the configuration folder. The build number should correspond to the build number for the
SmartLog software of the software package being installed. See “Software Compatibility Matrix”
on page 314. or the service bulletin announcing the latest software package.
the customer:
– “5.2.38 SmartLog Test” on page 179

8 Repair 8.15 Software Compatibility Matrix
Configuration
IntelliSave AX700 comes with one basic configuration file installed. This configuration file is in
English. It uses cmH20 as the unit of measurement for pressures and displays 4 waveforms: AWPin,
AWF, AWP, and AWV. Additional configuration files are available on InCenter.
Follow the below procedure to install a different configuration.
Prerequisites
Go to InCenter, and locate and download the configuration file that you want to install. The title of
the file follows the naming convention:
Language_Measurement_Waveform1_Waveform2_Waveform3_Waveform4
Example: “EN_cmH20_ AWPin_AWF_AWP_AWV”
1 On your computer, insert a USB stick, and in the root directory, create a folder named
“Configuration”.
2 Unzip the file downloaded from InCenter, and copy the following files to the Configuration folder
on the USB stick:
– –spectabl.bin
– –spectabl.rpt
3 Insert the USB stick in the Smartlog USB port on the machine (see “Data communication” on
page 6).
4 Wait 30 seconds.
The configuration files are automatically updated in the Smartlog.
5 Remove the USB stick from the machine
8.15 Software Compatibility Matrix

The software versions need to match the compatibility matrix below for the different software modules
to the hardware revision of the machine. The previous versions of each software component are shown
in grey.
The software versions are split into two tables, depending on RoHS compatibility with the hardware;
RoHS is short for Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive.
NOTE Machines with Rel. 1.0 EGMs have serial numbers AM032013001-AM502012012 or DK30100001-
DK33500499.
For Rel. 2.0 machines, see the EGM's Service Tag for what exchange part to order- either RoHS or
Non RoHs. The exchange part is visible on the Service Tag under Service#. See “Service Tags” on
page 10.

8.15 Software Compatibility Matrix 8 Repair
8.15.1Software for non-RoHS Hardware

SW EGM Gas Mixer DSPa Whispa SmartLog
Component (GUI) (VENT)
AX700 SW Package Version Build Version Build Version Build Version Build Version Build
Release
Rel. 1.0 P.7.12.0 7.1.2 N/A 1.30 N/A 4.08 N/A 3.2 N/A 1.52 N/A
Rel. 1.0 P.7.12.1 7.1.3 175 1.80 180 4.10 10 3.2 11 2.0 52
Rel. 2.0 P.7.13.0 7.1.3 103 1.80 180 4.09 N/A 3.3 296 2.0 49
Rel. 2.0 P.7.13.1 7.1.3 103 1.80 180 4.09 N/A 3.3 296 2.0 51
Rel. 2.0 P.7.13.2 7.1.3 130 1.80 180 4.10 10 3.4 302 2.0 52
Rel. 2.0 P.7.13.3 7.1.3 131 1.80 180 4.10 10 3.4 302 2.0 52
Rel. 2.0 P.7.13.4 7.1.3 131 1.80 180 4.10 10 3.4 310 2.0 52
Rel. 2.0 P.7.13.5 7.1.3 136 1.80 180 4.10 10 3.4 310 2.0 52
a.DSP version 4.09 and 4.10 build 10 is exactly the same code.
8.15.2Software for RoHS Hardware

SW EGM Gas Mixer DSI Whispa(VENT SmartLog
Component (GUI) )
AX700 SW Package Version Build Version Build Version Build Version Build Version Build
Release
Rel. 2.0 P.7.14.0 7.1.3 136 1.90 3 4.10 10 3.4 310 2.0 52
Rel. 2.0 P.7.14.1 7.1.3 202 1.90 10 4.10 10 3.4 334 2.0 65

8 Repair 8.16 Test Requirements After Repairs
8.16 Test Requirements After Repairs

The table below lists all calibrations and tests required after a repair or replacement in a specific
functional block.
After repairs of blocks NOT listed in the table, the following two tests are required as a minimum:
• “5.3.3 Electrical Safety Testing” on page 185
Repaired/Replaced Item Required Tests

EGM
• “5.2.3 O2 Gas Supply Alarm Test” on page 130
• “5.2.4 Air Gas Supply Alarm Test” on page 132
• “5.2.5 N2O Gas Supply Alarm Test” on page 133
• “5.2.23 IBS Switches Test” on page 163

8.16 Test Requirements After Repairs 8 Repair

EGM Manifold
• “5.2.21 Drive Gas Selection and Drive Gas Alarm Test” on
page 158


Ventilator
(Ventilator ONLY)
• “5.2.21 Drive Gas Selection and Drive Gas Alarm Test” on
page 158
• “5.2.24 Volume Measurement Zeroing Function Test” on
page 164
• “5.2.25 Tidal Volume Test” on page 165
• “5.2.26 Ped. Volume Measurement Test” on page 166
• “5.2.27 Adult Volume Measurement Test” on page 168
• “5.2.28 Pressure Measurement Test” on page 170
• “5.2.29 PEEP Function Test” on page 171
• “5.2.30 PCV Function Test” on page 172
• “5.2.33 High Pressure Alarm Test” on page 176
Power Management Board
Misc. Power
(Ext. Power Outlets, Batteries, • “5.2.10 Running the Self-tests” on page 144
Fuses, Transformer(s))
• “5.2.37 Auxiliary Power Outlets Test” on page 178


Software Installation
Ventilator • “5.2.10 Running the Self-tests” on page 144
EGM • “5.2.10 Running the Self-tests” on page 144
SmartLog* • “5.2.10 Running the Self-tests” on page 144
*Only required if upgrading from

version 1.52 to 2.0 • “5.3.3 Electrical Safety Testing” on page 185
Touch-Screen
Control Dial
SmartLog PC
O2 Fuel Sensor


Gas Module
• “5.2.35 Multigas Module Test” on page 176
Gas Inlets / Pressure Gauges
Yokes • “5.2.2 Yoke Tests” on page 127
Inlets • “5.2.6 High Pressure Leakage Tests” on page 135
VAC • “5.2.10 Running the Self-tests” on page 144
AGSS/WAGD • “5.2.10 Running the Self-tests” on page 144
• “5.2.9 Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System (AGSS/WAGD) Test”
on page 142
Auxiliary Fresh Gas
• “5.2.17 Auxiliary Fresh Gas Test” on page 152


O2 Flush
• “5.2.12 O2 Flush Test” on page 147
Emergency Fresh Gas
• “5.2.13 Emergency Fresh Gas Test” on page 148
Auxiliary O2
• “5.2.11 Auxiliary O2 Flowmeter Test” on page 146
AGSS/WAGD
Passive AGSS/ WAGD • “5.2.9 Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System (AGSS/WAGD) Test”
on page 142
Active AGSS/WAGD: • “5.2.6 High Pressure Leakage Tests” on page 135
• “5.2.9 Anesthesia Gas Scavenging System (AGSS/WAGD) Test”
on page 142


Patient Suction
“5.2.6 High Pressure Leakage Tests” on page 135
Dose System
MPL Valve • “5.2.7 Dose System Leakage Test” on page 140
• “5.2.18 MPL Valve for IBS Test for Rel. 2.0” on page 153
• “5.2.19 MPL Valve for Aux. Fresh Gas Outlet Test” on
page 154
NPL Valve • “5.2.7 Dose System Leakage Test” on page 140
• “5.2.31 NPL Valve Test” on page 172
Back Bar • “5.2.7 Dose System Leakage Test” on page 140
All Other Service Events

9
9Service Parts and Tools

This section provides identification of all available replacement and exchange parts for IntelliSave
AX700 (both available individually and/or as part of special kits). The section also contains a list of the
tools required for performing service.
The parts can be identified via exploded view machine diagrams. Tables listing parts and kits are placed
alongside the corresponding diagram.
All drawings and parts are clearly marked for Rel. 1.0 machines or Rel. 2.0 machines.
For more information, see “1.3 What Is Covered” on page 9
NOTE Only the relevant parts are listed in the tables; that is, only those parts that can be requisitioned from
Philips for replacement or exchange.
CAUTION After preventive maintenance or repair of a faulty machine, complete a performance verification to
ensure that the machine is ready for use before handing it over to the customer. See “5 Performance
Verification” on page 121 for the relevant information.
are described in “8 Repair” on page 253.

9 Service Parts and Tools
9.1 Service Kits for Preventive Maintenance 326

9.1.3 Annual Service Kit, IBS IntelliSave AX 330
9.1.4 Service Kit, 2-Year, IntelliSave AX700 331
9.1.5 4- Year Service Kit 332
Service Kit, 4-Year for Rel. 1.0 332
Service Kit, 4Y, IntelliS. AX700 for Rel. 2.0 333
9.2 Repair Parts 334
9.2.3 Wheel Base for IntelliSave 338
9.2.4 Counterweight Change Kit for IntelliSave 338
9.2.5 Support plate for 2x OD150 Cylinders 338
9.2.6 Rear Cover Assembly 340
Rear Cover Assy - IntelliSave AX700 340
9.2.7 Support Bar Assemblies for Cylinders 341
Supp. Bar Assembly for Ø100,Ø109,Ø120 Cylinder 341
Support bar strap repair kit 343
9.2.8 Left Side Profile Assembly 344
Water Trap Housing 344
9.2.9 Flow markers and flow marker holders 346
Flow markers- Rel. 1.0 machines 346
Flow markers- Rel. 2.0 machines 346
9.2.10 Flowmeters 347
AUX O2 Barb Kit 347
9.2.11 Vaporizer Gas Box 348
Vaporizer Gas Box (continued) 352
Power Management Boards 354
Yokes Kit 354
Downlight protection Cable Kit 355
Fresh Gas Switch Valve 356
9.2.12 Table Plate Assembly 357
9.2.13 Rear Inlet Panel 359
Rear Inlet Panel for Rel. 1.0 359
Rear Inlet Panel for Rel. 2.0 361
9.2.14 Communications Board 363
9.2.15 Internal SmartLog PC Assembly 364
9.2.16 EGM Gas Box 365
EGM Part Numbers 366
AX700 Kit Front Glass- Repair Kit 367
AX700 Optical Encoded- Ctrl. Wheel 367
EGM Valve Block Assembly 367
9.2.17 EGM Valveblock Assembly 369
AX700 Valve Housing Kit 371
AX700 Proportional Valve Kit 371

9 Service Parts and Tools
AX700 Nozzle Housing Kit 371

9.2.18 Top Shelf Assembly 373
9.2.19 Ventilator 375
Ventilator AX700 for Rel. 1.0 375
Patient Suction (Option) 375
Pat. Suc. overflow repair kit, IntelliS. 375
Ventilator AX700, 3bar, for Rel. 2.0 377
9.2.20 Valve Block Assembly for Ventilator 379
Valve Block Assembly for Rel. 1.0 Ventilator 379
Valve Block Assembly for 2.0 Ventilator 381
PEEP Valve Repair Kit 383
Expiratory Valve - Ventilator 383
Ventilator reduc. valve kit 383
9.2.21 IBS 385
9.2.22 IBS Assembly 387
Inspiration Cone- IBS- IntelliSave 389
Expiration Cone- IBS- IntelliSave 389
Bag Connector Kit 389
APL Valve O-rings 389
9.2.23 IBS Base Assembly 391
IBS Base Sealing Kit 391
9.2.24 Pneumatic Control Panel 394
O2 Flowmeter 5-15 L/min 394
O2 Flowm. 5-15 L/min f. IntelliS. for Rel. 2.0 395
Pressure Gauge 0-10 Bar 396
High Pressure Tube- IntelliSave 398
9.2.25 Double Back Bar Assembly Kits 398
Back Bar Valve Complete 398
Vaporizer Manifolds for IntelliSave AX700 398
Select. Backbar Repair Kit 399
Double Back bar Draeger assy 400
9.2.26 Gas Module Assembly 401
9.2.27 AGSS/ WAGD Manifolds 402
Nist for AGSS 402
DISS for WAGD/ AGSS 404
9.2.28 Inlet Connection Overview Table 405
9.2.29 Generic small parts kits 406
General purpose tubes for repair 406
Fittings 406
Fuses Kit 407
9.2.30 Vaporizers 407
9.3 Service Tools 408
9.3.1 Test Adapter Kit 414
9.3.2 Pneumatics Leakage Tester 415

9 Service Parts and Tools 9.1 Service Kits for Preventive Maintenance
9.1 Service Kits for Preventive Maintenance

9.1.1 Service Kit, Annual, IntelliSave AX700- Rel. 1.0
This kit applies to Rel. 1.0 machines.
453564416331 (36423-1)
No. in Description Quantity

diagram
1 Flow marker 25 L/min 1
2 O-ring Ø7.65x1.78 EPDM 1
3 Filter bronze, 100m 1
4 Transparent tube, 1200mm 1
5 Tie wrap w/hole for M4 screw 2
6 Reservoir hose, 1m 1
7 Filter SIKA-B 30, Ø26.5x2 3
8 Silencer 2
9 Filter white for fan 2
10 O-ring Ø13.95x2.62 4
11 High pressure gasket, O2 and Air, red 2
12 High pressure gasket, N2O-CO2, black 1
13 ORING Sil.Blue for IBS 1
14 O-ring Ø49.6x2.4, EPDM, 70 shore A 1
15 Membrane 1
17 Yellow valve flap assembly 2
18 Valve dome kit 1
19 O-ring Ø25x2.5, EPDM, 70 shore A 1
21 IBS sealing bush, Ø15 2
23 Changeover valve for IBS 1
24 Expiratory valve for IBS 1
25 Inspiratory valve for absorber 1

9.1 Service Kits for Preventive Maintenance 9 Service Parts and Tools
Figure 9-1: Annual Service Kit for Rel. 1.0 machines

9.1.2 Service Kit, Annual, IntelliSave AX700- Rel. 2.0

This kit applies to Rel 2.0 machines.
453564480511 (36423-12)

diagram
1 Flow marker 25-40 L/min 1
4 Transparent tube, 1200mm 1
6 Reservoir hose, 1m 1
7 Filter SIKA-B 30, Ø26.5x2 3
8 Silencer 2
9 Filter for fan 2
10 O-ring Ø13.95x2.62 4
11 High pressure gasket, O2 and Air, red 2
12 High pressure gasket, N2O-CO2, black 1
15 Membrane 1
18 Valve dome kit 1

Figure 9-1: Annual Service Kit for Rel. 2.0 machines

9.1.3 Annual Service Kit, IBS IntelliSave AX

453564418761 (36433)
This service kit is for servicing the IBS only. Parts are available in “Service Kit, Annual, IntelliSave
AX700- Rel. 1.0” on page -326. Therefore only order this kit if an additional IBS needs service.

diagram
3 Membrane 1
6 Valve dome 2
Figure 9-2: Annual Service Kit, IBS IntelliSave AX

9.1.4 Service Kit, 2-Year, IntelliSave AX700

453564416451 (36423-2)
This service kit is used every 2nd year, if a multigas module is installed.

diagram
1 Nafion/PE tube for Receptacle 1
2 Filter PVC clear/blue PTFE 0.45m 1
4 O-ring for water trap receptacle 2
Figure 9-3: 2-Year Service Kit

9.1.5 4- Year Service Kit
Service Kit, 4-Year for Rel. 1.0

453564416671 (36423-4)

diagram
1 Battery 12V, with label 2
2 Self sticking rubber knob 8
3 Battery 24V 1500mAh 1
4 Membrane, black 1
5 Valve seat 1
6 Valve 1
7 Friction ring 1
Figure 9-4: 4-Year Service Kit for Rel. 1.0

Service Kit, 4Y, IntelliS. AX700 for Rel. 2.0

453564451991

diagram
1 Battery 12V, with label 2
2 Self sticking rubber knob 8
3 Battery 24V 1500mAh 1
Figure 9-5: 4-Year Service Kit for Rel. 2.0

9 Service Parts and Tools 9.2 Repair Parts
9.2 Repair Parts
No. in Description Quantity 12NC Part No.

diagram
1 Wheel Base for IntelliSave, Complete w/ wheels 1 453564451771 (36458-68)
See “9.2.3 Wheel Base for
IntelliSave” on page 338
3 Rear cover assembly 1 See “9.2.6 Rear Cover
Assembly” on page 340
4 Bracket for rear cover 1 See “Rear Cover Assy -
IntelliSave AX700” on
page 340.
6 Left side profile assembly 1 See “9.2.8 Left Side Profile
9 Drawer with soft close 2 Rel. 1.0: 453564407071
(10622)
Rel. 2.0: 453564449701
See “Drawer Rail Repair Kit
for Rel. 1.0” on page 336.
12 Vaporizer gas box 1 See “9.2.11 Vaporizer Gas
Box” on page 348
13 Table plate assembly 1 See “9.2.12 Table Plate
14 Top shelf assembly 1 453564407171 (PN
10626)
“9.2.18 Top Shelf
15 Rear inlet panel 1 See “9.2.13 Rear Inlet
Panel” on page 359
16 EGM gas box with touch screen 1 See “9.2.16 EGM Gas Box”
on page 365
18 Ventilator 1 See “9.2.19 Ventilator” on
page 375
20 IBS 1 See “9.2.21 IBS” on
page 385

9.2 Repair Parts 9 Service Parts and Tools
Figure 9-6: IntelliSave AX700 Parts

9.2.1 Drawer Rail Repair Kit for Rel. 1.0

453564511741

diagram
2 Soft-Rail.45 KTS verz. 300mm 2
3 Handle for Drawer 1
4 Damper carrier 2
5 Screw DIN 7991 M3x10 4
6 Screw RHR M4 X 25MM A2 2
7 Washer ø4,3xø12x1,5 2
8 Damper Ball Bearing 2
9 Screw DIN 912 M3X12 4
10 Screw Torx BN 20146, M4x10 8
11 Rail Damper 2
Figure 9-7: Drawer Rail Repair Kit for Rel. 1.0

9.2.2 Drawer Rail Repair Kit for Rel. 2.0

453564451851

diagram
2 Drawer Rail set KA4532 300mm 1
6 SCRW Torx BN 20146 M4x10 4
7 SCRW Torx CH M4x6 BN 20146 4
Figure 9-8: Drawer Rail Repair Kit for Rel. 2.0

9.2.3 Wheel Base for IntelliSave
Wheel Ø125, white, w/Brake, repair-kit

453564451751
diagram
9 CASTER OD125 white w/brake 1
13 CASTER Cable pusher 1
11 SCRW DIN912 M12X75 A2 1
Wheel Ø125, white, wo/Brake, repair-kit

453564451761
diagram
10 CASTER OD125 white wo/brake 1
11 SCRW DIN912 M12X75 A2 1
9.2.4 Counterweight Change Kit for IntelliSave

453564451831

diagram
5 Counterweight for IntelliSave 14.1Kg 2
7 Drive Fastener for coverplate 5
8 Screw Din 912 M12x65 2
12 Washer Ø24xØ13x2.5mm 6
14 Lock nut, Din 985, M12 2
9.2.5 Support plate for 2x OD150 Cylinders

453564451821

diagram
15 A MACH Support plate 2xOD150 1
16 SCRW Hexagon CHR M12x35mm 4
12 WASHR StSteel OD24xOD13x2.5mm A2 4

Figure 9-9: Wheel Base AssemblyA
A.Might look different depending on the configuration.

9.2.6 Rear Cover Assembly
Rear Cover Assy - IntelliSave AX700

453564408641 (36458-30)
No. In Description Quantity
Diagram
1 Rear cover assembly 1
ns Bracket for rear cover 1
6 Support Bar assembly for Ø100, Ø109, Ø120 Cylinders 1
Figure 9-10: Rear Cover Assembly for Rel. 2.0A

A.Might look different depending on your configuration. For Rel. 1.0 machines, replace with Rel. 2.0 Rear Cov-
er Assembly

9.2.7 Support Bar Assemblies for Cylinders
Supp. Bar Assembly for Ø100,Ø109,Ø120 Cylinder

453564449681
diagram
1 Support Bar for Ø100,Ø109,Ø120 Cylinders 1 10621-351
2 Screw RHR M5 X 10MM A2 9 70046-0510
3 Support Block for Ø100, Ø109 Cylinders 3 10621-354
4 Strap with square ring 3 10623-323
5 Anchor for 30mm velcro 6 10623-322
6 Strap assembly for Ø140 Cylinders with velcro 3 10623-324
Figure 9-11: Support Bar Assembly for Ø100, Ø109, Ø120 Cylinders

Support Bar Assembly for Ø140-Ø150 Cylinder

453564449691
diagram
1 Support Bar for 2 X Ø150 Cylinders 1 10623-321
2 Anchor for 30mm velcro 4 10623-322
3 Strap with square ring 2 10623-323
4 Strap assembly for Ø140 Cylinders with velcro 2 10623-324
Figure 9-12: Support Bar Assembly for 2xØ150 Cylinders

Support bar strap repair kit

453564451841
This generic repair kit works with all support bar assemblies

diagram
16 Support block for Ø100 and Ø109 Cylinder 1
2 Anchor for strap 2
4 Strap assy w.ring 30mm velcro 1
3 Strap assy OD150 with velcro 1
8 Screw, M5x10mm A2 3

9.2.8 Left Side Profile Assembly

diagram
2 Flow marker holder 1 See “Flow markers and flow
marker holders” on
page 346.
7 Flush mounted frame for Artema gas module 1 See “Water Trap Housing”
on page 344.
8 Receptacle for Artema water trap 1 See “Water Trap Housing”
on page 344.
11 Flowmeter O2 0-14 L/min 1 See “Flowmeters” on
page 347.
12 Suction connector assembly 1 453564420171 (32526-
200)
13 Silicone tube, clear, Ø3/Ø7, 950mm 2 See “ General purpose tubes
for repair” on page 406
14 Clear PVC tube Ø10/Ø7mm 1 See “ General purpose tubes
for repair” on page 406
17 Plastic clip w. adhesive (20pcs) 7 453564453081
Water Trap Housing

453564408651 (36458-31)
diagram
7 Flush mounted frame for Artema gas module 1
8 Receptacle for Artema water trap 1
10 Screw M2x6 2

Figure 9-13: Left Side Profile Assembly

9.2.9 Flow markers and flow marker holders
Flow markers- Rel. 1.0 machines

These parts apply to Rel. 1.0 machines..
Description 12NC Part No.

Flow marker holder with ON/OFF- Complete 453564408671 (36458-33)
Flow marker holder without ON/OFF- complete 453564454431 (36458-61)
Flow marker 25 L/min (Yellow) 453564394101 (13676)
Flow marker 15 L/min (Green) 453564407451 (13671)
Flow marker holder Flow marker 25 L/min
Flow markers- Rel. 2.0 machines

These parts apply to Rel. 2.0 machines.

Flow marker holder with ON/OFF- Complete 453564481651 (36458-66)
Flow marker holder without ON/OFF- complete 453564481661 (36458-67)
Flow marker 25-40 L/min 453564481671 (13675)
Flow marker holder Flow marker 25-40 L/min

9.2.10Flowmeters
diagram
ns Flowmeter O2 0-14L/min. Rel. 1.0 453564407471
(32043)
ns Flowm. O2 0-12L/min - IntelliS., Rel2.0 453564453071
Figure 9-14: Aux O2 Flowmeter
AUX O2 Barb Kit

453564408681 (36458-34)
diagram
ns Barb for flowmeter w/ Filter 1
ns Union nut with 9/16 UNF 1
ns O-ring Ø6.07x1.78 EPDM 1

9.2.11Vaporizer Gas Box

diagram
35 Vap. Manifold- Selectatec- 1 453564419981 (11080-250)a
IntelliSave
See “Double Back Bar Assembly Kits” on page 398.
5 Yoke for O2 - IntelliSave 1 453564514401 (incl extra labels)
6 Yoke for N2O - IntelliSave 1 453564513341 (incl extra labels)
7 Yoke for AIR - IntelliSave 1 453564514411 (incl extra labels)
ns Mains Transformer- AX700 1 453564420241 (40075-35)
ns Switch, ON/OFF for LED 1 40090-650
lights
22 Battery 12V 7.2Ah 2 453564393851 (10995-216)
25 NPL/MPL Valve Assy 1 453564451981
30 Fresh Gas Switch Valve- 1 453564419201 (10623-220)
Siesta i
See “Fresh Gas Switch Valve” on page 356.
31 Vacuum Switch Valve- 2 453564419211 (10623-230)
Siesta i
32 Power Management Board 1 See “Power Management Boards” on page 354.
33 Appliance socket assembly 1 453564408731 (36458-40)
a.Might be Draeger Back Bar depending on Vaporizer used.
Continued ...
Figure 9-15: Vaporizer Gas Box (part 1)


Vaporizer Gas Box (continued)

diagram
34 Torx screw 2
36 Lamp LED downlight 12VDC 1W 2 453564394431 (40075-85)
37 Appliance socket assy 1 453564407121 (10623-82)
41 Tie wrap w/hole for M4 screw 6 Cable tie wrap with holder (25pcs)"
453564408971 (36458-1002)
46 Mini ejector 1 453564408741 (36458-41)
47 Non-return valve, 6mm/6mm 3 453564420191 (36690-70)
50 Cable for 2xLED-downlight 1 453564407151 (10623-88)
51 Push in fitting, T-piece, Ø6 3 See “Fittings” on page 406.
ns Quick connector angled, Ø6/M5 1 See “Fittings” on page 406.
62 Y-conn. Ø7-Ø10mm 1 See “Fittings” on page 406.
ns Adjustable Flow Restrictor 1 453564420341 (11955-20)
71 Power supply for Log PC 1 453564420231 (40075-12)


Vaporizer Gas Box (continued)

diagram
ns Cable Mains Power Interf. Board 1 453564393541 (10653-85)
ns PM-EGM flat cable 1 453564407131 (10623-83)
91 Tie wrap 3 453564408961 (36458-1001)


Power Management Boards

PM-board, 230V, IntelliSave, Rel. 1.0 453564407101(10623-60)
PM-board, 115V, IntelliSave, Rel. 1.0 453564419051(10623-65)
PM-board, 230V, IntelliSave, Rel. 2.0 453564451921
PM-board, 115V, IntelliSave, Rel. 2.0 453564451931
Yokes Kit
O2 - 453564514401, Air - 453564514411, N2O - 453564513341
Description Quantity
Color coding label(s) (2 for O2 or Air / 1 for N2O) 1 or 2
Yoke 1
Screw 1
Washer 1
Nut 1
Spacer 1
Angled quick coupling 1
High Pressure Gasket (Red for O2 and Air, black for N2O) 1

Downlight protection Cable Kit

453564471821
Figure 9-21: Downlight protection Cable kit

Fresh Gas Switch Valve

453564419201 (10623-220)

diagram
1 MPL Valve Assy 1 453564393461 (10623-20)
Figure 9-22: Fresh Gas Switch Valve

9.2.12Table Plate Assembly

diagram
4 Writing table assembly 1 453564407161 (10625-40)
5 O2 flush assembly, 45 LPM 1 Rel. 1.0: 453564408751
(36458-42
Rel. 2.0: 453564451871
6 Turn switch valve 1 453564407441 (11983)

Figure 9-23: Table Plate Assembly

9.2.13Rear Inlet Panel
Rear Inlet Panel for Rel. 1.0

diagram
2 Inlet manifold VAC 1 See “Inlet Connection
Overview Table” on
page 405.
3 Inlet manifold O2 1 See “Inlet Connection
page 405.
4 Inlet manifold Air- IntelliSave 1 See “Inlet Connection
page 405.
5 Inlet manifold N2O- IntelliSave 1 See “Inlet Connection
page 405.
6 Inlet manifold AGS 1 See “ Nist for AGSS” on
page 402
15 Fan filter complete 10 453564408941
16 Master fan. 12V DC w. Cable 1 453564393861 (10995-84)
19 Communication board 1 See “9.2.14
Communications Board”
on page 363
20 Internal SmartLog assembly 1 See “9.2.15 Internal
SmartLog PC Assembly” on
page 364
24 Power panel - 3 x DK hospital 1 453564407191 (10627-05)
24 Power panel - 3 x Schuko 1 453564407201 (10627-06)
24 Power panel - 3 x Nema (US) 1 453564407211 (10627-07)
24 Power panel - 3 x IEC, 230V AC 1 453564407221 (10627-08)
24 Power panel - 3 x IEC, 115V AC 1 453564420931 (10627-09)
ns Tie wrap for power panel, w/hole for M4 screw 2 Cable tie wrap with holder
(25pcs)" 453564408971
(36458-1002)

Figure 9-24: Rear Inlet Panel for Rel. 1.0

Rear Inlet Panel for Rel. 2.0

diagram
2 Inlet manifold VAC 1 “9.2.28 Inlet Connection
page 405
3 Inlet manifold O2 1 “9.2.28 Inlet Connection
page 405
4 Inlet manifold Air- IntelliSave 1 “9.2.28 Inlet Connection
page 405
5 Inlet manifold N2O- IntelliSave 1 “9.2.28 Inlet Connection
page 405
6 Inlet manifold AGS 1 See “ Nist for AGSS” on
page 402
15 Fan filter- 10 pcs 10 453564408941
16 Master fan. 12V DC w. Cable 1 453564393861
19 Communication board 1 See “9.2.14
Communications Board”
on page 363
20 Internal SmartLog assembly 1 See “9.2.15 Internal
SmartLog PC Assembly” on
page 364
24 Power panel w. fuses Schuko 453564421851
24 Power panel w. fuses NEMA 453564421861
24 Power panel w. fuses DK h. 453564421841
24 Power panel w. fuses IEC 230V 453564421871
24 Power panel w. fuses IEC 115V 453564421891
ns Power panel w. fuses AU/NZ 453564421901
ns Power panel w. fuses UK 453564421911

Figure 9-25: Rear Inlet Panel

9.2.14Communications Board

diagram
2 Extension serial cable 9p, Fixed male 1 453564420411 (10627-52)
3 RS232 split cable EGM to Smart Log/ Ext. 1 453564420551 (40045-80)
4 USB Cable, Male A, Female A, Panel 1 453564420421 (10628-84)
Figure 9-26: Communications Board

9.2.15Internal SmartLog PC Assembly
Description Quantity 12NC Part No.

SmartLog PC - AX700 1 453564539341
Low voltage power cable for SmartLog PC 1 453564407231 (10627-
606)
Tie wrap 4 453564408961 (36458-
1001)
Smartlog Flash-disk incl Smartlog SW. 1 453564463621
Compact Flash Card 2 Gb* 1 453564539321
* The flash card comes empty, and needs to have the correct SmartLog OS software installed before
use, see “SmartLog Software Installation” on page 310
Figure 9-27: Internal SmartLog PC Assembly

9.2.16EGM Gas Box

diagram
1 EGM box 1 See “AX700 Kit Front Glass- Repair
Kit” on page 367.
2 EGM 1 See “EGM Part Numbers” on
page 366.
4 Touch PCB assembly 1 See “AX700 Kit Front Glass- Repair
Kit” on page 367.
6 Patient pressure gauge assembly 453564407271 (10628-210)
7 Cable for EGM and fan 1 453564393871 (10995-85)
8 Control wheel 1 See “AX700 Optical Encoded- Ctrl.
Wheel” on page 367.
10 Optical Encoder w/enter and 200 mm 1 See “AX700 Optical Encoded- Ctrl.
wire Wheel” on page 367.
17 Y-conn. 2-4mm Luer- male 2 See “Fittings” on page 406.
46 Tie wrap 1 453564408961 (36458-1001)
47 Gasket, 329 mm 4 See “AX700 Kit Front Glass- Repair
Kit” on page 367.
47 Tie wrap w/hole for M4 screw 1 Please get "Cable tie wrap with holder
(25pcs)" 453564408971 (36458-
1002)
48 Gasket, 241 mm 4 See “AX700 Kit Front Glass- Repair
Kit” on page 367.
49 Spacer Ø15/Ø10x2 2 See “AX700 Optical Encoded- Ctrl.
Wheel” on page 367.
50 Front glass 1 See “AX700 Kit Front Glass- Repair
Kit” on page 367.
51 EGM Valve block assembly - IntelliSave 1 See “9.2.17 EGM Valveblock
ns CBL Cable f. EGM to Touch PCB 1 453564419931 (10628-66)
ns Cable for IBS, ABS Microswitch cable 1 453564393641 (10658-80)

EGM Part Numbers

Rel. 1.0 EGM (Exchange Part) 453564416461
Rel. 2.0: EGM Non RoHS (Exchange Part) 453564456871
Rel. 2.0: EGM IntelliSave AX700 RoHS (Exchange Part) 453564522561
NOTE Machines with Rel. 1.0 EGMs have serial numbers AM032013001-AM502012012 or DK30100001-
DK33500499.
For Rel. 2.0 machines, see the EGM's Service Tag for what exchange part to order- either RoHS or
Non RoHs. The exchange part is visible on the Service Tag under Service#. See “Service Tags” on
page 10.
CAUTION Ensure the correct EGM software is installed, according to “8.15 Software Compatibility Matrix” on
page 314
Figure 9-28: EGM Gas Box

AX700 Kit Front Glass- Repair Kit

453564408791 (36458-46)
diagram
1 EGM box 1
3 Front glass 1
4 Gasket, 329 mm 4
5 Gasket, 241 mm 4
6 Touch PCB assembly 1
AX700 Optical Encoded- Ctrl. Wheel

453564408801 (36458-47)
diagram
8 Control wheel 1
10 Optical Encoder w/enter and 200 mm wire 1
49 Spacer Ø15/Ø10x2 2
EGM Valve Block Assembly

For spare parts for the Valveblock, see “EGM Valveblock Assembly” on page 369
No. in Description 12NC Part No.

diagram
51 EGM Valveblock Assembly, Drivegas AIR Rel. 1.0: 453564407241 (10628-100)
Rel. 2.0: 453564449661
51 EGM Valveblock Assembly, Drivegas O2 Rel. 2.0 Only: 453564449671
ns Drivegas change Kita Rel. 2.0 Only: 453564449651
a.Used if drive gas needs to be changed from AIR -> O2.
AIR O2

Figure 9-29: EGM Gas Box

9.2.17EGM Valveblock Assembly

diagram
3 Valve housing w 33m filter w/chk valve 1 See “AX700 Valve Housing
Kit” on page 371.
9 Filter bronze, 100m 1 See “AX700 Valve Housing
Kit” on page 371.
10 Filter bronze, Ø8x2mm 1 See “AX700 Valve Housing
Kit” on page 371.
14 O-ring Ø19.1x1.6 EPDM 1 See “AX700 Valve Housing
Kit” on page 371.
Kit” on page 371.
17 O-ring Ø2.57x1.78 EPDM 4 See “AX700 Proportional
Valve Kit” on page 371.
Kit” on page 371.
28 Screw DIN 912 M3x18 4 See “AX700 Proportional
30 Gas selector valve for Siesta i 1 453564393771 (10659-
70099)
ns Cable for Gas Selector valve 1 453564393781 (10659-81)
31 Proportional valve 2 See “AX700 Proportional
32 Solenoid valve, NO - Air 1 453564394461 (40096-
505)
33 Solenoid valve NC N2O 1 453564394471 (40096-
510)
34 Cartridge Regulator 5 453564407251 (10628-
103)
35 Pressure switch NC/Viton 1 453564393701 (10659-12)
36 Housing for nozzle 1 See “AX700 Nozzle
Housing Kit” on page 371.
37 Lid for nozzle housing 1 See “AX700 Nozzle
Housing Kit” on page 371.
38 Nozzle Ø0.10 mm 1 See “AX700 Valve Housing
Kit” on page 371.

Figure 9-30: EGM Valve Block Assembly

AX700 Valve Housing Kit

453564408811 (36458-48)
diagram
3 Valve housing w 33m filter w/chk valve 1
10 Filter bronze, Ø8x2mm 1
38 Nozzle Ø0.10 mm 1
AX700 Proportional Valve Kit

453564408821 (36458-49)
diagram
31 Proportional valve 2
AX700 Nozzle Housing Kit

453564408831 (36458-50)
diagram
36 Housing for nozzle 1
37 Lid for nozzle housing 1

Figure 9-31: EGM Valve Block Assembly

9.2.18Top Shelf Assembly

diagram
1 Top shelf Assembly 453564407171 (10626)
4 ON/OFF switch with cable 453564407181 (10626-82)

Figure 9-32: Top Shelf Assembly

9.2.19Ventilator
Ventilator AX700 for Rel. 1.0

453564416491 (10629A)
These parts apply to Rel. 1.0 machines.
CAUTION Ensure the correct ventilator software is installed, according to “8.15 Software Compatibility Matrix”
on page 314

diagram
2 Ventilator PSU, Chgr and Fusebox Assy 1 453564420561 (10987-30)
5 Valve block assembly for ventilator 1 See “9.2.20 Valve Block
Assembly for Ventilator” on
page 379
7 Speaker for ventilator 1 453564420261 (40095-
107297)
12 Battery 24V 1500mAh- Vent. - Siesta 1 453564416681 (40099-67)
16 RJ Series Relay 24VDC, 8A 1 453564420431 (10629-657)
18 Patient Suction unit - IntelliSave (Option) 1 453564420181 (32530-110)
See “Patient Suction (Option)”
on page 375.
19 Fan for rear lower cover- Siesta iTS 1 453564419341 (40092-49)
Patient Suction (Option)

453564420181 (32530-110)
diagram
13 Sponge filter for Suction Unit 2 453564420161 (32010-22)
Pat. Suc. overflow repair kit, IntelliS.

453564451881
diagram
Tube Plast. Red OD8/OD6mm 23212
Suction connector assembly 453564420171 (32526-200)
Patient Suction Unit - Siesta 453564394261 (32530-100)

Figure 9-33: Ventilator for Rel. 1.0

Ventilator AX700, 3bar, for Rel. 2.0

Exchange Part- 453564451901
CAUTION Ensure the correct ventilator software is installed, according to “8.15 Software Compatibility Matrix”
on page 314

diagram
2 Ventilator PSU, Chgr and Fusebox Assy 1 453564420561
5 Speaker for ventilator 1 453564420261
10 Battery 24V 1500mAh- Vent. - Siesta 1 453564416681
14 RJ Series Relay 24VDC, 8A 1 453564420431
17 Fan with alarm and plug. 24VDC, 80x25mm 1 453564419341
16 Patient suction unit - IntelliSave (Option) 1 453564420181
See “Patient Suction
(Option)” on page 375.
30 Valve block assembly for ventilator 1 See “9.2.20 Valve Block
Assembly for Ventilator” on
page 379
32 Buffer Tank, 1.4L 453564449791

Figure 9-34: Ventilator for Rel. 2.0

9.2.20Valve Block Assembly for Ventilator
Valve Block Assembly for Rel. 1.0 Ventilator

diagram
2 Inspiratory Valve Ventilator 1 453564416311 (10967-400)
4 O-ring Ø8.1x1.6 EPDM 1 See “PEEP Valve Repair Kit”
on page 383.
on page 383.
6 Adapter for PEEP-valve 1 See “PEEP Valve Repair Kit”
on page 383.
7 PEEP valve 1 See “PEEP Valve Repair Kit”
on page 383.
8 Expiratory valve Ø16 - 19w 1 See “Expiratory Valve -
Ventilator” on page 383.
9 Screw DIN 912 M6x16 4 See “Expiratory Valve -
10 Washer Ø6.4xØ12x1.6 4 See “Expiratory Valve -
11 Valve seat, expiratory valve 1 See “Expiratory Valve -
15 Pilot valve 3 453564420571 (10987-800)
22 O-ring Ø10.1x1.6 EPDM 2 See “Ventilator reduc. valve kit”
on page 383.
25 O-ring Ø21.95x1.78 EPDM 1 See “Expiratory Valve -
26 Friction ring 1 See “Ventilator reduc. valve kit”
on page 383.
27 Membrane, black 1 See “Ventilator reduc. valve kit”
on page 383.
31 Valve seat 1 See “Ventilator reduc. valve kit”
on page 383.
32 Valve spring 6.0/5.0/19.0mm 1 See “Ventilator reduc. valve kit”
on page 383.
33 Valve 1 See “Ventilator reduc. valve kit”
on page 383.
37 MPL valve 1 453564408631 (36458-29)

Figure 9-35: Valve Block Assembly for Rel. 1.0 Ventilator

Valve Block Assembly for 2.0 Ventilator

diagram
on page 383.
on page 383.
4 Adapter for PEEP-valve 1 See “PEEP Valve Repair Kit”
on page 383.
5 PEEP valve 1 See “PEEP Valve Repair Kit”
on page 383.
6 Expiratory valve Ø16 - 19w 1 See “Expiratory Valve -
7 Screw DIN 912 M6x16 4 See “Expiratory Valve -
8 Washer Ø6.4xØ12x1.6 4 See “Expiratory Valve -
11 Pilot valve 3 453564420571 (10987-800)
22 O-ring Ø10.1x1.6 EPDM 2 See “Expiratory Valve -
25 MPL valve 1 453564408431 (10655-60)
28 Cartridge Regulator 1 453564407251 (10628-103)
30 Inspiratory Valve Ventilator 1 Rel. 2.0: 453564449781

Figure 9-36: Valve Block Assembly for Ventilator for Rel. 2.0

PEEP Valve Repair Kit

453564408841 (36458-51)
diagram
6 Adapter for PEEP-valve 1
7 PEEP valve 1
Expiratory Valve - Ventilator

Rel. 1.0: 453564408851 (36458-52)
Rel. 2.0: 453564451891 (36458-77)
diagram
8 Expiratory valve Ø16 - 19w 1
10 Washer Ø6.4xØ12x1.6 4
11 Valve seat, expiratory valve 1
25 O-ring Ø21.95x1.78 EPDM 1
Ventilator reduc. valve kit

Rel. 1.0 ONLY: 453564408861 (36458-54)
diagram
26 Friction ring 1
27 Membrane, black 1
31 Valve seat 1
32 Valve spring 6.0/5.0/19.0mm 1
33 Valve 1


9.2.21IBS

diagram
1 IBS assembly- Complete 1 453564407431 (11975-
100)
See also “9.2.22 IBS
2 IBS base assembly 2 See “9.2.23 IBS Base

Figure 9-37: IBS

9.2.22IBS Assembly
453564407431 (11975-100)

diagram
2 Bellows 1 453564394001 (11960-05)
3 Chamber 1 453564394011 (11960-09)
6 Inspiratory valve for absorber 1 453564420001 (11975-230)
7 Expiratory valve for IBS 1 453564420031 (11975-440)
10 APL valve 1 453564394041 (11960-330)
11 Yellow valve flap assembly 2 Ref to kit. "One way valve kit -
IBS"
12NC: 453564408461 (36458-14)
12 Membrane 1 453564394531 (51025-08)
13 Membrane weight 1 453564394521 (51025-07)
14 Valve dome with O-ring 2 Ref to kit. "One way valve kit -
IBS"
12NC: 453564408461 (36458-14)
15 ORING Sil.Blue for IBS 1 453564394321 (36330)
16 Changeover valve for IBS 1 453564420041 (11975-550)
17 O-ring Ø49.6x2.4, EPDM, 70 shore A 1 Ref to "Lid for IBS Spill valve"
453564408461 (36458-16)
22 Bag connector assembly 1 See “Bag Connector Kit” on
page 389.
22 Inspiration cone for IBS 1 See “Inspiration Cone- IBS-
IntelliSave” on page 389.
9 Cap for IBS spill valve 1 Ref to "Lid for IBS Spill valve"
453564408461 (36458-16)
23 Expiration cone for IBS 1 See “Expiration Cone- IBS-
24 O-ring Ø18.1x1.6 EPDM 2 Part of the cone kits
25 O-ring Ø24.5x2.00, EPDM, 70 shore A 2 See “Inspiration Cone- IBS-
See “Expiration Cone- IBS-
27 Screw Torx BN 15858, 3x16 7 See “Inspiration Cone- IBS-
See “Expiration Cone- IBS-
See “Bag Connector Kit” on
page 389.

Figure 9-38: IBS Assembly

Inspiration Cone- IBS- IntelliSave

453564408871 (36458-55)
diagram
22 Inspiration cone for IBS 1
18 Screw Torx BN 15858, 3x16 7
Expiration Cone- IBS- IntelliSave

453564408881 (36458-56)
diagram
23 Expiration cone for IBS 1
Bag Connector Kit

453564408891 (36458-57)
diagram
8 Bag connector assembly 1
APL Valve O-rings

453564408451 (36458-13)
diagram
ORING OD25x2.5mm 1
ORING OD32.99x2.62mm 1

Figure 9-39: IBS Assembly

9.2.23IBS Base Assembly

diagram
15 Switch Assy for absorber- IBS 1 453564394441 (40090-
325)
17 Absorber lock assembly 1 453564420051 (11975-60)
20 IBS sealing bush, Ø15 2 See “IBS Base Sealing Kit”
on page 391.
21 IBS sealing bush, Ø9 2 See “IBS Base Sealing Kit”
on page 391.
24 IBS detection switch 1 453564420251 (40090-
270)
32 O-ring Ø16.1x1.6 EPDM 1 See “IBS Base Sealing Kit”
on page 391.
39 Switch Assy for IBS Base 1 453564420011 (11975-
270)
45 Flex arm assy for IBS, IntelliSave 1 453564451941 (11975-92)
ns Clips for Flex arm 1 453564419951 (10655-85)
IBS Base Sealing Kit

453564408901 (36458-58)
diagram

Figure 9-40: IBS Base Assembly for Rel. 1.0

Figure 9-41: IBS Base Assembly for Rel. 2.0

9.2.24Pneumatic Control Panel

diagram
3 Gauge block assembly, low pressure 1 See See “Pressure Gauge 0-
10 Bar” on page 396.
4 Gauge block assembly, high pressure 1 See See “Pressure Gauge 0-
315 Bar” on page 397.
5 O2 flowmeter 5-15 L/min 1 See “O2 Flowmeter 5-15 L/
min” on page 394.
6 Toggle switch valve assembly 1 453564407421 (11921)
7 Patient suction switch valve assembly 1 453564420061 (11982-
100)
8 Regulator for air driven suction unit 1 453564407081 (10623-
155)
9 PatientSuction Gauge Assy 1 453564407091 (10623-
211)
10 Set screw w/. int. 6Kt. M4 x 8mm RS 1 See “O2 Flowmeter 5-15 L/
min” on page 394.
11 Label, Ø17, O2, green 1 See “O2 Flowmeter 5-15 L/
min” on page 394.
12 Oxygen knob for 3/16" shaft 1 See “O2 Flowmeter 5-15 L/
min” on page 394.
15 Quick connector straight, Ø6/1/8" 2 See “Fittings” on page 406.
O2 Flowmeter 5-15 L/min

453564408711 (36458-37)
diagram
ns Label, Ø17, O2, White 1
5 O2 flowmeter 5-15 L/min 1
10 Set screw w/. int. 6Kt. M4 x 8mm RS 1
11 Label, Ø17, O2, green 1
12 Oxygen knob for 3/16" shaft 1
15 Quick connector straight, Ø6/1/8" 2

O2 Flowm. 5-15 L/min f. IntelliS. for Rel. 2.0

45356451331
diagram
5 O2 flowmeter 5-15L/min 3 bar 1
10 Set screw w/. int. 6Kt. M4 x 8mm RS 1
ns Label, Ø17, O2, White 1
11 Label, Ø17, O2, green 1
12 Oxygen knob for 3/16" shaft 1
15 Quick connector straight, Ø6/1/8" 2
30 Flow ctrl. Reg 1
Figure 9-42: Pneumatic Control Panel

Pressure Gauge 0-10 Bar

453564408661 (36458-32)

diagram
2 Press. Gauge 0-10 bar, psig 1
3 MACH Color Code Ring, Bla/Whit 1
4 MACH Color Code Ring, Yellow 1
5 MACH Color Code Ring, Green 1
MACH Color Code Ring, Blue
MACH Color Code Ring, White
6 Plug-inConne.Strai. OD6xM5 1
7 Screw M3X6 2
Figure 9-43: Low Pressure Gauge


453564514421
diagram
2 Press. Gauge 0-315 bar psig 1
4 Screw M3X6 2
5 Copper OD8/OD4x3mm(1/8IN) 1
6 Nipple 1/8IN for OD6 1
7 MACH Color Code Ring, Bla/Whit 1
8 MACH Color Code Ring, Yellow 1
MACH Color Code Ring, Green
9 MACH Color Code Ring, White 1

453564514431
diagram
3 Press. Gauge 0-100 bar psig 1
4 Screw M3X6 2
5 Copper OD8/OD4x3mm(1/8IN) 1
6 Nipple 1/8IN for OD6 1
7 MACH Color Code Ring, Blue 1
Figure 9-44: High Pressure Gauge

High Pressure Tube- IntelliSave

453564514381
Description Quantity
High pressure tube incl. Fittings 1
O-rings 2
Copper gasket 1
High pressure connector 1
9.2.25Double Back Bar Assembly Kits
Back Bar Valve Complete

453564408441 (36458-12)
diagram
2 Valve for back bar 4
Vaporizer Manifolds for IntelliSave AX700

diagram
1 Vap. Manifold - Draeger - IntelliSave 453564451971 (11060-
250)
2 Vap. Manifold - Selectatec - IntelliSave 453564419981

Select. Backbar Repair Kit

453564408721 (36458-39)
diagram
3 Cover plate for back bar 2
4 Code pin 2
6 Philips screw M3x8mm 4
7 Spring for back bar 2
8 Philips screw M2.5x6mm 4
Figure 9-45: Double Back Bar Selectatec

Double Back bar Draeger assy

453564451971 (11060-250)
diagram
1 Double Back Bar for Draeger 1
2 Valve for Back Bar 4
11 Spring for back bar 1
Figure 9-46: Double back bar Draeger assy

9.2.26Gas Module Assembly

diagram
1 Artema Gas Module, Non RoHS (Exchange 1 453564416661
Part) (41030A)(Exchange part)
1 Artema Gas Module, RoHS (Exchange Part) 1 453564522581 (Exchange
Part)
2 Power cable f. Artema Gas Module 1 453564394491 (41030-10)
3 Y-conn. 2-4mm Luer- male 1 See “Fittings” on page 406.
NOTE RoHS gas modules are marked with a sticker with the text "RoHS", positioned close to the serial
number label. If the gas module to be replaced is a RoHS part, you must order a RoHS exchange part.
If the gas module to be replaced is not RoHS compliant, order the Non RoHS exchange part.
Figure 9-47: Artema Gas Module Assembly

9.2.27AGSS/ WAGD Manifolds
Nist for AGSS

Inlet Manifold - AGSS (453564408761 (36458-43))

diagram
1 Nist Inlet Manifold AGS 1
5 Label, OD17,AGS,Blue/Brown 1
6 Hose Socket 8mm -1/8IN RG 1
7 GASKT Aluminium OD14/OD10 x1.5mm 1
Retainer OD14x8 Tube for AGSS Inlet (453564408781 (36458-45))

diagram
2 Hose Socket NIST AGS 1
3 Retainer NIST AGS 1
8 ORING EPDM OD10.6x2.4mm 1
Retainer 1/2" Tube for AGSS Inlet (453564408771 (36458-44))

diagram
4 Hose Socket NIST AGS 1/2IN 1
3 Retainer NIST AGS 1
8 ORING EPDM OD10.6x2.4mm 1

Figure 9-48: Nist for AGS

DISS for WAGD/ AGSS

Inlet manifold WAGD-DISS (453564427041)

diagram
1 Label, OD17, WAGD, Purple 1
ns Label, OD17, WAGD, blue/brown 1
ns Label, OD17, AGS, Blue/Brown 1
4 Inlet Manifold WAGD-DISS 1
Figure 9-49: DISS for WAGD

9.2.28Inlet Connection Overview Table
Inlet Manifold Type

Gas Nist Diss Nist to SIS Adapter
O2 453564407461 (31360) 453564462201 989803184621 (31389)
Air 453564420351 (31360C) 453564462211 989803184641 (31389C)
N2O 453564420361 (31360A) 453564462221 989803184631 (31389A)
VAC 453564394221 (31350B) 453564462231 989803192061 (31389B)

9.2.29Generic small parts kits
General purpose tubes for repair

Description Longest Part Used 12NC Part No.
Tube PVC clear OD10/ID7 L: 1200 1050mm 453564413661 (23101-120)

Tube silicone clear OD7/ID3 L: 1000 1000mm 453564412581 (23170-100)
Tube plastic black OD6/ID4 L: 1200 1200mm 453564412201 (23200-120)
Tube plastic red OD6/ID4 L: 700 640mm 453564412211 (23202-070)
Tube plastic yellow OD6/ID4 L: 1000 740mm 453564412531 (23204-100)
Tube plastic blue OD6/ID4 L: 1000 840mm 453564412541 (23206-100)
Tube plastic white OD6/ID4 L: 2000 1050mm 453564412551 (23209-200)
Tube plastic red OD8/ID6 L: 1000 1000mm 453564412571 (23212-100)
Fittings
453564408981(36458-3000)

Y-conn. - For EGM Flow block 3 13860
Y-conn. OD7-10mm 3 13863
MECHASY Mini Angle/Male 3 31425
Coupl.Assy
WASHR OD8/5x1mm 10 36151-10
Straight male a. OD6/ 1/8INRG 3 36690-10
Plug-inConne.Strai. OD6xM5 3 36690-12
Straight male a. OD8/ 1/8INRG 3 36690-14
Plig-inConnect.T-piece OD6 3 36690-18
Plug-inConnect.T-piece OD8 3 36690-19
Plug-inConn.AngleOD6x1/8IN 3 36690-20
Rot. elbow male OD8/1/8INRG 3 36690-21
Plug-inConnec.Angle OD6xM5 3 36690-22
PluginCon.Ad.OD6mm-1/8INRG 3 36690-60
PluginConn.Ada.OD8-1/8INRG 3 36690-61
WASHR Retain Ring 9x0.8mm DIN472 20 36735-09

Fuses Kit
453564454951
This kit contains the below quantities of fuses. You can also fill up the Fuses kit by ordering
specific fuses in quantities of 10.
Fuse M 1.6A L 250v 10 453564454761
Fuse M 3.15A L 250v 10 453564454791
Fuse T 400mA H 250v 10 453564454821
Fuse T 1.25A H 250v 10 453564454831
Fuse T 2.5A H 250v 10 453564454851
Fuse T 4A H 250v 10 453564454861
Fuse T 5A H 250v 10 453564454871
Fuse T 6.3A H 250v 10 453564454901
Fuse T 8A H 250v 10 453564454911
Fuse T 10A H 250v 10 453564454921
Fuse T 2.0A H 250v 10 453564458461
LittleFuse SMD T 3.5A 125V 10 453564454931
LittleFuse SMD T 375mA 125V 10 453564454941
9.2.30Vaporizers

Penlon Vaporizer SEVO 989803184791 (11540)
Penlon Vaporizer Halothane 989803184801 (11547)
Penlon Vaporizer Enflurane 989803184811 (11548)
Penlon Vaporizer ISO 989803184821 (11549)

9 Service Parts and Tools 9.3 Service Tools
9.3 Service Tools

This section lists the most common tools used by a service engineer to perform preventive maintenance
or repairs. The list shows examples (in the Source column) of manufacturers able to provide the tools,
but similar tools may also be used. Some of the more special tools are listed with a Part No. and 12NC
number for purchase via Philips, but it is recommended to find the tools locally if possible. The last
columns, with heading “Usage”, indicate the type of service event in which the tool is used: IN is
installation, CM is corrective maintenance and PM is preventive maintenance.
Most of the tools are additionally shown in Figure 9-50 and Figure 9-51 below.
25
2 9
1
5 11
8 10 17 18
14 23
13
24
4
3
6
12
7
21
Figure 9-50: Service Tools (figure 1)

9.3 Service Tools 9 Service Parts and Tools
28
16 29
27
30 15
19
32
37 35
36
31
26 34
22 33 20

Usage
No. in Description 12NC Part No. Source
picture
Standard Tools
1 1 set of Allen keys 1.5-10mm Wera IN
950PKL/9SM - CM
P/N: 05022087001 PM
2 1 Allen key 1/8” (Adjust CM
Reduction valves) PM
3 Allen screwdriver 2,2.5,3,4mm Wera IN
352 Ball end screwdriver for hexagon CM
socket screws PM
2.0mm: P/N: 05022800001
2.5mm: P/N: 05138070001
3.0mm: P/N: 05022805001
4.0mm: P/N: 05022810001
4 1 set of Philips screwdrivers No. Wera 350 PH or similar CM
0-1-2 PH0: P/N: 05008705001 PM
PH1: P/N: 05008710001
PH2: P/N: 05008720001
6 1 set of spanners 6-22mm Bahco CM
P/N: 111M/17T PM
17 pcs.
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16,
17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22

Usage
picture
7 Rel. 1.0 Only Bahco CM
24mm spanner for Nist filter P/N: 111M-24 PM
change
8 Torx 6 screwdriver (water trap Wera 367 CM
receptacle) TX6
P/N: 05028001001
9 Torx keys T10-T30+ Wera 967 SPKL/9 CM
P/N: 05024334001 PM
10 Socket wrench set 4-13mm Bahco SL25 CM
1/4" Socket set PM
P/N: SL25
12 Screwdrivers for slotted screws Wera 335 CM
2.5 - 3.5 - 4 - 5 mm 2.5: 05110000001 PM
3.5: 05008015001
4.0: 05110004001
5.5: 05110007001
13 Side Cutter for cable binders CM
PM
14 Snipe nose pliers CM
PM
ns 23mm spanner for Inlets O2, Purchase locally CM
N2O, Air PM
ns 25mm spanner for AGSS/ Purchase locally CM
WAGD PM
Special Tools
5 Hose clamp screwdriver - 7mm 453564416151 Wera CM
(72012) 391 Hose clamp screwdriver for 7mm PM
P/N: 05028150001
11 Rel. 1.0 Only 453564416201 Bahco CM
Tube Socket wrench 27mm for (72017) PN: 1936M-24-27 PM
Inlet manifold valve
15 Anti-static Service Kit CM
16 O-ring pick tool incl Tweezer 453564416221 CM
(72019) PM
17 Rel. 1.0 Only 453564419251 CM
Reduction valve seat tool (72230) PM
18 Tool f. Spindles Rotam.Box 453564419221 CM
(72202) PM
19 Tube cutter (Internal tubes Ø5/ 453564416211 Legris.com CM
Ø6) (72018) P/N: 3000 71 00
20 Tool for loosening of A,B and C 453564419991 CM
valve on IBS (11960-14) PM
21 Oxygen Compatible Grease 453564419181 CM
(36811) PM

Usage
picture
22 Oxygen Compatible Grease, 453564416141 CM
liquid (36825) PM
23 Special Tool Plastic Tubing 453564419241 CM
OD6/ID4mm (72206)
24 Special tool for 40096-505 and 453564420531 CM
40096-510 magnet valves (72240)
25 Adjustable Torque wrench (0.5- Purchase locally IN
15 Nm) CM
26 Loctite 242 - threadlocker 453564416131 CM
(36805)
27 Cable marking dispenser. 453564420451 CM
For usage when changing EGM (72020)
manifold
38 USB to RS232 adapter f. SW 453564420461 CM
update (72261)
39 Null modem Serial Cable DB9 Purchased locally CM
Female to DB9 Male
For SW updates (EGM and
Vent.)
40 Serial DB9 Female to Female Purchased locally CM
Adapter
ns Tool for filter change in Patient 453564416271 PM
suction (72530-04)
ns Adjustment tool for IBS lock 453564451951 CM
(72084)
ns USB 2.0 Compact Flash card E.g. use a Hama USB 2.0 Card CM
reader (only for SmartLog Reader 1.000 & 1
Software Installation)
Test Equipment
ns PLT-01, Pneumatic Leakage 453564424881 See “Pneumatics Leakage Tester” on CM
Tester (72975-020) page 415. PM
28 Test lung 453564420151 CM
(82699-01) PM
29 Test lung, Neonatal 453564420441 Maquet Neotestlung: 6301720 CM
(82699-03) PM
34 TSI pressure tube 453564416241 CM
(72233) PM
35 Digital Voltmeter Eg. Fluke 177 CM
Philips Tools Catalog PM
12NC: 242218181151
36 Calibration Gas - Artema Purchase locally or IN
453564420071 CM
(41035-300) PM

Usage
picture
37 Regulator for calibration gas, Purchase locally or IN
Artema 453564416301 CM
(41035-310) PM
ns Electrical Safety analyzer Fluke Biomedical ESA 620 or similar. IN
Philips Tools Catalog Tool code: CM
TC402 PM
ns Infrared Temp measuring Fluke 62 IR thermometer CM
instrument for calibration of 10:1 -30 -> +500C (or similar)
PEEP valve.
Requirement: Max=+100C or
more
ns Patient hose kit, disposable 453564538811 IN
CM
PM
TSI Kit- 453564416251 (72260)
30 TSI Certifier FA model 4080 453564416251 TSI 4088 CM
(72260) PM
31 TSI High flow module 453564416251 TSI 4081 CM
(72260) PM
32 TSI Low Flow module 4082 453564416251 TSI 4082 CM
(72260) PM
33 TSI Oxygen Sensor kit 453564416251 TSI 4073 CM
(72260) PM

9.3.1 Test Adapter Kit
453564424891
Usage
picture
1 Angled Suction connection 1 CM
PM
2 Catheter connection ISO 6.0mm 1 CM
PM
3 Plastic Tube 1 CM
PM
4 Clear Silicon Tube 1 CM
PM
5 Catheter connection ISO 3.5mm 1 CM
PM
6 T-piece connection 1 CM
PM
7 Plastic Tube (Black) 1 CM
PM
8 Blindplug 1 CM
PM
9 Silicon Adapter (Blue) 1 CM
PM
10 T-piece for O2 Fuel-cell Sensor 1 CM
PM
11 Ext. Connector OD7mm 1 CM
PM
12 MACH Connector ISO 22, Male To Hose Con. 1 CM
PM
13 Screw Cap Luer Lock 1 CM
PM
14 Plastic patient hose 40cm 1 CM
PM

14
4
5 8
10
7
6
9 11
2
13 12
1
3
Figure 9-53: Test Adapter Kit
9.3.2 Pneumatics Leakage Tester

453564424881 (72975-020)
Usage
Description Part No.
AGA-AGA O2 test hose 453564454881 CM

(72975-0270) PM
LT-01 Carry Case with protective foam 453564458521 (50052) CM
PM

The following matrix shows the most common wall connection types, and the accessories needed
together with the Pneumatics Leakage Tester:
Description Part No. Wall Connection

DISS AGA DIN
Plug set for NIST 453564456881 X X
(72975-271)
Test adapter, NIST 453564464061 X X
(72975-0271)
Plug set for DISS 453564456891 X
(72975-272P)
Test adapter, DISS 453564464071 X
(72975-0272)
NIST to DISS 453564462891 X
adapter, O2 (31383)
Hose 4m DISS, O2 989803186121 X
(Green) (23430-US)
Hose 4m AGA, O2 989803186031 X
(White) (23410-AGA)
Hose 4m DIN, O2 989803185951 X
(White) (23400-DIN)

Figure 9-54: Pneumatics Leakage Tester
Figure 9-55: Adapter for Pneumatics Leakage Tester


A
A Technical Data
NOTE All flow and volume measurements are based on STPD conditions (Standard Temperature and
Pressure, Dry). STPD means atmospheric pressure of 1013 hPa (cmH2O) and temperature of 21ºC
(69.8°F).
A.1 General
Dimensions
Height 1550mm (45.27’inches)
Width 810mm / 920mm (31.88 inches / 36.22 inches) incl. IBS
Depth 790mm (31.10 inches)
Weight Approx. 150 kg (330.69lb) (depending on configuration)
Mechanical specifications
Maximum load on table's side rail 20 kg (44.09 lb)
Maximum torque on table's side rail 20 Nm (14.75 lbf ft)
Maximum load on table top 20 kg (44.09 lb)
Maximum load on top shelf 30 kg (66.14 lb)
Electrical
Class I
Type B
Power supply voltage 100/115/220/230 volt +/- 10% at 50/60 Hz
a
Power consumption 130 VA + 20 VA (multigas module) + DES vaporizer +
Smartlog
Battery capacity 1.5 Ah (ventilator), 7.2 Ah (EGM and multigas module)
Battery backup time Approx. 90 min
Battery type B1 = 20-Cell NiMH, 24V, 1.5Ah, Rechargeable
B2 = 12V Lead-Acid, 7.2 Ah, Rechargeable
B3 = 12V Lead-Acid, 7.2 Ah, Rechargeable
Batteries B2 and B3 are connected in series to provide 24V
Battery charge time Approx. 12 hours

A Technical Data A.2 Gases
Note There is no difference in performance when the machine is battery powered; however the Smart
Log (if installed) will not work during a mains power.
Auxiliary Electrical Outlets and Vaporizer Outlets (Optional)
Max. current from each individual outlet 1.25A (220/230V) / 2.5A (100V-115V)
Max. total current from 3 outlets on the 2.0A (220/230V) / 4.0A (100V-115V)
rear of the machine
Fuse for each outlet T1.6AH250V (220/230V) / T3.15AH250V (100V-115V)
Common Fuse for all 4 outlets T4AH250V (220/230V) / T8AH250V (100V-115V)
Voltage from each outlet - Approximately equal to supply voltage. There may be a small increase in the
outlet voltage compared to the supply voltage, when the outlets are lightly loaded. Max. voltage increase =
11V.
Service Life
10 years
Communication Ports
Frequency from each outlet Equal to supply frequency
RS232 Data output according to protocol, for data collection.
SmartLog (optional) USB: For storing data on USB stick
9-Pin: For connection to Philips IntelliBridge
a.*) Desflurane vaporizer power consumption depends on manufacturer and is not included in the power
consumption specification.
A.2 Gases
Note All gases and anesthetic agents must comply with the US Pharmacopoeia, European Pharmacopoeia
or local recognized requirements for medical gases.
Wall Supply
Inlet pressure Rel. 1.0: 400-600 kPa, 58-87 psig for O2, Air and N2O
Rel. 2.0: 300-600 kPa, 44-87 psig for O2, Air and N2O
Must comply with relevant national standards such as:
ISO 9170, Terminal Units for Use in Medical Gas Pipeline
Systems (Europe); CSA Z305.1, Nonflammable Medical Gas
Piping Systems (Canada); or JIS T 7101, Medical Gas
Pipeline Systems (Japan), or NFPA 99, Standard for Health
Care Facilities (USA).
Reserve Gas Supply (Optional)
Pin-index yokes Ø100, Ø109 and Ø120 Air and N2O
cylinders
Gauges
Central Gas Supply 0-1000 kPa, 0-145 psig for O2, Air and N2O
Gas cylinder 0-31500 kPa,0-4570 psig for O2 and Air
0-10000 kPa, 0-1450 psig for N2O

A.3 Electronic Gas Mixer (EGM) A Technical Data
Auxiliary Gas Outlet (Optional)

Flow for O2 or Air (meas. at inlet press.) 15 L/min at 400 kPa, 58 psig (60 L/min at 1013 hPa)
14 L/min at 600 kPa, 87 psig (85 L/min at 1013 hPa)
13 L/min at 1200 kPa, 174 psig (155 L/min at 1013 hPa)
AGSS/WAGD
Scavenging flow 30–40 L/min
Gas Alarm
Alarm start pressure Rel. 1.0: 250 kPa, 36 psig for O2, Air and N2O
Rel. 2.0: 200 kPa, 29 psig for O2, Air and N2O
Auxiliary Fresh Gas Outlet (Optional)
Max. pressure (MPL valve) 90 hPa (cmH2O)
Integrated Auxiliary O2 Ball Flow Meter (Optional)
Flow range Rel. 1.0: 0–14 L/min
Rel. 2.0: 0–12 L/min
Accuracy 7.5% actual flow + 2.5% full scale
Integrated Patient Suction (Optional)
Max. vacuum -75 kPa, -560 mmHg (at 400 kPa, 58 psig inlet pressure for
gas driven suction)
Max. suction flow 25 L/min
Gas consumption (gas driven suction) -25 kPa, -185 mmHg: Max. 15 L/min
-50 kPa, -375 mmHg: Max. 22 L/min
-75 kPa, -560 mmHg: Max. 27 L/min
A.3 Electronic Gas Mixer (EGM)

Set Parameters
Fresh gas flow Rel. 1.0: 0.0, 0.2 to 20.0 L/min
Rel. 2.0: 0.2 to 20.0 L/min
Flow resolution 0.2 to 1.0 L/min: 0.05 L/min
1.0 to 20.0 L/min: 0.1 L/min
O2 set% 21 to 100% (O2/Air mix)
25 to 100% (O2/N2O mix)
O2 set% resolution 1% (v/v)
Accuracy ± 5% (v/v)
O2 flow range 0.0, 0.1 to 10.0 L/min
Air flow range 0.0, 0.1 to 10.0 L/min
N2O flow range 0.0, 0.1 to 10.0 L/min
Accuracy (all gases) 0.1 to 0.5 L/min: ± 50 mL/min
0.5 to 10.0 L/min: ± 10% of reading

A Technical Data A.4 Ventilator
O2 Emergency Flow
Flow range 5.0-15.0 L/min ± 20%
O2 Flush Valve
Flow Approx. 45 L/min
A.4 Ventilator
Drive Gas (Air or O2)
Pressure Min. 300 kPa, 43.5 psig at 80 L/min
Max. consumption (Peak flow) 120 L/min
Mean consumption Max. 80 L/min at 280 kPa, 40.6 psig
Pressure Range
Pressure limitation (P. lim max.) 90 hPa (cmH2O) (mechanical, pressure limitation value)
Max. adjustable working pressure 80 hPa (cmH2O)
High-pressure alarm 10 to 80 hPa (cmH2O)
Min. expiration pressure (P. lim min) 1 hPa (cmH2O)
Cycling pressure 1-80 hPa (cmH2O)
Note Negative pressure is only possible if the patient is exclusively breathing spontaneously.
Set Parameters
Tidal volume 20 to 1500 mL
With neonatal specs. (optional): 10 to 1500 mL in PRVT
mode
Accuracy (VCV and SIMV mode) 20 to 250 mL: ± 10%, min. 10 mL
250 to 1500 mL: ± 7%, min. 25 mL
Resp. Rate 4 to 80 resp./min
I:E ratio 3:1 to 1:9.9
PEEP OFF, 4 to 20 hPa (cmH2O)
Inspiratory pressure 4 to 67 hPa (cmH2O)
Inspiratory pause 0 to 70%
Ventilation mode (controlled) Rel. 1.0: VCV, SIMV (optional), PCV, PSV (optional),
PRVT (optional), VSV (optional)
Rel. 2.0: VCV, SIMV, PCV, PSV, PRVT (optional), VSV
SIMV Settings
SIMV trigger point -0.5 to -10.0 hPa (cmH2O)
PSV/VSV Settings
Support pressure (PSV only) 4 to 50 hPa (cmH2O)
Inspiratory trigger 1 to 10 L/min

A.5 Integrated Breathing System (IBS) A Technical Data
Expiratory trigger 10 to 80%

PSV/VSV backup 10 to 40 sec.
Airway Pressure Monitor
Measured parameters Peak, Plateau, Mean, PEEP, Compliance
(if vol. monitor is installed)
Pressure range -10 to 99 hPa (cmH2O)
Accuracy ± 2 hPa (cmH2O)
O2% Fuel-Cell Sensor (Optional)

Measurement range 0 to 100% O2 (v/v)
Accuracy ± 2% (v/v) at constant temperature, and pressure
High O2% alarm 19 to 100% and OFF
Low O2% alarm 18 to 100%
Expected O2 sensor lifetime More than 500,000 O2% hours under normal conditions
(equivalent to 33 months when placed in 25°C (77°F) air)
Cross-gas interference Less than 1.25% O2 response to anesthetic agents
Drift Less than 1% O2 over 24 hours
Rise time Less than 6 sec. for 90% of final value
Volume Monitor (Optional)

Measurement range, Ped. sensor 0 to 500 mL
Measurement range, Adult sensor 0 to 2000 mL
Accuracy, Ped. sensor <100 mL: ± 10 mL
100 to 300 mL: ± 10% of reading
Accuracy, Adult sensor 200 to 500 mL: ± 50 mL
500 to 2000 mL: ± 10% of reading
High expired minute volume alarm 0.1 to 80.0 L and OFF
Low expired minute volume alarm 0.1 to 79.9 L and OFF
A.5 Integrated Breathing System (IBS)

Dimensions
Size (H x W x D) 335 x 200 x 275mm (13.18 inches x 7.87 inches x 10.82
inches) (incl. APL and bellows chamber)
Weight 4 kg (8.8lb) (complete system excl. i-SORB CO2 absorber)
APL Valve
Setting SP, 5 to 75 hPa (cmH2O)

A Technical Data A.6 Multigas Module (Optional)
Accuracy ± 7 hPa (cmH2O) at 4 L/min

i-SORB CO2 Absorber
Capacity Approx. 880g (1.94 lb) soda lime
Volume (empty) 1420 mL
A.6 Multigas Module (Optional)

Correction
Barometric pressure, samplegas pressure, temperature and full spectral interference correction
Warm-up Time
Time needed to reach ISO accuracy 45 sec. after powering up
specifications
Time needed to reach full accuracy 2 min after powering up
specifications
ISO specifications As full accuracy specs, but derated as follows:
CO2 Add ± 0.3% CO2
AA: Add ± 8% of reading
N2O: Add ± (2% N2O + 8% of actual reading)
Water Trap
Capacity 10 mL (Adult) / 6 mL (Neonatal)
Emptying interval (Half full, worst case) Adult: 17 h @ 200 mL/min, 37oC, 100% RH
Neonatal: 20 h @ 120 mL/min, 37oC, 100% RH
Measured Parameters
Insp. O2% 0 to 100% Resolution: 1%
Exp. O2% 0 to 100% Resolution: 1%
Insp. N2O% 0 to 100% Resolution: 1%
Exp. N2O% 0 to 100% Resolution: 1%
Insp. CO2 0 to 10% Resolution: 0.1%
Exp. CO2 0 to 10% Resolution: 0.1%
Insp. AA% HAL, ENF, ISO: 0 to 7.5%
SEV: 0 to 9%
DES: 0 to 20%
Resolution: 0.1%
Exp. AA% HAL, ENF, ISO: 0 to 7.5%
SEV: 0 to 9%
DES: 0 to 20%
Resolution: 0.1%
Resp. Rate 0 to 100 resp./min
Calculated Parameters
MAC 0 to 10. Resolution: 0.1

A.6 Multigas Module (Optional) A Technical Data
A.6.1 Gas Measurement Accuracy (Full Accuracy Specifications)

RESP. RATE 1 TO 60 RESP./MIN
Gas Concentration [%REL] Tolerance [%ABS] Interference [%ABS]

CO2 0–1 ± 0.1 N2 O 0.1
1–5 ± 0.2 O2 0.1
5–7 ± 0.3 All agents 0.1
7–10 ± 0.5
> 10 Not specified
N2O 0–20 ±2 CO2 0
20–100 ±3 O2 0
All agents 0
O2 0–25 ±1 CO2 0.2
25–80 ±2 N2 O 0.2
80–100 ±3 All agents 1.0
HAL, ENF, ISO 0–1 0.15 CO2 0
1–5 0.2 N2 O 0.1
>5 Not specified O2 0.1
2nd agent 0.2 (typical)
SEV 0–1 ± 0.15 CO2 0
1–5 ± 0.2 N2 O 0.1
5–8 ± 0.4 O2 0.1
>8 Not specified 2nd agent 0.2 (typical)
DES 0–1 ± 0.15 CO2 0
1–5 ± 0.2 N2 O 0.1
5–10 ± 0.4 O2 0.1
10–15 ± 0.6 2nd agent 0.2 (typical)
15–18 ±1
> 18 Not specified
Note: Measurement drift is included in these specifications
A.6.2 Cross-Gas Interference
Contaminant Interference [% ABS]

CO2 N2O O2 Agents
<1% Acetone 0.1 0.1 0 0
<1% Methane 0.1 0.1 0 0
<0.1% Methane 0 0.1 0 0
<80% He Not specified Not specified 2.0 Not specified
<50 ppm NO Not specified Not specified 2.0 Not specified
<80% N2 0 0 0 0

A Technical Data A.6 Multigas Module (Optional)
Resp. Rate Measurement Accuracy

Resp. Rate 0 to 60 resp./min ± 1 resp./min
Resp. Rate >60 resp./min Not specified
Resp. Rate detection CO2 variation in measured CO2
Gas Measurement, Typical Response Time 10–90% (Adult Water Trap)
O2 max. 500 msec.
N2O max. 250 msec.
CO2 max. 250 msec.
AA max. 300 msec. (once the agent has been identified)
System Response Time
Adult water trap and gas sample tube max. 3m (9.84 ft) with inner diam. 1.5mm (5.90cin):
Max. 6 sec.
Neonatal water trap and gas sample tube max. 3m (9.84 ft) with inner diam. 0.9mm (3.54cin):
Max. 6 sec.
Primary Anesthetic Agent Identification
A primary anesthetic agent is identified by the multigas module if the concentrations are higher than:
Halothane 0.25% HAL (0.50% at ISO spec.)
Enflurane 0.15% ENF (0.40% at ISO spec.)
Isoflurane 0.15% ISO (0.40% at ISO spec.)
Sevoflurane 0.15% SEV (0.40% at ISO spec.)
Desflurane 0.15% DES (0.40% at ISO spec.)
Secondary Anesthetic Agent Identification
A secondary anesthetic agent is identified by the multigas module if the concentrations are higher than:
Halothane 0.30% HAL (0.50% at ISO spec.)
Enflurane 0.30% ENF (0.50% at ISO spec.)
Isoflurane 0.30% ISO (0.50% at ISO spec.)
Sevoflurane 0.30% SEV (0.50% at ISO spec.)
Desflurane 0.30% DES (0.50% at ISO spec.)
Alarms
Insp. O2% high 18 to 100% and OFF resolution: 1%
Insp. O2% low 18 to 100% resolution: 1%
Exp. O2% high 10 to 100% and OFF resolution: 1%
Exp. O2% low 10 to 100% resolution: 1%
Insp. N2O% high Fixed at 82%
Insp. CO2 high 0.1 to 3.0% and OFF resolution: 0.1%
Insp. CO2 low 0.1 to 3.0% and OFF resolution: 0.1%
Exp. CO2 high 0.0 to 15.0% and OFF resolution: 0.1%
Exp. CO2 low 0.0 to 15.0% and OFF resolution: 0.1%

A.7 Environment A Technical Data
Insp. AA% high 0.0 to 30.0% resolution: 0.1%

Insp. AA% low 0.0 to 30.0% and OFF resolution: 0.1%
Exp. AA% high 0.0 to 30.0% resolution: 0.1%
Exp. AA% low 0.0 to 30.0% and OFF resolution: 0.1%
Resp. Rate high 4 to 80 resp./min and OFF resolution: 1 resp.
Resp. Rate low 4 to 80 resp./min and OFF resolution: 1 resp.
NOTE The humidity content in the sampled gas is adapted to ambient humidity level in the Nafion section of
the tubing that connects the multigas module with the DRYLINETM Receptacle. The multigas
analyzer then uses a fixed correction of 11 hPa (cmH2O) to compensate for the influence of water
vapor in the gas sample, when converting the gas readings to ATPD. Any other ambient H2O partial
pressure will dilute the gas sample to a different extent, causing a certain measurement error. Under
typical operating conditions however, this effect is not noticeable. An increase in the ambient H2O
partial pressure to 30 hPa (cmH2O) (i.e. 28OC, 80% RH or 33OC, and 60% RH) will cause a general
error for all gases of only -2% REL.
A.7 Environment
Storage and transportation temperature -20°C to +50°C (-4°F to + 122°F) (optional O2 fuel-cell
sensor: 0°C to +50°C (32°F to 122°F))
Working temperature 10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
Relative humidity 10 to 90% RH (non condensing)
Storage and transportation pressure 63 kPa to 106 kPa
Working pressure 70 to 106 mbar, equal to 3000 m to -100 m (9842.5 ft. to -
984.25 ft.)
A.8 Standards
The IntelliSave AX700 complies with the following standards
IEC 60601-1
IEC 60601-1-1
IEC 60601-1-2
IEC 60601-1-4
IEC 60601-1-6
IEC 60601-1-8
IEC 60601-2-13
ISO 8835-2
ISO 8835-3
ISO 8835-5
IEC 68-2-27

A Technical Data A.8 Standards
IEC 68-2-64
ASTM D 4169-01
ISO 10993-1
ISO 21647
ISO 5356-1
ISO 5359
ISO 7396-2
EN 980
EN 1041
EN ISO 10079-3
CGA C-9
CGA V-5
Classification according to EN 60601-1
Class I equipment Type of protection against electrical shock
Type B equipment Degree of protection against electrical shock
Continuous operation Mode of operation
Classification according to Directive 93/42EEC concerning medical equipment
The anesthesia machine, Model IntelliSave AX700, is classified as Class IIb.

A.9 Factory Default Settings A Technical Data
A.9 Factory Default Settings

When you select this option, the machine will be restored to the following Factory Default Settings:
A.9.1 Electronic Gas Mixer Default Settings
Parameter Factory Value Limits

Fresh gas flow 0.3 L/min 0.0, 0.2-20.0 L/min
O2 set% 100% Carrier gas Air:
21-100%
Carrier gas N2O:
25-100%
O2 flow 0.0 L/min 0.0, 0.1-10.0 L/min
Air flow 0.0 L/min 0.0, 0.1-10.0 L/min
N2O flow 0.0 L/min 0.0, 0.1-10.0 L/min
Carrier gas Air Air, N2O
A.9.2 Ventilator Default Settings

Table A-56: Default settings relevant in verification procedures
Ventilation mode VCV VCV, SIMV, PCV, PSV, PRVT,
VSV
Tidal volume/ 500 ml/6.0 L 20-1500 mL/0.2–60.0 L
Minute volume
Respiration rate 12 resp./min 4–80 resp./min
I:E ratio 1:2 3:1 – 1:9.9
PEEP OFF OFF, 4–20 hPa (cmH2O)
Inspiratory pressure 12 hPa (cmH2O) 4–67 hPa (cmH2O)
Table A-57: Default settings second part

Inspiratory pressure 12 hPa (cmH2O) 4–67 hPa (cmH2O)
PSV support pressure 7 hPa (cmH2O) 4–50 hPa (cmH2O)
High-pressure alarm 30 hPa (cmH2O) (cmH2O) 10-80 hPa (cmH2O)
(25 hPa (cmH2O) if PCV is
chosen as the default ventilation
mode)
Inspiratory pause 0% 0-70%
SIMV trigger point -0.3 hPa (cmH2O) -0.5 to -10.0 hPa (cmH2O)
PSV/VSV Insp. trigger flow 3 L/min 1-10 L/min
PSV/VSV Exp. trigger flow 40% 10-80%
PSV/VSV backup periods 30 sec. 10-40 sec.

A Technical Data A.9 Factory Default Settings

B
BSchematics
This section gives a description of the pneumatics for Rel. 1.0 machines and provides large format
diagrams for both Rel. 1.0 and Rel. 2.0 machines; Rel. 2.0 pneumatics is described in “2.2 Pneumatics
Description” on page 31.
B.0.1 Pneumatics Description for Rel. 1.0
Oxygen
Oxygen is supplied from either the central inlet (1) or from the spare cylinder (2).
Via filters (6) and check valves (7) it is let to the pressure sensor port (8). This pressure is giving a signal
to the EGM, and activates an audible and visual oxygen alarm if the pressure is below 2.5 (x100 kPa).
The pressure is reduced to 2 (x100 kPa) in the pressure regulator (10).
The O2 flow control valve (11) is controlled by the EGM to give a user set flow.
A flow sensor is connected to the pressure ports P4 and P5 monitoring the O2 flow. The flow is let to
the back bar (12), and the fresh gas selector switch (13). The user can select either the AUX fresh gas
outlet (14) or the integrated breathing system (15). Additionally, oxygen is let to the auxiliary oxygen
outlet (16).
The pressure regulator (17) reduces the incoming pressure to 4 (x100 kPa) for the Aux. O2 flowmeter
(18) giving 0 - 14 L/min O2. The reduced pressure is led to the emergency fresh gas switch (19), and
the flowmeter (20) giving a 5-15 L/min O2 flow in conditions where the EGM is out of order.
The O2 flush valve (21) is giving an O2 flow of 35-50 L/min to the fresh gas selector valve (13), by-
passing the vaporizers connected to the back-bar (12). Finally, O2 is led to the drive gas selector valve
(37).
Air
Compressed medical air (Air) is supplied from the central inlet (3) or from the gas cylinder (33). Via
filters (6) and check valves (7) it is led to the pressure sensor port (22). This pressure is giving a signal
to the EGM, and activates an audible and visual Air alarm if the pressure is below 2.5 (x100 kPa). The
pressure is reduced to
2 (x100 kPa) in the pressure regulator (23).
If the user selects Air, the valve (24) is open and Air will flow to the Air/N2O flow control valve (25)
controlled by the EGM to give a user set flow. A flow sensor is connected to the pressure ports P6 and
P5 monitoring the Air flow.

B Schematics
N2O
N2O is supplied from either the central inlet (4) or from the spare cylinder (5). Via filters (6) and
check valves (7) it is let to the pressure port (9). This pressure is giving a signal to the EGM, and
activates an audible and visual N2O alarm if the pressure is below 2.5 (x100 kPa). The pressure is
reduced to 2 (x100 kPa) in the pressure regulator (26).
If the user selects N2O, the valve (27) is open and N2O will flow to the flow control valve (25)
controlled by the EGM to give a user set flow. A flow sensor is connected to the pressure ports P5 and
P6 monitoring the N2O flow.
The flow is led to the back bar (12) and the fresh gas selector switch (13). The user can select either the
AUX fresh gas outlet (14) or the integrated breathing system (15).
General for Inlet Pressures and Fresh Gas

The cylinder pressures are monitored by the pressure gauges.
The pressure of the fresh gas outlet (14) is limited to 90 (x100Pa) by the MPL valve (35).
Drive Gas Selection

Drive Gas is reduced to 4 (x100 kPa) by a pressure regulator (30), and is used for the ventilator, patient
suction, and active AGSS. If the pressure of the primary drive gas (Air) drops below 2.5 (x100 kPa), the
pressure switch (36) is activated, giving a signal to the drive gas selector valve (37), changing to the
secondary drive gas (O2).
AGSS
Drive Gas is supplied to the ON/OFF switch (32). When ON, the ejector (38) will create a flow from
the spill valve in the integrated breathing system (15) through the flow marker (39) to the AGSS outlet
(40) on the back of the machine.
For hospitals with active scavenging systems, the machine can be delivered without the ON/OFF
switch (32) and the power unit (38).
If an external patient system is used, it can be connected to the Aux. AGSS outlet (41).
Open reservoirs (15) and (42) prevent vacuum to be built-up in the AGS system.
Suction Unit Gas Powered

Drive Gas is supplied to the jet suction unit (31) through the ON/OFF switch (43). The vacuum is
controlled by the regulator (44), and is monitored by the vacuum gauge (45). A suction jar can be
connected to the suction connector (46).
Suction Unit VAC Powered

VAC is supplied from the central inlet (70). It is led to the vacuum switch valves (80) and (81), which
are controlled by the Adjust/ON/OFF switch (72). The vacuum is controlled by the regulator (73) and
is monitored by the vacuum gauge (74). A suction jar can be connected to the suction connector (46).
Ventilator
The ventilator (29) is pneumatically powered from the drive gas selector valve (37) through the inlet
filter (6). A pressure switch (47) monitors the drive gas pressure, giving an alarm if the pressure is below
2.5 (x100 kPa).

B Schematics
Drive Gas is led to the pressure regulator (48), reducing the pressure to 3 (x100 kPa) for the Insp. flow
control valve (49). This valve is controlled by the ventilator electronics, selecting a correct inspiratory
flow according to the ventilator settings. A differential pressure transducer connected to the pressure
ports P1 and P2 measures the flow, and during inspiration the signal to the insp. flow valve is
continuously adjusted, in order for the ventilator to give correct inspiratory flow to the Bag-in-bottle.
A pressure transducer connected to the pressure port P3 measures the system pressure (Bag-in-bottle
chamber pressure). This pressure is limited to 90 (x100Pa) by the MPL valve (52)
During inspiration the expiration valve (53) and the PEEP valve (54) are closed, and the drive gas is led
to the chamber (55) of the Bag-in-bottle system. The expiration valve (57) is closed during inspiration,
and open during expiration when the bellows (56) is in top and the pressure in the bellows is approx.
3 hPa higher than the pressure from the ventilator. Excess gases are evacuated through the AGS system.
During expiration the expiration valve (53) is open, and the pressure in the chamber (55) is released to
the AGS system.
If a PEEP pressure (4 - 20 hPa) is selected, the insp. flow controller is set to a drive gas flow during
expiration.
At the beginning of expiration, the expiration valve (53) and the PEEP valve (54) are fully open. When
the pressure in the patient breathing system reaches the set PEEP level, the expiration valve (53) is
closed and the PEEP valve (54) now controls the PEEP pressure.
The ventilator pressure sensor P8 measures the PEEP pressure. This measured pressure controls the
PWM signal to the PEEP valve (54) keeping the PEEP pressure constant to the selected value.
The drive gas is reduced to 3 (x100 kPa) in the pressure regulator (48), and is led to the pilot valve
(51). The pilot valve is controlled by the ventilator electronics. During STBY and MANUAL status the
valve is closed, and the Bag/vent valve (58) in the integrated breathing system (15) is set to manual
ventilation.
When the status is set to VENT, the pilot valve (51) is opened and the Bag/vent valve (58) in the
integrated breathing system (15) is set to automatic ventilation.
Manual Ventilation
During manual ventilation the Bag/vent valve (58), controlled by the ventilator, is set to manual
ventilation.
inspiratory limb, the expiratory limb, and to the bag (59).
When the bag (59) is squeezed during inspiration, the gas will flow through the Bag/vent valve (58),
the absorber (62), the inspiratory valve (64), and the inspiratory limb to the patient. When the bag
(59) is released, the expiration gases flow through the expiratory limb, expiratory valve (65), the Bag/
vent valve (58) to the bag (59).
The inspiratory pressure is limited in the APL valve (60), set by the user. Excess gases are evacuated
through the AGS system.
If the absorber is changed during use, the two absorber valves (76) and (77) will bypass the absorber
connection, so that gases are not lost.
The negative pressure relief valve (61) opens if the patient breathes spontaneously and the patient
breathing circuit is emptied for fresh gas (relief pressure is - 6hPa).

B Schematics
Automatic Ventilation
During automatic ventilation the Bag/vent valve (58), controlled by the ventilator, is set to automatic
ventilation.
inspiratory limb, the expiratory limb, and to the bellows (56).
When the bellows (56) is forced down during inspiration, the gas will flow through the Bag/vent valve
(58), the absorber (62), the inspiratory valve (64), and the inspiratory limb to the patient.
When the pressure in the chamber (55) is released, the expiration gases flow through the expiratory
limb, expiratory valve (65), the Bag/vent valve (58) to the bellows (56).
The inspiratory pressure is limited by the ventilator high pressure alarm, set by the user.
Excess gases are evacuated through the exhalation valve (57) to the AGS system, through the ventilator.
Volume Monitoring
Inspiratory/expiratory volumes can be measured by a flow sensor (option), which can be placed at the
Y-piece (69) or the expiratory port (63).
The flow sensor gives a pressure signal to the P9 pressure sensor of the ventilator. The ventilator then
calculates the actual patient flow over time, which gives a volume reading.
During start-up and at least every 10 min. the two Zero-calibration valves (78 and 79) are activated by
the ventilator for app. 3 sec. in order to do zero calibration of the P9 pressure sensor.
Gas Monitoring
Gas concentrations can be measured by an integrated multigas module (68) (option).
This multigas module continuously takes a sample from the Y-piece to analyze it. The sample flow is
then returned to the expiratory side of the patient breathing system.
If a multigas module is not installed, the inspired O2 concentration can be measured by an external O2
fuel cell sensor (66) (option).

B.1 Pneumatics Diagram for Rel. 1.0
Corner pole tube
42 85

AGSS/WAGD 55
(Option)
Patient Airway
Patient Airway
Ejector (Paw)
31 Ejector 39 P8
38 P 88
44 80
S5
GAS ANALYSER
Flowmarker 90 hPa Integrated Breathing
(Option)
Pressure relief System (IBS) 15
73 68
81 72
43 52 Expiratory
54 Exhalation
Regulator APL valve 60
32 57 65 63 (Option)
PEEP 0-75 hPa
valve
45 EXP
74 INSP/EXP
69 Flowsensor (Option)
53 58 76
S2
46 77 Patient
46
At E-box
At E-box
P1 P2
P
P
64
valve
INSP
S1 Bag/vent
Pressure Switch valve
47 controller S3
66
6
Electronic S4
Gasmixer
IBS
48
Base
Ventilator 29 3 Bar reg. 79
”E” ”E” Fresh gas 87
Selector Absorber 62
4 Bar
7 P9
S3 S4
P
Pat. Sensor
37 30 At E-Box
36
7 18

switch select valve
Selector 13
16 83 valve
AUX O2(option)
61
17
”C” ”C” O2 Flush
P 8 4 Bar
2 O2 reg.
90 hPa
MPL valve
11 20
O2 Yoke ”B” 14
2 Bar O2 Flow
(Option)
At EGM AUX FG Cone at
6 7
1
O2 pipeline P9
At EGM ”B”
P8
7 P 22 Air selector
33
”D” valve
25 P8
2 Bar ”D”
84 24
AIR reg.
Air Yoke 6 7 7
(Option) P7
3
AIR pipeline P
23 At EGM
AIR/N2O P5
At EGM Flow controller
7 P 9
5 ”A”
2 Bar
27
N20 Yoke 4 6 7
(Option)
N2O pipeline 26 N2O
”A” Selector valve

436
B.2 Pneumatics Diagram for Rel. 2.0
Corner pole tube
42 85

AGSS/WAGD 55
(Option)
Patient Airway
Patient Airway
Ejector (Paw)
31 Ejector 39 P8
38 P 88
44 80
S5
86 GAS ANALYSER
Flowmarker AUX Sample 90 hPa Integrated Breathing
(Option)
Gas Return Pressure relief System (IBS) 15
73 68
81 72
43 52 Expiratory
54 Exhalation
Regulator APL valve 60 (Option)
32 57 65 63
PEEP 0-75 hPa
valve
45 EXP
74 INSP/EXP
69 Flowsensor (Option)
53 58 76
S2
46 77 Patient
46
At E-box
At E-box
P1 P2
P
P
64
valve
INSP
S1 Bag/vent
Buffer Tank Pressure Switch valve
47 controller S3
66
6
Electronic O2 As primary drive gas S4
Gasmixer (Option)
IBS
48
Base
37 Ventilator 29 3 Bar reg. 79
36 ”E” Fresh gas 87
”E” Absorber 62
4 Bar Selector
7 P9
S3 S4
P
Pat. Sensor
37 30 At E-Box
36
7 18 90 hPa
82 MPL valve
switch select valve
Selector 13
16 83 valve
AUX O2(option)
61
17
”F” ”C” ”C” O2 Flush
P 8 3 Bar
2 O2 reg.
90 hPa
MPL valve
11 20
O2 Yoke ”B” 14
2 Bar O2 Flow
(Option)
”H” At EGM AUX FG Cone at
6 7
1
O2 pipeline P9
At EGM ”G” ”B”
P8
7 P 22 Air selector
33
”D” valve
25 P8
2 Bar ”D”
84 24
AIR reg.
Air Yoke 6 7 7
(Option) P7
3
AIR pipeline P
23 At EGM
AIR/N2O P5
At EGM ”I” Flow controller
7 P 9
5 ”A”
2 Bar
27
N20 Yoke 4 6 7
(Option)
N2O pipeline 26 N2O
”K” ”J” ”A” Selector valve

438
B.3 Electronics System Wiring Diagram- Top Level

440
B.3.1 System Wiring Diagram - Power Management Board

442
B.3.2 System Wiring Diagram - Ventilator

444
B.3.3 System Wiring Diagram - EGM

446
B Index
# compensating for 86
Analog IO 52
1-year maintenance 91
Assembling machine 258
2-year maintenance 110
Automatic drive gas selection
4-year maintenance 112 adjusting 232
A Automatic ventilation 37, 434
Auxiliary fresh gas
Abbreviations 12 testing 152
Accessing machine 255 Auxiliary fresh gas outlet
Adult patient flow sensor maintenance 95
calibrating 224 testing MPL valve 154
Adult volume measurement Auxiliary O2 flowmeter
testing 168 testing 146
AGSS 432 Auxiliary power outlets
calibrating 236 testing 178
testing 142
troubleshooting 246 B
AGSS ejector unit Back bar
maintenance 99 maintenance 94
AGSS tubes Backlight 41
maintenance 97
Backup battery for EGM
AGSS/WAGD 35 maintenance 112
Air 34, 431 Backup battery for ventilator
Air flow maintenance 116
calibrating 212 Bag-in-bottle and patient pressure
Air Flow menu 62 calibrating 223
Air fresh gas flow Batteries
testing 150 troubleshooting 243
Air inlet pressure Batteries, ventilator backup
calibrating 216 maintenance 116
Air Pressure menu 63 Battery charger 40
Air selector valve Battery monitoring 40
testing 137 Battery, EGM backup
Alarm for disconnection maintenance 112
testing 175 Boot phase
Alarm for high pressure troubleshooting 242
testing 176 Built-in safety features 29
Alarm for mains power
testing 162 C
Alarm for O2 gas supply
Calibration 209
testing 132
prerequisites 209
Alarm for system pressure
Calibration menu 61
testing 175
entering 210
Alarm for ventilator drive gas low
Capacitive touch interface board 56
adjusting 233
Carrier gas
Alarm speaker 53
setting 84
Altitude

Cautions Emergency fresh gas flow
definition of term 15 testing 148
general 17 troubleshooting 245
Checking shipment 74 Environment 427
Checklist Exchange parts See Service parts
installation 74 Explosion hazard 16
Color coding for gases 13
F
Compliance 30
Configuration tasks 83 Factory default settings 429
Control wheel 27 Fan 53
Country-specific settings, check 85 Fan filters
CPU board outputs 52 maintenance 101
CPU board power supplies 54 Fans
CPU board relays 52 testing 178
CPU watchdog 51 Flow sensor, adult patient
calibrating 224
Cross-gas interference 425
Flow sensor, ped. patient
Customer-specific settings, check 84
calibrating 226
D Flow sensors
calibrating 224
Data 419
Flowmarker
Date maintenance 96
setting 85
Fresh gas flow, Air
Default settings 429 testing 150
EGM 429
Fresh gas flow, emergency
ventilator 429
testing 148
Digital IO 52 troubleshooting 245
Disconnection alarm Fresh gas flow, N2O
Dose system Fresh gas flow, O2
troubleshooting 245 testing 148
Dose system leakage Fresh gas outlet, auxiliary
testing 140 testing MPL valve 154
Drive gas Fresh gas, auxiliary
Drive gas selection 35, 432 Freshgas menu 65
Drive gas selection, automatic Front overview 22
adjusting 232
Fuel-cell sensor, O2
E calibrating 230
Full self-test
EGM 27, 40 testing 145
replacing 259 Fuses 40
safety features 29
Fuses in ventilator
EGM battery replacing 280
maintenance 112
Fuses on PM board
EGM controller 40 replacing 279
EGM default settings 429
EGM manifold G
replacing 264
Gas color
Electrical safety changing 84
testing 180
Gas color menu 66
Electromagnetic emissions 68
Gas flow performance 30
Electronic gas mixer See EGM
Gas inlet 27
Electronics description 37

Gas measurement calibrating 235
changing 85 International color coding for gases 13
Gas measurement accuracy 425
L
Gas measurement menu 65
Gas mixer pneumatic manifold 27 LC self-test
Gas module testing 145
calibrating 229 LCD display 41
Gas module menu 63 Leakage
Gas monitor 56 testing dose system 140
Gas monitoring 37, 434 Local staff tasks 72
Gas supply Log PC 27, 49
safety features 29 power supply 39
Gases Lower back cover
color coding 13 removing 256
GUI processor 55
M
H
Mains alarm
Hand-over 86 testing 162
High pressure Mains power
troubleshooting 244 troubleshooting 243
High pressure alarm Maintenance 87
testing 176 1-year 91
2-year 110
I 4-year 112
prerequisites 89
IBS 36, 433 preventive 91
maintenance 102 timetable for 88
testing switches 163
Manifold
troubleshooting 246
test valves 125
IBS data 423
Manual ventilation 36, 433
IBS switches
Menu structure for service 57
testing 163
Middle back covers
Inlet pressure, Air
removing 257
calibrating 216
Miscellaneous menu 66
Inlet pressure, N2O
calibrating 217 MPL valve for auxiliary fresh gas outlet
testing 154
Inlet pressure, O2
calibrating 215 MPL valve for ventilator
testing 155
Inspection 83
Multigas module 28, 42
Inspection report 191
maintenance 110
Inspiratory flow 30 testing 176
Inspiratory flow from ventilator troubleshooting 247
calibrating 219
Installation 67 N
checklist for 74 N2O 34, 432
Installation menu 64 N2O flow
Integrated breathing system See IBS calibrating 214
Integrated patient suction N2O Flow menu 62
testing 141 N2O fresh gas flow
Interface DSP 41 N2O inlet pressure
Internal pressure regulators calibrating 217
testing 125 N2O Pressure menu 63
Internal reduction valves N2O selector valve

testing 138 Pin index yokes
Nist filters maintenance 93
maintenance 92 PLT-01, Pneumatic Leakage Tester 415
Notes PM board 26, 38
definition of term 15 power supply 39
NPL valve replacing 273
testing 172 PM board fuses
replacing 279
O
Pneumatics 31
O2 flow Pneumatics Leakage Tester 415
calibrating 211 Post maintenance 110
O2 Flow menu 62 Power management board See PM board
O2 flush Power outlets, auxiliary
troubleshooting 247 Power supply 39
O2 fresh gas flow Prerequisites 73
testing 148
Prerequisites for calibration 209
O2 fuel cell sensor
Prerequisites for maintenance 89
testing 176
troubleshooting 248 Prerequisites for performance verification 121
O2 fuel sensor 28 Prerequisites for repair 254
O2 fuel-cell sensor Pressure measurement
calibrating 230 testing 170
O2 gas supply alarm Pressure regulators, internal
O2 inlet pressure Preventive maintenance 91
calibrating 215 sequence for 87
O2 Pressure menu 63 Product description 21
ON/OFF switch 40 PWM outputs 52
Optional equipment 28 R
Oxygen 34, 431
Rear overview 23
P Reduction valve, ventilator
maintenance 117
Passwords 13
Reduction valves, internal
Patient and bag-in-bottle pressure
calibrating 235
calibrating 223
Release 1.0 9
Patient safety 16
Release 2.0 9
Patient Suction 375
Repair 253
Patient suction system
prerequisites 254
maintenance 102
Repair parts 323
PCV function
testing 172 Replacement parts See Service parts
Ped. patient flow sensor Report, test and inspection 191
calibrating 226 Reporting test results 190
Ped. volume measurement Responsibilities of user 14
testing 166 Rotameter version
PEEP function setting 85
testing 171
S
PEEP valve
calibrating 227 Safety features
Performance verification 121 built-in 29
prerequisites 121 Safety precautions
Philips personnel tasks 73 general 15

task-related 18 setting 85
Safety, electrical Timetable for maintenance 88
testing 180 Tool for filter change in Patient suction 412
Selector valve, Air Tools for service 408
testing 137 Top cover
Selector valve, N2O removing 255
testing 138 Touch-screen 27
Self-tests controller 42
testing 144 troubleshooting 243
Service menu 60 Touch-screen overview
Service menu structure 57 with gas module 24
Service mode without gas module 25
entering 13 Troubleshooting 239
Service parts 323
U
Service tools 408
Service workflow 11 Unpacking 74
Site planning 71 Upper back cover
Site preparation 71 removing 74, 76, 255, 298
responsibilities 72 User
Site requirements 73 responsibilities 14
Smartlog 27 V
troubleshooting 249
Smartlog function Vaporizer back bar
testing 179 safety features 29
Software Ventilation
installing 302 automatic 37, 434
Software description 55 manual 36, 433
Software options Ventilator 28, 35, 50, 432
checking 84 calibrating inspiratory flow 219
calibrating temperature compensation 229
Standards 427
diagram 50
Suction unit 35, 432 maintenance of backup battery 116
Supply gas maintenance of reduction valve 117
troubleshooting 244 power circuits 40
Switches for IBS power supply 51
testing 163 processor 56
Swivel wheel See Control wheel removing drawer 257
replace expiratory valve 290
Symbols 18
replacing 267
System pressure alarm replacing fuses 280
testing 175 safety features 29
T test valve 125
testing MPL valve 155
Task-related safety precautions 18 testing volume zeroing function 164
Technical data 419 Ventilator default settings 429
Test Adapter Kit 414 Ventilator drive gas low alarm
Test report 191 adjusting 233
Test results Verification of performance 121
reporting 190 Version check 239
Testing performance 121 Versions menu 60
Theory of Operation 21 Visual inspection in performance verification 122
Tidal volume Visual inspection in preventive maintenance 91
testing 165 Volume monitoring 37, 434
Time Volume zeroing function test 164

Volume, tidal Y
testing 165
Yokes
W maintenance 93
testing 127
Warnings
definition of term 15 Z
general 15
Workflow for service 11 Zeroing function test 164

Conformity according to the
Council Directive 93/42EEC
concerning Medical Devices.
Philips Anesthesia Care A/S

10620-91 56 072015
Phone: +45 4450 9990, Fax: +45 4450 9999

info.ac@philips.com
Manufacturer: Dameca A/S

Islevdalvej 211, 2610 Roedovre, Denmark
© 2015 Philips Philips reserves the right to modify technical specification and design without prior notice

Intellisave AX700

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Intellisave AX700

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IntelliSave AX700

Part Number 10620-91 56 072015

1.1 Who Should Use This Guide 9

2.1 Product Description 21

IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015 1

3.1 Electromagnetic Emissions 68

4.1 Preventive Maintenance Sequence 87

2 IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015

5 Performance Verification 121

5.1 Prerequisites 121

IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015 3

6.1 Prerequisites 209

7.1 How To Use This Section 239

4 IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015

8.1 Who Should Perform Repairs 253

IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015 5

9.1 Service Kits for Preventive Maintenance 326

A Technical Data 419

A.1 General 419

6 IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015

B.0.1 Pneumatics Description for Rel. 1.0 431

IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015 7

1.1 Who Should Use This Guide

1.2 How to Use This Guide

1.3 What Is Covered

Component Rel. 1.0 Rel. 2.0

IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015 9

1.3.1 Service Tags

The service tag contains the following information:

1.4 Release Structure of This Guide

10 IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015

1.4.1 Service Workflow

Installation Corrective Preventive

Perform Register/Claim Confirm Issue Replace PM Kit

1.5 Responsibility of the Manufacturer

IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015 11

Manufacturer: Dameca A/S, Islevdalvej 211

12 IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015

1.7 Document Style Conventions

NOTE Bold typeface is also used in other connections.

1.8 Internal Color Coding for Gases

IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015 13

2 Enter password according the table below.

Access Level Description Password

1.10 Responsibility of the User

14 IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015

• Description of error or fault

1.11 Warnings, Cautions and Notes

NOTE A note indicates circumstances to be considered while using the machine.

1.12 General Safety Precautions

IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015 15

16 IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015

IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015 17

Type B (EN 60601-1) protection against electrical shock

Adjustment of auxiliary O2 flowmeter for patient suction:

ON/OFF switch for lamp

Patient flow pictogram

18 IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015

Attention. Consult accompanying documents

Connection for manual respiration bag

Electrostatic-sensitive device (ESD)

Flow direction on the Integrated Breathing System (IBS)

IntelliSave AX700 Service Guide 10620-91 56 072015 19